The Project Gutenberg EBook of Modern Machine-Shop Practice, Vol. I (of 2), by 
Joshua Rose

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: Modern Machine-Shop Practice, Volumes I and II

Author: Joshua Rose

Release Date: March 21, 2012 [EBook #39225]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MODERN MACHINE-SHOP PRACTICE, VOL 1 ***




Produced by Ben Beasley, Harry Lamé and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net






Please see Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this document.

Large
image
(399 kB).
VOL. I.
MODERN MACHINE‑SHOP PRACTICE. FRONTISPIECE
Frontispiece
Copyright, 1887 by Charles Scribner’s Sons.
MODERN AMERICAN FREIGHT LOCOMOTIVE.

Modern
Machine-Shop Practice

BY

JOSHUA ROSE, M.E.

ILLUSTRATED WITH MORE THAN 3000 ENGRAVINGS

VOLUME I.

NEW YORK
CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS
1887


Copyright, 1887, by
CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS

Press of J. J. Little & Co.
Astor Place, New York.


[I-vi]

PREFACE.

Modern Machine-Shop Practice is presented to American mechanics as a complete guide to the operations of the best equipped and best managed workshops, and to the care and management of engines and boilers.

The materials have been gathered in part from the author’s experience of thirty-one years as a practical mechanic; and in part from the many skilled workmen and eminent mechanics and engineers who have generously aided in its preparation. Grateful acknowledgment is here made to all who have contributed information about improved machines and details of new methods.

The object of the work is practical instruction, and it has been written throughout from the point of view, not of theory, but of approved practice. The language is that of the workshop. The mathematical problems and tables are in simple arithmetical terms, and involve no algebra or higher mathematics. The method of treatment is strictly progressive, following the successive steps necessary to becoming an intelligent and skilled mechanic.

The work is designed to form a complete manual of reference for all who handle tools or operate machinery of any kind, and treats exhaustively of the following general topics: I. The construction and use of machinery for making machines and tools; II. The construction and use of work-holding appliances and tools used in machines for working metal or wood; III. The construction and use of hand tools for working metal or wood; IV. The construction and management of steam engines and boilers. The reader is referred to the Table of Contents for a view of the multitude of special topics considered.

The work will also be found to give numerous details of practice never before in print, and known hitherto only to their originators, and aims to be useful as well to master-workmen as to apprentices, and to owners and managers of manufacturing establishments equally with their employees, whether machinists, draughtsmen, wood-workers, engineers, or operators of special machines.

The illustrations, over three thousand in number, are taken from modern practice; they represent the machines, tools, appliances and methods now used in the leading manufactories of the world, and the typical steam engines and boilers of American manufacture.

The new Pronouncing and Defining Dictionary at the end of the work, aims to include all the technical words and phrases of the machine shop, both those of recent origin and many old terms that have never before appeared in a vocabulary of this kind.

The wide range of subjects treated, their convenient arrangement and thorough illustration, with the exhaustive Table of Contents of each volume and the full Analytical Index to both, will, the author hopes, make the work serve as a fairly complete ready reference library and manual of self-instruction for all practical mechanics, and will lighten, while making more profitable, the labor of his fellow-workmen.


[I-vii]

CONTENTS.

Volume I.

CHAPTER I.
THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS.
PAGE
Gear-Wheels. Spur-wheels, bevel-wheels, mitre-wheels, crown-wheels, annular or internal wheels 1
  Trundle-wheels, rack and pinion-wheel and tangent screw, or worm and worm-wheel 1
  The diameter of the pitch circle of 1
Gear-Wheel Teeth. The face, the flank, the depth or height 1
  The space, the pitch line, the point, the arc pitch, the chord pitch, the line of centres 2
  Rules for finding the chord pitch from the arc pitch; table of natural sines; diametral pitch; finding the arc from the diametral pitch; table of arc and diametral pitches 3
Gear-Wheels. The driver and follower, a train of gears 3
  Intermediate gears 3
  The velocity of compounded wheels 4
  Finding the diameters of the pitch circles of 4
  Considered as revolving levers 5
  Calculating the revolutions of, and power transmitted by 5
  The angular velocity of 6
Gear-Wheels. Hunting tooth in, stop motion of 7
Gear-Wheel Teeth. The requirements and nature of the teeth curves 7
  Cycloidal curves for the faces of; epicycloidal and involute curves; the hypocycloidal curve; method of forming or generating the epicycloidal and hypocycloidal curves for the faces and flanks of gear teeth 8
  Applications of the epicycloidal and hypocycloidal curves in the formation of gear teeth 9
  The diameter of the circle for generating the epicycloidal and hypocycloidal curves; graphical demonstration that the flank curves are correctly formed to work with the face curves of the other wheel 10
  Graphical demonstration that the curves are correct independent of either the respective sizes of the wheels, or of the curve generating circles 11
Gear-Wheels. Hand applications of the rolling or generating circle to mark the tooth curves for a pair of wheels 12
Gear-Wheel Teeth. The variation of curve due to different diameters of wheels or of rolling circles 12
  Tracing the path of contact of tooth upon tooth in a pair of gear-wheels; definition of the “arc of approach;” definition of the “arc of recess;” demonstration that the flanks of the teeth on the driver or driving-wheel have contact with the faces of the driven wheel during the arc of approach, and with the flanks of the driven wheel during the arc of recess 13
  Confining the action of the teeth to one side only of the line of centres, when motion rather than power is to be conveyed 13
  Demonstration that the appearance or symmetry of a tooth has no significance with regard to its action 14
  Finding how many teeth will be in constant action, the diameter of the wheels, the pitch of the teeth, and the diameter of the rolling circle being given 15
  Example of the variation of tooth form due to variation of wheel diameter 15
Gear Teeth. Variation of shape from using different diameters of rolling circles 16
  Thrust on the wheel shafts caused by different shapes of teeth 16
Gear-Wheels. Willis’ system of one size of rolling circle for trains of interchangeable gearing 16
  Conditions necessary to obtain a uniform velocity of 16
Gear Teeth. The amount of rolling and of sliding motion of 16
  The path of the point of contact of 16
  The arcs of approaching and of receding contact 16
  Lengths of the arcs of approach and of recess 16
  The influence of the sizes of the wheels upon the arcs of contact 17
  Influence of the size of the rolling circle upon the amount of flank contact 18
  Demonstration that incorrectly formed teeth cannot correct themselves by wear 18
  The smaller the diameter of the rolling circle, the less the sliding motion 18
  Influence of the size of the rolling upon the number of teeth in contact in a given pair of wheels 19
  Demonstration that the degrees of angle the teeth move through exceed those of the path of contact, unless the tooth faces meet in a point 19
  Influence of the height of the teeth upon the number of teeth in contact 20
  Increasing the arc of recess without increasing the arc of approach 20
  Wheels for transmitting motion rather than power 21
  Clock wheels 21
  Forms of teeth having generating or rolling circles, as large or nearly as large as the diameters of the wheels 21
Gear-Wheels. Bevel 21
  The principles governing the formation of the teeth of bevel- wheels 22
  Demonstration that the faces of the wheels must be in line with the point of intersection of the axis of the two shafts 22
Gear Teeth. Method of finding the curves of, for bevel gear 22
Gear-Wheels. Internal or annular 23 to 27
  Demonstration that the teeth of annular wheels correspond to the spaces of spur-wheels 23
Gear-Wheels Internal. Increase in the length of the path of contact on spur-wheels of the same diameter, and having the same diameter of generating or rolling circle 23
  Demonstration that the teeth of internal wheels may interfere when spur-wheels would not do so 23
  Methods of avoiding the above interference 23
  Comparison of, with spur-wheels 23
  The teeth of: demonstration that it is practicable to so form the teeth faces that they will have contact together as well as with the flanks of the other wheel 24
  Intermediate rolling circle for accomplishing the above result 24
  The application of two rolling circles for accomplishing the above result 24
  Demonstration that the result reached by the employment of two rolling circles of proper diameter is theoretically and practically perfect 24
  Limits of the diameters of the two rolling circles 25
  Increase in the arc of contact obtained by using two rolling circles 25
  Demonstration that the above increase is on the arc of recess or receding contact, and therefore gives a smooth action 25
  Demonstration that by using two rolling circles each tooth has for a certain period two points of contact 25
  The laws governing the diameters of the two rolling circles 25
  Practical application of two rolling circles 26
  Demonstration that by using two rolling circles the pinion may contain but one tooth less than the wheel 26
  The sliding and rolling motion of the teeth of 27
 
CHAPTER II.
THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS (Continued).
 
Worm and Worm-Wheel, or wheel and tangent screw 28 to 31
  General description of 28
  Qualifications of 28
  The wear of 28
Worm-Wheel Teeth, the sliding motion of 28
  When straight have contact on the centres only of the tooth sides 28
  That envelop a part of the worm circumference 28
  The location of the pitch line of the worm 28
 [I-viii] The proper number of teeth in the worm-wheel 29
  Locating the pitch line of the worm so as to insure durability 29
  Rule for finding the best location for the pitch line of the worm 29
  Increasing the face of the worm to obtain a smoother action 29
Worms, to work with a square thread 29
Worm-Wheels, applications of 30
Gear-Wheels with involute teeth 31 to 34
Gear Teeth. Generating the involute curve 31
  Templates for marking the involute curve 32
Involute Teeth, the advantages of 34
Gear Teeth, Pratt and Whitney’s machine for cutting templates for 35
 
CHAPTER III.
THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS (Continued).
 
Gear Teeth, revolving cutters for 37
  Pantagraph engine for dressing the cutters for 38
  Numbers of cutters used for a train of wheels 39
Gear-Wheel Teeth. Table of equidistant value of cutters 41
  Depth of, in the Brown and Sharpe system 42
  Cutting the teeth of worm-wheels 42
  Finding the angle of the cutter for cutting worm-wheels 43
  The construction of templates for rolling the tooth curves 43
  Rolling the curves for gear teeth 43
  Forms of templates for gear teeth 44
  Pivoted arms for tooth templates 44
  Marking the curves by hand 45
  Former or Template of the Corliss bevel gear-wheel engine or cutting machine 45
  The use of extra circles in marking the curves with compasses 46
  Finding the face curves by geometrical constructions 47
  The Willis odontograph for finding the radius for striking the curves by hand 47
  The method of using the Willis odontograph 48
  Professor Robinson’s odontograph 49
  Method of using Professor Robinson’s odontograph 49
  Application of Professor Robinson’s odontograph for trains of gearing 51
  Tabular values and setting numbers for Professor Robinson’s odontograph 51
  Walker’s patent wheel scale for marking the curves of cast teeth 51
  The amount of side clearance in cast teeth 53
  Filleting the roots of epicycloidal teeth with radial flanks 53
  Scale of tooth proportions given by Professor Willis 54
  The construction of a pattern for a spur-wheel that is to be cast with the teeth on 54
  Template for planing the tooth to shape 54
  Method of marking the curves on teeth that are to be glued on 55
  Method of getting out the teeth of 56
  Spacing the teeth on the wheel rim 56
  Methods of accurately spacing the pattern when it has an even number of teeth 58
  Method of spacing the wheel rim when it has an odd number of teeth 58
Gear-Wheels, Bevel Pinion, drawings for 59
  Getting out the body for a bevel-wheel 59
  Template for marking the division lines on the face of the wheel 59
  Marking the lines of the division on the wheel 60
Gear-Wheels, Pinion, with dovetail teeth 60
  Testing the angle of bevel-wheels while in the lathe 60
Gear-Wheels, Skew Bevel. Finding the line of contact 61
  Marking the inclination of the teeth 61
Gear-Wheels, Bevel, drawing for built up 61
Gear-Wheels, Worm, or endless screw 62
  Constructing a pattern from which the worm is to be cast 62
  Tools for cutting the worm in a lathe 62
  Cutting the teeth by hand 62
Gear-Wheels, Mortise or cogged 63
  Methods of fastening cogs 63
  Methods of getting out cogs for 63
Gear-Wheel Teeth, calculating the strength of epicycloidal 64
  Factors of safety for 64
  Tredgold’s rule for calculating the strength of 65
  Cut, calculating the strength of 65
Gear-Wheel Teeth. The strength of cogs 66
  The thickness of cogs 66
  The durability of cogs 66
  Table for calculating the strength of different kinds of 67
  The contact of cast teeth 67
  Table for determining the relation between pitch diameter, pitch, and number of teeth in gear-wheels 68
  Examples of the use of the above table 68
  With stepped teeth 69
  Angular or helical teeth 69
  End thrust of angular teeth 69
  Herring-bone angular teeth 69
  For transmitting motion at a right angle by means of angular or helical teeth 69
  Cutting helical teeth in the lathe 69
  For wheels whose shaft axes are neither parallel nor meeting 70
  Elliptical 70
  Elliptical, marking the pitch lines of 70
  Elliptical, drawing the teeth curves of 73
  For variable motion 74
  Form of worm to give a period of rest 74
  Various applications of 74
Gear-Wheels, arrangement of, for periodically reversing the direction of motion 75
  Watt’s sun and planet motion 75
  Arrangements for the rapid multiplication of motion 75
  Arrangement of, for the steering gear of steam fire-engines 75
  Various forms of mangle gearing 79
Gear-Wheel and Rack, for reciprocating motion 77
Friction Wheels. 77
  The material for 77
  Paper 78
  For the feed motion of machines 78
  The unequal wear upon grooved 79
  Form of, for relieving the journals of strain 79
Cams, for irregular motion 80
  Finding the pitch line of 80
  Finding the working face of 80
  The effect the diameter roller has upon the motion produced by a cam 80
  Demonstration of the different motion produced by different diameters of rollers upon the same cam 80
  Diagram of motion produced from the same cam with different diameters of rollers 81
  Return or backing 82
  Methods of finding the shape of return or backing 82
Cam Motion, for an engine slide valve without steam lap 83
  For a slide valve with steam lap 83
Groove Cams, proper construction of 84
  The wear of 84
  Brady’s improved groove cam with rolling motion and adjustment for wear 84
 
CHAPTER IV.
SCREW-THREADS.
 
  Screw Threads, the various forms of 85
  The pitch of 85
  Self-locking 85
  The Whitworth 86
  The United States standard 86
  The Common V 86
  The requirements of 86
  Tools for cutting 87
  Variation of pitch from hardening 87
  The wear of thread-cutting tools 88
  Methods of producing 88
  Alteration of shape of, from the wear of the tools they are cut by 89
Screw Thread Cutting Tools. The wear of the tap and the die 89
  Improved form of chaser to equalize the wear 90
  Form of, to eliminate the effects of the wear in altering the fit 90
  Originating standard angles for 91
  Standard micrometer gauge for the United States standard screw thread 91
  Standard plug and collar gauges for 91
  Producing gauges for 92
  Table of United States standard for bolts and nuts 93
  Table of standard for the V-thread 93
  United States standard for gas and steam pipes 93
  Taper for standard pipe threads 95
  Tables of the pitches and diameters at root of thread, of the Whitworth thread 95
  Table of Whitworth’s screw threads for gas, water, and hydraulic piping 96
  Whitworth’s standard gauges for watch and instrument makers 96
  Screw-cutting hand tools 96
Thread-Cutting Tools. American and English forms of stocks and dies 97
  Adjustable or jamb dies 98
  The friction of jamb dies 98
  The sizes of hobs that should be used on jamb dies 99
  Cutting right or left-hand thread with either single, double, or treble threads with the same dies 99
  Hobs for hobbing or threading dies 100
 [I-ix] Various forms of stocks with dies adjustable to take up the wear 101
  Dies for gas and steam pipes 101
Thread-Cutting Tool Taps. The general forms of taps 102
  Reducing the friction of 102
  Giving clearance to 102
  The friction of taper 103
  Improved forms of 103
  Professor J. E. Sweet’s form of tap 104
  Adjustable standard 104
  The various shapes of flutes employed on taps 105
  The number of flutes a tap should have 105
  Demonstration that a tap should have four cutting edges rather than three 106
  The position of the square or driving end, with relation to the cutting edges 106
  Taper taps for blacksmiths 106
  Collapsing taps for use in tapping machines 107
  Collapsing tap for use in a screw machine 107
  The alteration of pitch that occurs in hardening 108
  Gauging the pitch after the hardening 108
  Correcting the errors of pitch caused by the hardening 109
  For lead 109
  Elliptical in cross section 109
  For very straight holes 109
  Tap wrenches solid and adjustable 110
Thread-Cutting. Tapping 110
  Appliances for tapping standard work 111
 
CHAPTER V.
FASTENING DEVICES.
 
Bolts, classification of, from the shapes of their heads 112
  Classification of, from the shapes of their bodies 112
  Countersunk 112
  Holes for, classification of 112
  For foundations, various forms of 113
  Hook bolts 113
  The United States standard for finished bolts and nuts 113
  The United States standard for rough bolts and nuts, or black bolts 114
  The Whitworth standard for bolts and nuts 114
Screws 114
Studs 115
Set Screws 115
Bolts for quick removal 116
  That do not pass through the work 117
  That self-lock in grooves and are readily removable 117
  Heads and their bedding 117
Nuts, the forms of, when they are to be steam tight 118
  Various forms of 118
  Jamb nuts and lock nuts 119
Differential Threads for locking purposes 119
  For fine adjustments 119
Nuts, taking up the wear of 120
  Securing devices 120
  Securing by taper pins 121
  Securing by cotters 121
  Securing by notched plates 121
Pins. Securing for exact adjustments 121
  And double eyes fitting 121
  Fixed 122
  Working 122
Bolts, removing corroded 122
Nuts, removing corroded 122
Washers, standard sizes of 122
Wrench, the proper angles of 123
  Box 124
  Monkey 125
  Adjustable, various forms of 125
  Sockets 125
  Novel for carriage bolts 125
  Pin 126
    Improved form of 126
Keys, the various kinds of 126
  The bearing surfaces of 126
Set Screws, application of, to hubs or bosses 127
Keys, with set-screws 127
  The draught of 127
Feathers, and their applications 127
Keys, for parallel rods 128
Taper Pins, proper position of, for locking purposes 128
  Improved method of fitting 128
 
CHAPTER VI.
THE LATHE.
 
Lathe, the importance and advantages of 129
  Classification of lathes 129
  Foot 130
  Methods of designating the sizes of 130
  Bench 130
  Power 130
  Hand 130
  Slide Rest for 131
  American form of, their advantages and disadvantages 132
  English forms of 132
  For spherical work 132
  Methods of taking up lost motion of 133
Engine Lathe, general construction of 133
  The construction of the shears of 134
  Construction of the headstock 134
  Construction of the bearings 134
  Construction of the back gear 135
  Means of giving motion to the feed spindle 135
  Construction of the tailstock 135
  Method of rapidly securing and releasing the tailstock 136
Lathe Tailstock, setting over for turning tapers 136
Engine Lathe, construction of carriage 137
  Feed motion for carriage or saddle 137
Lathe Apron, Construction of the feed traverse 138
  Construction of the cross-feed motion 138
Engine Lathe, lead screw and change wheels of 139
  Feed spindle and lead screw bearings 139
  Swing frame for lead screw 139
  Lead screw nuts 140
  With compound slide rest 140
  Construction of compound slide rest 141
  Advantages of compound slide rest 141
  For taper turning 142
  Taper-turning attachments 142
  With compound duplex slide rest 143
  Detachable slide rest 143
  Three-tool slide rest for turning shafting 143
  With flat saddle for chucking work on 143
The Sellers Lathe 143
  Construction of the headstock and treble gear 144
  Construction of the tailstock and method of keeping it in line 145
  Construction of the carriage and slide rest 145
  Methods of engaging and disengaging the feed motions 146
Car Axle Lathe, with central driving motion and two slide rests 147
  The feed motions of 148
Self-Acting Lathe, English form of 148
Pattern Maker’s Lathe 148
  Brake for cone pulley 149
  With wooden bed 149
  Slide rest for 149
Chucking Lathe, English 149
  Feed motions of 150
Pulley Lathe 150
Gap or Break Lathe 151
Extension Lathe 151
Wheel Lathe 151
Chucking Lathe for boring purposes 152
Lathe for turning crank axles 152
  Construction of the headstock 153
  Construction of the feed motions 154
  For turning crank, Arrangements of the slide rests 154
  Application of the slide rest to a crank 155
 
CHAPTER VII.
DETAILS IN LATHE CONSTRUCTION.
 
Live Spindle of a lathe, the fit of 157
  With coned journals 157
  Methods of taking up the end motion of 158
  Arranging the swing frame for the change gears 158
  Taking up the wear of the back bearing 158
  The wear of the front bearing of 158
The Taper for the live centre 159
Methods of removing the lathe centres 159
Tapers for the live centres 159
Methods of removing the dead centre 159
Driving Cone, arranging the steps of 159
  Requirements of proportioning the steps of 159
  Rules for proportioning the diameters of the steps of, when the two pulleys are exactly alike and are connected by an open belt 159 to 161
  When the two pulleys are unlike 161 to 164
Back Gear, methods of throwing in and out 165
Conveying motion to the lead screw 165
Attaching the swing frame 166
Feed Gear. Arrangement for cutting worm threads or tangent screws 167
Feed Motion for reversing the direction of tool traverse in screw cutting 168
  For lathe aprons 168
Slide Rest, weighted elevated 168
  Double tool holder for 169
 [I-x] Gibbed elevating 169
Examples of feed motions 170
Feed Regulators for screw cutting 171
  The star feed 172
Ratchet Feeds 173
Tool Holding devices, the various kinds of 173
Tool Rest swiveling 174
Tool Holder for compound slide rests 174
  For octagon boring tools 175
Lathe Lead and Feed Screws 175
  Lead screws, supporting, long 176
  Position of the feed nut 177
  Form of threads of lead screws 177
  The effect the form of thread has in causing the nut to lock properly or improperly 177
  Example of a lead screw with a pitch of three threads per inch 177
  Example of a lead screw with five threads per inch 178
  Example with a lead screw of five threads per inch 179
  Device for correcting the errors of pitch of 179
Table for finding the change wheels for screw cutting when the teeth in the change wheels advance by four 180
  For finding the change wheels when the teeth in the wheels advance by six 180
  Constructing a table to cut fractional threads on any lathe 181
  Finding the change wheels necessary to enable the lathe to cut threads of any given pitches 181
  Finding the change wheels necessary to cut fractional pitches 181
Determining the pitches of the teeth for change wheels 182
Lathe Shears or beds 182
  Advantages and disadvantages of, with raised V-guide-ways 182
  Examples of various forms of 183
Lathe Shears with one V and one flat side 183
  Methods of ribbing 184
  The arrangement of the legs of 184
Lathe Tailblock 185
  With rapid spindle motion 185
  With rapid fastenings and releasing devices 185
  The wear of the spindles of 185
  Spindles, the various methods of locking 186
  Testing, various methods of 187
 
CHAPTER VIII.
SPECIAL FORMS OF THE LATHE.
 
Watchmaker’s Lathes 188
  Construction of the headstock 188
  Construction of chucks for 188
  Expanding chucks for 188
  Contracting chucks for 188
  Construction of the tailblock 189
  Open spindle tailstocks for 189
  Filing fixture for 189
  Fixture for wheel and pinion cutting 189
  Jewelers’ rest for 189
Watch Manufacturers’ Lathe 190
  Special chucks for 190
  Pump centre rest 190
Lathe, hand 191
  Screw slotting 192
  With variable speed for facing purposes 192
  Cutting-off machine 193
  Grinding Lathes 193
  With elevating rest 194
  Universal 195
  Special chucks for 196
  The Morton Poole calender roll grinding lathe 196
  The construction of the bed and carriages 197
  Principles of action of the carriages 197, 198
  Construction of the emery-wheel arbors and the driving motion 198, 199
  The advantages of 199
  The method of driving the roll 200
  Construction of the headstock 200
  The transverse motion 200
The Brown and Sharpe Screw Machine, or screw-making lathe 200
  Threading tools for 203
  Examples of the use of 203
The Secor Screw Machine, construction of the headstock 204
  The chuck 205
  The feed gear 205
  The turret 205
  The cross slide 205
  The stop motions 206
Pratt and Whitney’s Screw Machine 206
  Parkhurst’s wire feed, construction of the headstock, chuck and feed motion 207
  Box tools for 208
  Applications of box tools 208
  Threading tool for 208
  Cutting-off tool for 208
Special Lathe for wood working 208
  The construction of the carriage and reducing knife 209
  Construction of the various feed motions 209
  Construction of the tailstock 209
Lathes for irregular forms 210
  Axe-handle 210
  Back knife gauge 210
  Special, for pulley turning 211
Boring and Turning mill or lathe 211
  Construction of the feed motions 213
  Construction of the framing and means of grinding the lathe 214
  Construction of the vertical feed motions 215
The Morton Poole roll turning lathe 215
  Construction of the slide rest 216
  The tools for 216
Special Lathes for brass work 216, 217
Boring Lathe with traversing spindle 218
  For engine cylinders 219
  Cylinder, with facing slide rests 219
  With double heads and facing rests 220
Lathe for turning Wheel hubs 221
 
CHAPTER IX.
DRIVING WORK IN THE LATHE.
 
Drivers, carriers, dogs, or clamps, and their defects 222
  Lathe clamps 222
  Equalizing drivers 223
  The Clements driver 223
  Driver and face plate for screw cutting 223
  Forms of, for bolt heads 224
  Adjustable, for bolt heads 224
  For threaded work 225
  For steady rest work 225
  For cored work 225
  For wood 225
Centres for hollow work 226
  For taper work 226
Lathe Mandrels, or arbors 227
  Drivers for 227
  For tubular work 227
  Expanding mandrels 227
  With expanding cones 228
  With expanding pieces 228
  Expanding, for large work 228
  For threaded work 228
  For nuts, various forms of 229
  For eccentric work 229
Centring devices for crank axles 230
The Steady Rest or back rest 231
  Steady rest, improved form of 232
  Cone chuck 232
  Steady rest for square and taper work 233
  The cat head 233
  Clamps for 233
  Follower rests 234
Chucks and Chucking 234
  Simple forms of chucks 234
  Adjustable chucks for true work 235
  Two-jawed chucks 236
  Box body chucks 237
  Reversible jawed chucks 237
  Three and four-jawed chucks 237
  Combination chucks 237
  The wear of scroll chuck threads 237
  Universal chucks 238
  The wear of chucks 240
  Special forms of chucks 241
  Expanding chucks for ring-work 241
  Cement chuck 241
  Chucks for wood-working lathes 242
Lathe Face Plates 243
  Face plates, errors in, and their effects 243
  Work-holding straps 244
  Face plate, clamping work on 245
  Forms of clamps for 245
  Examples of chucking work on 246, 247
  For wood work 247
Special Lathe Chuck for cranks 248
Face Plate Work, examples of 249
  Errors in chucking 250
  Movable dogs for 250
  The angle plate 251
  Applications of 251
  Angle plate chucking, examples of 251
  Cross-head chucking 251-253
 
CHAPTER X.[I-xi]
CUTTING TOOLS FOR LATHES.
 
Principles governing the shapes of lathe tools 254
Diamond-pointed, or front tool 254
Principles governing use of tools 254
  Front rake and clearance of front tools 254
  Influence of the height of a tool upon its clearance and keenness 255
  Tools with side rake in various directions 256
  The effect of side rake 256
  The angle of clearance in lathe tools 257
  Variation of clearance from different rates of feed and diameters of work 257
Round-nosed tools 258
Utmost Duty of cutting tools 258
  Judging the quantity of the tool from the shape of its cutting 259
Square-nosed tools 260
  The height of lathe tools 260
  Side tools for lathe work 261
  Cutting-off or grooving tools 262
  Facing tools or knife tools 262
  Spring tools 263
Brass Work, front tools for 264
  Side tools for 264
Threading tools 264
  Internal threading tools 264
  The length of threading tools 265
  The level of threading tools 265
  Gauges for threading tools 266
  Setting threading tools 266
  Circular threading tools 267
  Threading tool holders 267
Chasers 268
  Chaser holders 268
  Setting chasers 268
Square Threads, clearance of tools for 269
  Diameter at the roots of threads 269
  Cutting coarse pitch square threads 269
  Dies for finishing square threads 269
Tool Holders for outside work 270
  For circular cutters 272
  Swiveled 273
  Combined tool holders and cutting-off tools 273
Power Required to drive cutting tools 273
 
CHAPTER XI.
DRILLING AND BORING IN THE LATHE.
 
The Twist Drill 274
  Twist drill holders 274
  The diametral clearance of twist drills 274
  The front rake of twist drills 275
  The variable clearance on twist drills as usually ground 275
  Demonstration of the common error in grinding twist drills 276
  The effects of improper grinding upon twist drills 276
  Table of speeds and feeds for twist drills 277
  Grinding twist drills by hand 279
  Twist drills for wood work 279
Tailstock Chucks for drilled work 279
Flat Drills for lathe work 280
  Holders for lathe work 281
Half-round bit or pod auger 281
  With front rake for wrought iron or steel 281
  With adjustable cutter 281
  For very true work 281
Chucking Reamer 281
  The number of teeth for reamers 282
  Spacing the teeth of reamers 282
  Spiral teeth for reamers 282
  Grinding the teeth of reamers 282
  Various positions of emery-wheel in grinding reamers 282
  Chucking reamers for true work 283
  Shell reamers 283
  Arbor for shell reamers 283
  Rose-bit or rose reamers 283
  Shell rose reamers 284
  Adjustable reamers 284
  Stepped reamers for taper work 285
  Half-round reamers 285
  Reamers for rifle barrels 285
Boring Tools for lathe work 285
  Countersinks 285
  Shapes of lathe boring tools 285
  Boring tools for brass work 286
  The spring of boring tools 286
  Boring tools for small work 287
  Boring tool holders 287
Boring Devices for Lathes 288
Boring Heads 288
Boring Bars 289
  Boring bar cutters 289
  Three versus four cutters for boring bars 290
  Boring bars with fixed heads 290
  With sliding heads 290
  Bar cutters, the shapes of 291
  Boring head with nut feed 291
  Boring bars for taper work, various forms of 292
  Boring double-coned work 293
  Boring bar, centres for 293
Cutting Speeds and feeds for wrought iron 294
  Examples of speeds taken from practice 295
 
CHAPTER XII.
EXAMPLES IN LATHE WORK.
 
Technical Terms used in the work 296
Lathe Centres 296
  Devices for truing 297
  Tools for testing the truth of, for fine work 298
  Shapes of, for light and heavy work 299
Centre Drilling, attachment for lathes 300
  The error induced by straightening work after 300
  Machine 300
  Combined centre-drill and countersink 300
  Countersink with adjustable drill 300
  Centring square 300
  Centre-punch 300
  Centre-punch guide 301
  Centring work with the scribing block 301
  Finding the centre of very rough work 301
  Centre-drill chuck 302
  The proper form of countersink for lathe work 302
  Countersinks for lathe work 302
  Various forms of square centres 303
  The advantage of the square centre for countersinking 303
  Novel form of countersink for hardened work 303
  Chucks for centre-drilling and countersinking 303
  Recentring turned work 304
Straightening Work. Straightening machine for bar iron 304
  Hand device for straightening lathe work 305
  Chuck for straightening wire 305
Cutting Rods into small pieces of exact length, tools for 305
Roughing cuts, the change of shape of work that occurs from removing the surface by 306
  Feeds for 306
  Rates of feed for 307
Finishing Work, the position of the tool for 307
  Finishing cast-iron with water 307
  Specks in finished cast-iron work 307
  Scrapers for finishing cast-iron work 307
  Method of polishing lathe work 308
  Filing lathe work 308
  The use of emery paper on lathe work 308
  The direction of tool feed in finishing long work 309
  Forms of laps for finishing gauges or other cylindrical lathe work 310
  Forms of laps for finishing internal work 311
  Grinding and polishing clamps for lathe work 311
  Burnishing lathe work 311
Taper Work, turning 312
  The wear of the centres of 312
  Setting over the tailstock to turn 312
  Gauge for setting over 313
  Fitting 313
  Grinding 313
  The order of procedure in turning 313
  The influence of the height of the tool in producing true 314
Special Forms. Curved work 314, 315
  Standard gauges for taper work 316
  Methods of turning an eccentric 317
  Turning a cylinder cover 318
  Turning pulleys 318
  Chucking device for pulleys 318
Cutting Screws in the lathe 319
  The arrangement of the change gears 319
  The intermediate wheels 319
  The compounded gears 320
  Finding the change wheels to cut a given thread 320
  Finding the change wheels for a lathe whose gears are compounded 321
  Finding the change gears for cutting fractional pitches 321
  To find what pitch of thread the wheels already on the lathe will cut 322
  Cutting left-hand threads 322
  Cutting double threads 322
  Cutting screws whose pitches are given in the terms of the metric system 322
  Cutting threads on taper work 323
  Errors in cutting threads on taper work 324
 
CHAPTER XIII.[I-xii]
EXAMPLES IN LATHE WORK (Continued).
 
Ball Turning with tubular saw 325
  With a single tooth on the end of a revolving tube 325
  With a removable tool on an arbor 325
  Tool holder with worm feed 325
  By hand 325
Cams, cutting in the lathe 326
  Improved method of originating cams in the lathe 326
  Motions for turning cams in the lathe 326, 327
  Application of cam motions to special work 327
  Cam chuck for irregular work 328
Milling or knurling tool 328
  Improved forms of 328
Winding Spiral Springs in the lathe 329
Hand Turning 330
  The heel tool 330
  The graver and its applications 330, 331
  Hand side tools 331
  Hand round-nosed tools for iron 331
  Hand finishing tool 331
Hand Tools, for roughing out brass work 332
  Various forms and applications of scrapers 332, 333
  Clockmakers’ hand tool for special or standard work 334
  Screw cutting with hand tools 334
  Outside and inside chasers 334
  Hobs and their uses 335
  The application of chasers, and errors that may arise from the position in which they are presented to the work 336
  Errors commonly made in cutting up inside chasers 337
  V-tool for starting outside threads 337
  Starting outside threads 338
  Cutting taper threads 338
  Wood turning hand tools 338
  The gauge and how to use it 338
  The chisel and its use 339
  The skew chisel and how to use it 339
  Wood turners’ boring tools for lathe work 340
 
CHAPTER XIV.
MEASURING MACHINES, TOOLS AND DEVICES.
 
Standards of Measurements, in various countries 341
  Use of, by sight and by the sense of feeling 341
  Variations in standard gauges 341
  The necessity for accurate standards 341
  The Rogers Bond standard measuring machine 342
  Details of construction of 343, 344
  The principle of construction of 344
  The methods of using 345
  The Whitworth measuring machine 345
  The Betts Machine Company’s measuring machine 346
  Professor Sweet’s measuring machine 347
  Measuring machine for sheet metal 348
Circle, division of the 348
  Troughton’s method of dividing the circle 348, 349
  Ramsden’s dividing engine 349
  The construction of 350, 351
  Pratt and Whitney’s dividing device 352
  Practical application of 353
  Index wheel, method of originating, by R. Hoe & Co. 353
  Application of the index wheel (Hoe & Co.’s system) 353
Classification of the measuring tools used by workmen 354
Micrometer Caliper and its principle of construction 354, 355
Gauges. Standard plug and collar gauges 356
  Methods of comparing standard plug and collar gauges 356
  The effects of variations of temperature upon standard gauges 356
  Plug and collar gauges for taper work 357
  The Baldwin standards for taper bolts 359
  Workmen’s gauges for lathe work 359
Calipers, outside, the various forms of 360
  Inside calipers 360
  Calipers with locking devices 360
  Spring calipers 360
  The methods of holding and using 361, 362
  Keyway calipers 363
  The advantages of calipers 363
Fitting. The four kinds of fit in machine work 363
  The influence of the diameter of the work in limiting the application of standard gauges 363
  The wear of tools and its influence upon the application of the standard gauge system 364
  The influence of the smoothness of the surface upon the allowance to be made for drilling or hydraulic fits 365
  Examples of allowance for hydraulic fits 365
  Parallel holes and taper plugs for hydraulic fits 365
Fitting. Practicable methods of testing the fit of axle brasses forced in by hydraulic pressure 366
  Shrinkage or contraction fits 366
  Allowances for 366
  Gauge for 367
  The shrinkage system at the Royal Gun Factory at Woolwich 367
  Experiments by Thomas Wrightson upon the shrinkage of iron under repeated heatings and coolings 368 to 374
  Shrinking work, to refit it 374, 375
 
CHAPTER XV.
MEASURING TOOLS.
 
End Measurements of large lathe work 376
  Template gauges for 376
  Trammels or Trains 377
  Adjustable gauges for 377
Compasses—Dividers 377
  Compass calipers 378
Key Seating rule 378
Surface Gauge 378
  Pattern makers’ pipe gauge 379
Squares. The try square 379
  The T square 379
  Various methods of testing squares 379, 380
  Bevel squares 380
Bevel Protractors 380
Hexagon Gauge 381
Straight Edge and its applications 381, 382
  Winding strips and their application 382
Surface Plate or planimeter 383
Templates for curves 384
Wire Gauges, notch 384
  Standard gauges for wire, &c. 384, 386
  Gauge for music wire 386
  Brown and Sharpe wire gauge 387
  Birmingham wire gauge for rolled shell silver and gold 387
  Sheet iron gauge, Russian 387
  Galvanized iron 387
  Belgian sheet zinc 387
  American sheet zinc 387
Rifle Bore gauge 387
Strength of Wire, Kirkaldy’s experiments 387, 388
 
CHAPTER XVI.
SHAPING AND PLANING MACHINES.
 
General description of a shaping machine 389
Construction of swivel head 389
  Slide 390
  Vice chuck 390
  Feed motion 390
Hand shaping machine 392
Quick Return Motion, Whitworth’s 392
Vice Chucks, the principles of construction of plain, for planing machine 392
  The proper methods of chucking work in 393
  Holding taper work in 394
  Various forms of 394
  Swiveling 395
  Rapid motion 396
  For vice work 396
Centres for shaping machines 397
Traveling Head in shaping machine 397
Planer Shapers or shaping machines, having a tappet motion for reversing the direction of motion 398, 399
Quick Return Motion shaping machines, link 399
  The Whitworth 400
  Comparisons of the link motion and Whitworth 401
Simple Crank, investigating the motion of 401
Planing Machines, or planer 402
  The various motions of 402, 403
  The table driving gear 404
  Planing machine with double heads 404
  Rotary planing machine 405
 
CHAPTER XVII.
PLANING MACHINERY.
 
The Sellers planing machine 406
  The belt shifting mechanism 406, 407
  The automatic feed motions 408
Sliding Head 408
Cross Bar 409
Slides of Planers, the various forms of construction of 410
[I-xiii]Wear of the Slides of planer heads, various methods of taking up the 410
Swivel Heads 411
Tool Aprons 411
Swivel Tool-holding devices for planers 411
Planer Heads, graduations of 412
  Safety devices for 413
  Feed motions for 414
  V-guideways for 414
  Flat guideways for 415
  Oiling devices for 415
Planing Machine Tables 415
  Slots and holes in planing machine tables 416
  Forms of bolts for planer tables 417
  Supplementary tables for planer tables 417
  Angle plates for planer tables 418
  Chucking devices for planer tables 418
Planer Centres 418
Planer Chucks 419
  For spiral grooved work 419
  For curved work 420
  Chucking machine beds on planer tables 420
  For large planing machines 422
  Chucking the halves of large pulleys on a planer 423
Gauges for planing V-guideways in machine beds 421
  Planing guideways in machine beds 422
  Gauge for planer tools 424
Planer Tools, the shapes of 424
  For coarse finishing feeds 424
  The clearance of 424
  For slotted work 424
Planer Tool Holder, with tool post 425
  Various applications of 425
  Simple and advantageous form of 426
  Examples of application of 426
 
CHAPTER XVIII.
DRILLING MACHINES.
 
Drilling Machines. General description of a power drilling machine 428
  Lever feed 428
  With automatic and quick return feed motions 428
  Improved, with simple belt and uniform motion, two series of rates of automatic feed, and guide for boring bar 429, 430
  Radial 430, 431
  For boiler shells 436
  Cotter or keyway 438
  Drilling Machine, three-spindle 434
  Four-spindle 434
Drilling and Boring machine 431
  Feed motion of 432
Combined Drilling Machine and lathe 433
Boring Machine, horizontal 433
  For car wheels 438
  For pulleys 438
Quartering Machine 434
Drilling and Turning Machine for boiler makers 435
  Feed motions of 436
 
CHAPTER XIX.
DRILLS AND CUTTERS FOR DRILLING MACHINES.
 
Jigs or Fixtures for drilling machines 439
  Limits of error in 439
  Examples of, for simple work, as for links, &c. 440
  Considerations in designing 440
  For drilling engine cylinders 440 to 441
  For cutting out steam ports 441
Drills and Cutters for drilling machines 442
  Table of sizes of twist drills, and their shanks 442
  Flat drills for drilling machines 442
  Errors in grinding flat drills 443
  The tit-drill 443
  The lip drill 443
  Cotter or keyway drills 446
Drilling holes true to location with flat drills 444
  Drilling hard metal 444
  Table of sizes of tapping holes 445
Drill Shanks and sockets 445
  Improved form of drill shank 446
  Square shanked drills and their disadvantages 446
Drill Chucks 446
Stocks and Cutters for drilling machines 447
  Tube plate cutters 448
Stocks and Cutters. Adjustable stock and cutter 448
  Facing tool with reamer pin 449
  Counterbores for drilling machines 449
  Drill and counterbore for wood work 449
  Facing and countersink cutters 449
  Device for drilling square holes 450
  Device for drilling taper holes in a drilling machine 451
 
CHAPTER XX.
HAND-DRILLING AND BORING TOOLS, AND DEVICES.
 
The Brad-awl 452
Bits. The gimlet bit 452
  The German bit 452
  The nail bit 452
  The spoon bit 452
  The nose bit 453
  The auger bit 453
  Cook’s auger bit 453
  Principles governing the shapes of the cutting edges of auger bits 453
  Auger bit for boring end grain wood 453
  The centre bit 454
  The expanding bit 454
Drills. Drill for stone 454
  The fiddle drill 455
  The fiddle drill with feeding device 455
  Drill with cord and spring motion 455
  Drill stock with spiral grooves 455
  Drill brace 455
  Drill brace with ratchet motion 456
  Universal joint for drill brace 456
  Drill brace with multiplying gear and ratchet motion 456
  Breast drill with double gear 456
  Drilling levers for blacksmiths 457
  Drill cranks 457
  Ratchet brace 457
  Flexible shaft for driving drills 458
  Drilling device for lock work 459
  Hand drilling machine 459
Slotting Machine 459
  Sectional view of 460
  Tool holders 460, 461
  Tools 461, 462
 
CHAPTER XXI.
THREAD-CUTTING MACHINERY AND BROACHING PRESS.
 
Pipe Threading, die stock for, by hand 463
  Die stock for, by power 463
  Pipe threading machines, general construction of 463
Bolt Threading hand machine 464
  With revolving head 465
  Power threading machine 465
  With automatic stop motion 466
  Construction of the head 466
  Construction of the chasers 466
  Bolt threading machine with back gear 467
  Single rapid bolt threading machine 467
  Double rapid bolt threading machine 467
  Construction of the heads of the rapid machines 468
  Bolt threading machinery, the Acme 468
  Construction of the head of 468 to 470
  Capacity of 470
Cutting Edges for taps, the number of 471
  Examples when three and when four cutting edges are used, and the results upon bolts that are not round 471, 472
  Demonstration that four cutting edges are correct for bar iron 472
Positions of Dies, or chasers in the heads of bolt cutting machine 473
Dies, methods of hobbing, to avoid undue friction 473
  The construction of, for bolt threading machines 473
  Method of avoiding friction in thread cutting 474
  Hob for threading 474
  Cutting speeds for threading 474
Nut Tapping machine 475
  Automatic socket for 475
  Rotary 475
  Three-spindle 475
Pipe Threading Machine 475 to 477
Tapping Machine for steam pipe fittings 478
Broaching Press 478
  Principles of broaching 478
  Examples in the construction of broaches 479

[I-xiv]

FULL-PAGE PLATES.

Volume I.

Facing
Frontispiece. MODERN LOCOMOTIVE ENGINE. Title Page
Plate I. TEMPLATE-CUTTING MACHINES FOR GEAR TEETH. 34
II. FORMS OF SCREW THREADS. 85
III. MEASURING AND GAUGING SCREW THREADS. 93
IV. END-ADJUSTMENT AND LOCKING DEVICES. 120
V. EXAMPLES IN LATHE CONSTRUCTION. 148
VI. CHUCKING LATHES. 150
VII. TOOL-HOLDING AND ADJUSTING APPLIANCES. 174
VIII. WATCHMAKER’S LATHE. 188
IX. DETAILS OF WATCHMAKER’S LATHE. 188
X. EXAMPLES OF SCREW MACHINES. 200
XI. ROLL-TURNING LATHE. 215
XII. EXAMPLES IN ANGLE-PLATE CHUCKING. 252
XIII. METHODS OF BALL-TURNING. 325
XIV. STANDARD MEASURING MACHINES. 341
XV. DIVIDING ENGINE AND MICROMETER. 354
XVI. SHAPING MACHINES AND TABLE-SWIVELING DEVICES. 398
XVII. EXAMPLES OF PLANING MACHINES. 404
XVIII. EXAMPLES IN PLANING WORK. 422
XIX. LIGHT DRILLING MACHINES. 428
XX. HEAVY DRILLING MACHINES. 430
XXI. EXAMPLES IN BORING MACHINERY. 434
XXII. BOILER-DRILLING MACHINERY. 436
XXIII. NUT-TAPPING MACHINERY. 475

[I-1]

MODERN
MACHINE SHOP PRACTICE.


Chapter I.—THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS.

A wheel that is provided with teeth to mesh, engage, or gear with similar teeth upon another wheel, so that the motion of one may be imparted to the other, is called, in general terms, a gear-wheel.

Fig. 1

Fig. 1.

When the teeth are arranged to be parallel to the wheel-axis, as in Fig. 1, the wheel is termed a spur-wheel. In the figure, a represents the axial line or axis of the wheel or of its shaft, to which the teeth are parallel while spaced equidistant around the rim, or face, as it is termed, of the wheel.

Fig. 2

Fig. 2.

Fig. 3

Fig. 3.

Fig. 4

Fig. 4.

Fig. 5

Fig. 5.

When the wheel has its teeth arranged at an angle to the shaft, as in Fig. 2, it is termed a bevel-wheel, or bevel gear; but when this angle is one of 45°, as in Fig. 3, as it must be if the pair of wheels are of the same diameter, so as to make the revolutions of their shafts equal, then the wheel is called a mitre-wheel. When the teeth are arranged upon the radial or side face of the wheel, as in Fig. 4, it is termed a crown-wheel. The smallest wheel of a pair, or of a train or set of gear-wheels, is termed the pinion; and when the teeth are composed of rungs, as in Fig. 5, it is termed a lantern, trundle, or wallower; and each cylindrical piece serving as a tooth is termed a stave, spindle, or round, and by some a leaf.

Fig. 6

Fig. 6.

An annular or internal gear-wheel is one in which the faces of the teeth are within and the flanks without, or outside the pitch-circle, as in Fig. 6; hence the pinion p operates within the wheel.

When the teeth of a wheel are inserted in mortises or slots provided in the wheel-rim, it is termed a mortised-wheel, or a cogged-wheel, and the teeth are termed cogs.

Fig. 7

Fig. 7.

When the teeth are arranged along a plane surface or straight line, as in Fig. 7, the toothed plane is termed a rack, and the wheel is termed a pinion.

Fig. 8

Fig. 8.

A wheel that is driven by a revolving screw, or worm as it is termed, is called a worm-wheel, the arrangement of a worm and worm-wheel being shown in Fig. 8. The screw or worm is sometimes also called an endless screw, because its action upon the wheel does not come to an end as it does when it is revolved in one continuous direction and actuates a nut. So also, since the worm is tangent to the wheel, the arrangement is sometimes called a wheel and tangent screw.

The diameter of a gear-wheel is always taken at the pitch circle, unless otherwise specially stated as “diameter over all,” “diameter of addendum,” or “diameter at root of teeth,” &c., &c.

When the teeth of wheels engage to the proper distance, which is when the pitch circles meet, they are said to be in gear, or geared together. It is obvious that if two wheels are to be geared together their teeth must be the same distance apart, or the same pitch, as it is called.

Fig. 9

Fig. 9.

The designations of the various parts or surfaces of a tooth of a gear-wheel are represented in Fig. 9, in which the surface a is the face of the tooth, while the dimension f is the width of face of the wheel, when its size is referred to. b is the flank or distance from the pitch line to the root of the tooth, and c the[I-2] point. h is the space, or the distance from the side of one tooth to the nearest side of the next tooth, the width of space being measured on the pitch circle p p. e is the depth of the tooth, and g its thickness, the latter also being measured on the pitch circle p p. When spoken of with reference to a tooth, p p is called the pitch line, but when the whole wheel is referred to it becomes the pitch circle.

The points c and the surface h are true to the wheel axis.

The teeth are designated for measurement by the pitch; the height or depth above and below pitch line; and the thickness.

Fig. 10

Fig. 10.

The pitch, however, may be measured in two ways, to wit, around the pitch circle a, in Fig. 10, which is called the arc or circular pitch, and across b, which is termed the chord pitch.

In proportion as the diameter of a wheel (having a given pitch) is increased, or as the pitch of the teeth is made finer (on a wheel of a given diameter) the arc and chord pitches more nearly coincide in length. In the practical operations of marking out the teeth, however, the arc pitch is not necessarily referred to, for if the diameter of the pitch circle be made correct for the required number of teeth having the necessary arc pitch, and the wheel be accurately divided off into the requisite number of divisions with compasses set to the chord pitch, or by means of an index plate, then the arc pitch must necessarily be correct, although not referred to, save in determining the diameter of the wheel at the pitch circle.

The difference between the width of a space and the thickness of the tooth (both being measured on the pitch circle or pitch line) is termed the clearance or side clearance, which is necessary to prevent the teeth of one wheel from becoming locked in the spaces of the other. The amount of clearance is, when the teeth are cut to shape in a machine, made just sufficient to prevent contact on one side of the teeth when they are in proper gear (the pitch circles meeting in the line of centres). But when the teeth are cast upon the wheel the clearance is increased to allow for the slight inequalities of tooth shape that is incidental to casting them. The amount of clearance given is varied to suit the method employed to mould the wheels, as will be explained hereafter.

The line of centres is an imaginary line from the centre or axis of one wheel to the axis of the other when the two are in gear; hence each tooth is most deeply engaged, in the space of the other wheel, when it is on the line of centres.

There are three methods of designating the sizes of gear-wheels. First, by their diameters at the pitch circle or pitch diameter and the number of teeth they contain; second, by the number of teeth in the wheel and the pitch of the teeth; and third, by a system known as diametral pitch.

The first is objectionable because it involves a calculation to find the pitch of the teeth; furthermore, if this calculation be made by dividing the circumference of the pitch circle by the number of teeth in the wheel, the result gives the arc pitch, which cannot be measured correctly by a lineal measuring rule, especially if the wheel be a small one having but few teeth, or of coarse pitch, as, in that case, the arc pitch very sensibly differs from the chord pitch, and a second calculation may become necessary to find the chord pitch from the arc pitch.

The second method (the number and pitch of the teeth) possesses the disadvantage that it is necessary to state whether the pitch is the arc or the chord pitch.

If the arc pitch is given it is difficult to measure as before, while if the chord pitch is given it possesses the disadvantage that the diameters of the wheels will not be exactly proportional to the numbers of teeth in the respective wheels. For instance, a wheel with 20 teeth of 2 inch chord pitch is not exactly half the diameter of one of 40 teeth and 2 inch chord pitch.

To find the chord pitch of a wheel take 180 (= half the degrees in a circle) and divide it by the number of teeth in the wheel. In a table of natural sines find the sine for the number so found, which multiply by 2, and then by the radius of the wheel in inches.

Example.—What is the chord pitch of a wheel having 12 teeth and a diameter (at pitch circle) of 8 inches? Here 180 ÷ 12 = 15;[I-3] (sine of 15 is .25881). Then .25881 × 2 = .51762 × 4 (= radius of wheel) = 2.07048 inches = chord pitch.

TABLE OF NATURAL SINES.

Degrees. Sine. Degrees. Sine. Degrees. Sine.
1 .01745 16 .27563 31 .51503
2 .03489 17 .29237 32 .52991
3 .05233 18 .30901 33 .54463
4 .06975 19 .32556 34 .55919
5 .08715 20 .34202 35 .57357
6 .10452 21 .35836 36 .58778
7 .12186 22 .37460 37 .60181
8 .13917 23 .39073 38 .61566
9 .15643 24 .40673 39 .62932
10 .17364 25 .42261 40 .64278
11 .19080 26 .43837 41 .65605
12 .20791 27 .45399 42 .66913
13 .22495 28 .46947 43 .68199
14 .24192 29 .48480 44 .69465
15 .25881 30 .50000 45 .70710

The principle upon which diametral pitch is based is as follows:—

The diameter of the wheel at the pitch circle is supposed to be divided into as many equal parts or divisions as there are teeth in the wheel, and the length of one of these parts is the diametral pitch. The relationship which the diametral bears to the arc pitch is the same as the diameter to the circumference, hence a diametral pitch which measures 1 inch will accord with an arc pitch of 3.1416; and it becomes evident that, for all arc pitches of less than 3.1416 inches, the corresponding diametral pitch must be expressed in fractions of an inch, as 12, 13, 14, and so on, increasing the denominator until the fraction becomes so small that an arc with which it accords is too fine to be of practical service. The numerators of these fractions being 1, in each case, they are in practice discarded, the denominators only being used, so that, instead of saying diametral pitches of 12, 13, or 14, we say diametral pitches of 2, 3, or 4, meaning that there are 2, 3, or 4 teeth on the wheel for every inch in the diameter of the pitch circle.

Suppose now we are given a diametral pitch of 2. To obtain the corresponding arc pitch we divide 3.1416 (the relation of the circumference to the diameter) by 2 (the diametral pitch), and 3.1416 ÷ 2 = 1.57 = the arc pitch in inches and decimal parts of an inch. The reason of this is plain, because, an arc pitch of 3.1416 inches being represented by a diametral pitch of 1, a diametral pitch of 12 (or 2 as it is called) will be one half of 3.1416. The advantage of discarding the numerator is, then, that we avoid the use of fractions and are readily enabled to find any arc pitch from a given diametral pitch.

Examples.—Given a 5 diametral pitch; what is the arc pitch? First (using the full fraction 15) we have 15 × 3.1416 = .628 = the arc pitch. Second (discarding the numerator), we have 3.1416 ÷ 5 = .628 = arc pitch. If we are given an arc pitch to find a corresponding diametral pitch we again simply divide 3.1416 by the given arc pitch.

Example.—What is the diametral pitch of a wheel whose arc pitch is 112 inches? Here 3.1416 ÷ 1.5 = 2.09 = diametral pitch. The reason of this is also plain, for since the arc pitch is to the diametral pitch as the circumference is to the diameter we have: as 3.1416 is to 1, so is 1.5 to the required diametral pitch; then 3.1416 × 1 ÷ 1.5 = 2.09 = the required diametral pitch.

To find the number of teeth contained in a wheel when the diameter and diametral pitch is given, multiply the diameter in inches by the diametral pitch. The product is the answer. Thus, how many teeth in a wheel 36 inches diameter and of 3 diametral pitch? Here 36 × 3 = 108 = the number of teeth sought. Or, per contra, a wheel of 36 inches diameter has 108 teeth. What is the diametral pitch? 108 ÷ 36 = 3 = the diametral pitch. Thus it will be seen that, for determining the relative sizes of wheels, this system is excellent from its simplicity. It also possesses the advantage that, by adding two parts of the diametral pitch to the pitch diameter, the outside diameter of the wheel or the diameter of the addendum is obtained. For instance, a wheel containing 30 teeth of 10 pitch would be 3 inches diameter on the pitch circle and 3210 outside or total diameter.

Again, a wheel having 40 teeth of 8 diametral pitch would have a pitch circle diameter of 5 inches, because 40 ÷ 8 = 5, and its full diameter would be 514 inches, because the diametral pitch is 18, and this multiplied by 2 gives 14, which added to the pitch circle diameter of 5 inches makes 514 inches, which is therefore the diameter of the addendum, or, in other words, the full diameter of the wheel.

Suppose now that a pair of wheels require to have pitch circles of 5 and 8 inches diameter respectively, and that the arc pitch requires to be, say, as near as may be 410 inch; to find a suitable pitch and the number of teeth by the diametral pitch system we proceed as follows:

In the following table are given various arc pitches, and the corresponding diametral pitch.

Diametral Pitch. Arc Pitch. Arc Pitch. Diametral Pitch.
    Inch.  
2   1 .57 1 .75 1 .79
2 .25 1 .39 1 .5 2 .09
2 .5 1 .25 1 .4375 2 .18
2 .75 1 .14 1 .375 2 .28
3   1 .04 1 .3125 2 .39
3 .5   .890 1 .25 2 .51
4     .785 1 .1875 2 .65
5     .628 1 .125 2 .79
6     .523 1 .0625 2 .96
7     .448 1 .0000 3 .14
8     .392 0 .9375 3 .35
9     .350 0 .875 3 .59
10     .314 0 .8125 3 .86
11     .280 0 .75 4 .19
12     .261 0 .6875 4 .57
14     .224 0 .625 5 .03
16     .196 0 .5625 5 .58
18     .174 0 .5 6 .28
20     .157 0 .4375 7 .18
22     .143 0 .375 8 .38
24     .130 0 .3125 10 .00
26     .120 0 .25 12 .56

From this table we find that the nearest diametral pitch that will correspond to an arc pitch of 410 inch is a diametral pitch of 8, which equals an arc pitch of .392, hence we multiply the pitch circles (5 and 8,) by 8, and obtain 40 and 64 as the number of teeth, the arc pitch being .392 of an inch. To find the number of teeth and pitch by the arc pitch and circumference of the pitch circle, we should require to find the circumference of the pitch circle, and divide this by the nearest arc pitch that would divide the circumference without leaving a remainder, which would entail more calculating than by the diametral pitch system.

The designation of pitch by the diametral pitch system is, however, not applied in practice to coarse pitches, nor to gears in which the teeth are cast upon the wheels, pattern makers generally preferring to make the pitch to some measurement that accords with the divisions of the ordinary measuring rule.

Fig. 11

Fig. 11.

Of two gear-wheels that which impels the other is termed the driver, and that which receives motion from the other is termed the driven wheel or follower; hence in a single pair of wheels in gear together, one is the driver and the other the driven wheel or follower. But if there are three wheels in gear together, the middle one will be the follower when spoken of with reference to the first or prime mover, and the driver, when mentioned with reference to the third wheel, which will be a follower. A series of more than two wheels in gear together is termed a train of wheels or of gearing. When the wheels in a train are in gear continuously, so that each wheel, save the first and last, both receives and imparts motion, it is a simple train, the first wheel being the driver, and the last the follower, the others being termed intermediate wheels. Each of these intermediates is a follower with reference to the wheel that drives it, and a driver to the one that it drives. But the velocity of all the wheels in the train is the same in fact per second (or in a given space of time), although the revolutions in[I-4] that space of time may vary; hence a simple train of wheels transmits motion without influencing its velocity. To alter the velocity (which is always taken at a point on the pitch circle) the gearing must be compounded, as in Fig. 11, in which a, b, c, e are four wheels in gear, b and c being compounded, that is, so held together on the shaft d that both make an equal number of revolutions in a given time. Hence the velocity of c will be less than that of b in proportion as the diameter, circumference, radius, or number of teeth in c, varies from the diameter, radius, circumference, or number of teeth (all the wheels being supposed to have teeth of the same pitch) in b, although the rotations of b and c are equal. It is most convenient, and therefore usual, to take the number of teeth, but if the teeth on c (and therefore those on e also) were of different pitch from those on b, the radius or diameters of the wheels must be taken instead of the pitch, when the velocities of the various wheels are to be computed. It is obvious that the compounded pair of wheels will diminish the velocity when the driver of the compounded pair (as c in the figure) is of less radius than the follower b, and conversely that the velocity will be increased when the driver is of greater radius than the follower of the compound pair.

The diameter of the addendum or outer circle of a wheel has no influence upon the velocity of the wheel. Suppose, for example, that we have a pair of wheels of 3 inch arc or circular pitch, and containing 20 teeth, the driver of the two making one revolution per minute. Suppose the driven wheel to have fast upon its shaft a pulley whose diameter is one foot, and that a weight is suspended from a line or cord wound around this pulley, then (not taking the thickness of the line into account) each rotation of the driven wheel would raise the weight 3.1416 feet (that being the circumference of the pulley). Now suppose that the addendum circle of either of the wheels were cut off down to the pitch circle, and that they were again set in motion, then each rotation of the driven wheel would still raise the weight 3.1416 feet as before.

It is obvious, however, that the addendum circle must be sufficiently larger than the pitch circle to enable at least one pair of teeth to be in continuous contact; that is to say, it is obvious that contact between any two teeth must not cease before contact between the next two has taken place, for otherwise the motion would not be conveyed continuously. The diameter of the pitch circle cannot be obtained from that of the addendum circle unless the pitch of the teeth and the proportion of the pitch allowed for the addendum be known. But if these be known the diameter of the pitch circle may be obtained by subtracting from that of the addendum circle twice the amount allowed for the addendum of the tooth.

Example.—A wheel has 19 teeth of 3 inch arc pitch; the addendum of the tooth or teeth equals 310 of the pitch, and its addendum circle measures 19.943 inches; what is the diameter of the pitch circle? Here the addendum on each side of the wheel equals (310 of 3 inches) = .9 inches, hence the .9 must be multiplied by 2 for the two sides of the wheel, thus, .9 × 2 = 1.8. Then, diameter of addendum circle 19.943 inches less 1.8 inches = 18.143 inches, which is the diameter of the pitch circle.

Proof.—Number of teeth = 19, arc pitch 3, hence 19 × 3 = 57 inches, which, divided by 3.1416 (the proportion of the circumference to the diameter) = 18.143 inches.

If the distance between the centres of a pair of wheels that are in gear be divided into two parts whose lengths are in the same proportion one to the other as are the numbers of teeth in the wheels, then these two parts will represent the radius of the pitch circles of the respective wheels. Thus, suppose one wheel to contain 100 and the other 50 teeth, and that the distance between their centres is 18 inches, then the pitch radius or pitch diameter of one will be twice that of the other, because one contains twice as many teeth as the other. In this case the radius of pitch circle for the large wheel will be 12 inches, and that for the small one 6 inches, because 12 added to 6 makes 18, which is the distance between the wheel centres, and 12 is in the same proportion to 6 that 100 is to 50.

A simple rule whereby to find the radius of the pitch circles of a pair of wheels is as follows:—

Rule.—Divide number of teeth in the large wheel by the number in the small one, and to the sum so obtained add 1. Take this amount and divide it into the distance between the centres of the wheels, and the result will be the radius of the smallest wheel. To obtain the radius of the largest wheel subtract the radius of the smallest wheel from the distance between the wheel centres.

Example.—Of a pair of wheels, one has 100 and the other 50 teeth, the distance between their centres is 18 inches; what is the pitch radius of each wheel?

Here 100 ÷ 50 = 2, and 2 + 1 = 3. Then 18 ÷ 3 = 6, hence the pitch radius of the small wheel is 6 inches. Then 18 - 6 = 12 = pitch radius of large wheel.

Example 2.—Of a pair of wheels one has 40 and the other 90 teeth. The distance between the wheel centres is 3212 inches; what are the radii of the respective pitch circles? 90 ÷ 40 = 2.25 and 2.25 + 1 = 3.25. Then 32.5 ÷ 3.25 = 10 = pitch radius of small wheel, and 32.5 - 10 = 22.5, which is the pitch radius of the large wheel.

To prove this we may show that the pitch radii of the two wheels are in the same proportion as their numbers of teeth, thus:—

Proof.— Radius of small wheel  =  10  ×  4  =  40
  radius of large wheel  =  22.5  ×  4  =  90.0

Suppose now that a pair of wheels are constructed, having respectively 50 and 100 teeth, and that the radii of their true pitch circles are 12 and 6 respectively, but that from wear in their journals or journal bearings this 18 inches (12 + 6 = 18) between centres (or line of centres, as it is termed) has become 1838 inches. Then the acting effective or operative radii of the pitch circles will bear the same proportion to the 1838 as the numbers of teeth in the respective wheels, and will be 12.25 for the large, and 6.125 for the small wheel, instead of 12 and 6, as would be the case were the wheels 18 inches apart. Working this out under the rule given we have 100 ÷ 50 = 2, and 2 + 1 = 3. Then 18.375 ÷ 3 = 6.125 = pitch radius of small wheel, and 18.375 - 6.125 = 12.25 = pitch radius of the large wheel.

The true pitch line of a tooth is the line or point where the face curve joins the flank curve, and it is essential to the transmission of uniform motion that the pitch circles of epicycloidal wheels exactly coincide on the line of centres, but if they do not coincide (as by not meeting or by overlapping each other), then a false pitch circle becomes operative instead of the true one, and the motion of the driven wheel will be unequal at different instants of time, although the revolutions of the wheels will of course be in proportion to the respective numbers of their teeth.

If the pitch circle is not marked on a single wheel and its arc pitch is not known, it is practically a difficult matter to obtain either the arc pitch or diameter of the pitch circle. If the wheel[I-5] is a new one, and its teeth are of the proper curves, the pitch circle will be shown by the junction of the curves forming the faces with those forming the flanks of the teeth, because that is the location of the pitch circle; but in worn wheels, where from play or looseness between the journals and their bearings, this point of junction becomes rounded, it cannot be defined with certainty.

In wheels of large diameter the arc pitch so nearly coincides with the chord pitch, that if the pitch circle is not marked on the wheel and the arc pitch is not known, the chord pitch is in practice often assumed to represent the arc pitch, and the diameter of the wheel is obtained by multiplying the number of teeth by the chord pitch. This induces no error in wheels of coarse pitches, because those pitches advance by 14 or 12 inch at a step, and a pitch measuring about, say, 114 inch chord pitch, would be known to be 114 arc pitch, because the difference between the arc and chord pitch would be too minute to cause sensible error. Thus the next coarsest pitch to 1 inch would be 118, or more often 114 inch, and the difference between the arc and chord pitch of the smallest wheel would not amount to anything near 18 inch, hence there would be no liability to mistake a pitch of 118 for 1 inch or vice versâ. The diameter of wheel that will be large enough to transmit continuous motion is diminished in proportion as the pitch is decreased; in proportion, also, as the wheel diameter is reduced, the difference between the arc and chord pitch increases, and further the steps by which fine pitches advance are more minute (as 14, 932, 516, &c.). From these facts there is much more liability to err in estimating the arc from the measured chord pitch in fine pitches, hence the employment of diametral pitch for small wheels of fine pitches is on this account also very advantageous. In marking out a wheel the chord pitch will be correct if the pitch circle be of correct diameter and be divided off into as many points of equal division (with compasses) as there are to be teeth in the wheel. We may then mark from these points others giving the thickness of the teeth, which will make the spaces also correct. But when the wheel teeth are to be cut in a machine out of solid metal, the mechanism of the machine enables the marking out to be dispensed with, and all that is necessary is to turn the wheel to the required addendum diameter, and mark the pitch circle. The following are rules for the purposes they indicate.

The circumference of a circle is obtained by multiplying its diameter by 3.1416, and the diameter may be obtained by dividing the circumference by 3.1416.

The circumference of the pitch circle divided by the arc pitch gives the number of teeth in the wheel.

The arc pitch multiplied by the number of teeth in the wheel gives the circumference of the pitch circle.

Gear-wheels are simply rotating levers transmitting the power they receive, less the amount of friction necessary to rotate them under the given conditions. All that is accomplished by a simple train of gearing is, as has been said, to vary the number of revolutions, the speed or velocity measured in feet moved through per minute remaining the same for every wheel in the train. But in a compound train of gears the speed in feet per minute, as well as the revolutions, may be varied by means of the compounded pairs of wheels. In either a simple or a compound train of gearing the power remains the same in amount for every wheel in the train, because what is in a compound train lost in velocity is gained in force, or what is gained in velocity is lost in force, the word force being used to convey the idea of strain, pressure, or pull.

Fig. 12

Fig. 12.

In Fig. 12, let a, b, and c represent the pitch circles of three gears of which a and b are in gear, while c is compounded with b; let e be the shaft of a, and g that for b and c. Let a be 60 inches, b = 30 inches, and c = 40 inches in diameter. Now suppose that shaft e suspends from its perimeter a weight of 50 lbs., the shaft being 4 inches in diameter. Then this weight will be at a leverage of 2 inches from the centre of e and the 50 must be multiplied by 2, making 100 lbs. at the centre of e. Then at the perimeter of a this 100 will become one-thirtieth of one hundred, because from the centre to the perimeter of a is 30. One-thirtieth of 100 is 333100 lbs., which will be the force exerted by a on the perimeter of b. Now from the perimeter of b to its centre (or in other words its radius) is 15 inches, hence the 333100 lbs. at its perimeter will become fifteen times as much at the centre g of b, and 333100 × 15 = 4995100 lbs. From the centre g to the perimeter of c being 20 inches, the 4995100 lbs. at the centre will be only one-twentieth of that amount at the perimeter of c, hence 4995100 ÷ 20 = 249100 lbs., which is the amount of force at the perimeter of c.

Here we have treated the wheels as simple levers, dividing the weight by the length of the levers in all cases where it is transmitted from the shaft to the perimeter, and multiplying it by the length of the lever when it is transmitted from the perimeter of the wheel to the centre of the shaft. The precise same result will be reached if we take the diameter of the wheels or the number of the teeth, providing the pitch of the teeth on all the wheels is alike.

Suppose, for example, that a has 60 teeth, b has 30 teeth, and c has 40 teeth, all being of the same pitch. Suppose the 50 lb. weight be suspended as before, and that the circumference of the shaft be equal to that of a pinion having 4 teeth of the same pitch as the wheels. Then the 50 multiplied by the 4 becomes 200, which divided by 60 (the number of teeth on a) becomes 333100, which multiplied by 30 (the number of teeth on b) becomes 9990100, which divided by 40 (the number of teeth on c) becomes 249100 lbs. as before.

It may now be explained why the shaft was taken as equal to a pinion having 4 teeth. Its diameter was taken as 4 inches and the wheel diameter was taken as being 60 inches, and it was supposed to contain 60 teeth, hence there was 1 tooth to each inch of diameter, and the 4 inches diameter of shaft was therefore equal to a pinion having 4 teeth. From this we may perceive the philosophy of the rule that to obtain the revolutions of wheels we multiply the given revolutions by the teeth in the driving wheels and divide by the teeth in the driven wheels.

Fig. 13

Fig. 13.

Suppose that a (Fig. 13) makes 1 revolution per minute, how many will c make, a having 60 teeth, b 30 teeth, and c 40 teeth? In this case we have but one driving wheel a, and one driven wheel b, the driver having 60 teeth, the driven 30, hence 60 ÷ 30 = 2, equals revolutions of b and also of c, the two latter being on the same shaft.

It will be observed then that the revolutions are in the same proportion as the numbers of the teeth or the radii of the wheels, or what is the same thing, in the same proportion as their diameters. The number of teeth, however, is usually taken as being easier obtained than the diameter of the pitch circles, and easier to calculate, because the teeth will be represented by a whole number, whereas the diameter, radius, or circumference, will generally contain fractions.

Fig. 14

Fig. 14.

[I-6]Suppose that the 4 wheels in Fig. 14 have the respective numbers of teeth marked beside them, and that the upper one having 40 teeth makes 60 revolutions per minute, then we may obtain the revolutions of the others as follows:—

Revolu-
tions.
  Teeth in
first driver.
  Teeth in
first driven.
  Teeth in
second driver.
  Teeth in
second driven.
 
60  ×  40  ÷  60  ×  20  ÷  120  =  666100

and a remainder of the reciprocating decimals. We may now prove this by reversing the question, thus. Suppose the 120 wheel to make 666100 revolutions per minute, how many will the 40 wheel make?

Revolu-
tions.
  Teeth in
first driver.
  Teeth in
first driven.
  Teeth in
second driver.
  Teeth in
second driven.
 
6.66  ×  120  ÷  20  ×  60  ÷  40  =  5999100  = 

revolutions of the 40 wheel, the discrepancy of 1100 being due to the 6.66 leaving a remainder and not therefore being absolutely correct.

That the amount of power transmitted by gearing, whether compounded or not, is equal throughout every wheel in the train, may be shown as follows:—

Referring again to Fig. 10, it has been shown that with a 50 lb. weight suspended from a 4 inch shaft e, there would be 3033100 lbs. at the perimeter of a. Now suppose a rotation be made, then the 50 lb. weight would fall a distance equal to the circumference of the shaft, which is (3.1416 × 4 = 1256100) 1256100 inches. Now the circumference of the wheel is (60 dia. × 3.1416 = 18849100 cir.) 18849100 inches, which is the distance through which the 333100 lbs. would move during one rotation of a. Now 3.33 lbs. moving through 188.49 inches represents the same amount of power as does 50 lbs. moving through a distance of 12.56 inches, as may be found by converting the two into inch lbs. (that is to say, into the number of inches moved by 1 lb.), bearing in mind that there will be a slight discrepancy due to the fact that the fractions .33 in the one case, and .56 in the other are not quite correct. Thus:

188.49  inches  ×  3.33  lbs.  =  627 .67  inch  lbs.,  and
12.56  ×  50  =  628  

Taking the next wheels in Fig. 12, it has been shown that the 3.33 lbs. delivered from a to the perimeter of b, becomes 2.49 lbs. at the perimeter of c, and it has also been shown that c makes two revolutions to one of a, and its diameter being 40 inches, the distance this 2.49 lbs. will move through in one revolution of a will therefore be equal to twice its circumference, which is (40 dia. × 3.1416 = 125.666 cir., and 125.666 × 2 = 251.332) 251.332 inches. Now 2.49 lbs. moving through 251.332 gives when brought to inch lbs. 627.67 inch lbs., thus 251.332 × 2.49 = 627.67. Hence the amount of power remains constant, but is altered in form, merely being converted from a heavy weight moving a short distance, into a lighter one moving a distance exactly as much greater as the weight or force is lessened or lighter.

Gear-wheels therefore form a convenient method of either simply transmitting motion or power, as when the wheels are all of equal diameter, or of transmitting it and simultaneously varying its velocity of motion, as when the wheels are compounded either to reduce or increase the speed or velocity in feet per second of the prime mover or first driver of the train or pair, as the case may be.

Fig. 15

Fig. 15.

In considering the action of gear-teeth, however, it sometimes is more convenient to denote their motion by the number of degrees of angle they move through during a certain portion of a revolution, and to refer to their relative velocities in terms of the ratio or proportion existing between their velocities. The first of these is termed the angular velocity, or the number of degrees of angle the wheel moves through during a given period, while the second is termed the velocity ratio of the pair of wheels. Let it be supposed that two wheels of equal diameter have contact at their perimeters so that one drives the other by friction without any slip, then the velocity of a point on the perimeter of one will equal that of a point on the other. Thus in Fig. 15 let a and b represent the pitch circles of two wheels, and c an imaginary line joining the axes of the two wheels and termed the line of centres. Now the point of contact of the two wheels will be on the line of[I-7] centres as at d, and if a point or dot be marked at d and motion be imparted from a to b, then when each wheel has made a quarter revolution the dot on a will have arrived at e while that on b will have arrived at f. As each wheel has moved through one quarter revolution, it has moved through 90° of angle, because in the whole circle there is 360°, one quarter of which is 90°, hence instead of saying that the wheels have each moved through one quarter of a revolution we may say they have moved through an angle of 90°, or, in other words, their angular velocity has, during this period, been 90°. And as both wheels have moved through an equal number of degrees of angle their velocity ratio or proportion of velocity has been equal.

Obviously then the angular velocity of a wheel represents a portion of a revolution irrespective of the diameter of the wheel, while the velocity ratio represents the diameter of one in proportion to that of the other irrespective of the actual diameter of either of them.

Fig. 16

Fig. 16.

Now suppose that in Fig. 16 a is a wheel of twice the diameter of b; that the two are free to revolve about their fixed centres, but that there is frictional contact between their perimeters at the line of centres sufficient to cause the motion of one to be imparted to the other without slip or lost motion, and that a point be marked on both wheels at the point of contact d. Now let motion be communicated to a until the mark that was made at d has moved one-eighth of a revolution and it will have moved through an eighth of a circle, or 45°. But during this motion the mark on b will have moved a quarter of a revolution, or through an angle of 90° (which is one quarter of the 360° that there are in the whole circle). The angular velocities of the two are, therefore, in the same ratio as their diameters, or two to one, and the velocity ratio is also two to one. The angular velocity of each is therefore the number of degrees of angle that it moves through in a certain portion of a revolution, or during the period that the other wheel of the pair makes a certain portion of a revolution, while the velocity ratio is the proportion existing between the velocity of one wheel and that of the other; hence if the diameter of one only of the wheels be changed, its angular velocity will be changed and the velocity ratio of the pair will be changed. The velocity ratio may be obtained by dividing either the radius, pitch, diameter, or number of teeth of one wheel into that of the other.

Conversely, if a given velocity ratio is to be obtained, the radius, diameter, or number of teeth of the driver must bear the same relation to the radius, diameter, or number of teeth of the follower, as the velocity of the follower is desired to bear to that of the driver.

Fig. 17

Fig. 17.

If a pair of wheels have an equal number of teeth, the same pairs of teeth will come into action at every revolution; but if of two wheels one is twice as large as the other, each tooth on the small wheel will come into action twice during each revolution of the large one, and will work during each successive revolution with the same two teeth on the large wheel; and an application of the principle of the hunting tooth is sometimes employed in clocks to prevent the overwinding of their springs, the device being shown in Fig. 17, which is from “Willis’ Principles of Mechanism.”

For this purpose the winding arbor c has a pinion a of 19 teeth fixed to it close to the front plate. A pinion b of 18 teeth is mounted on a stud so as to be in gear with the former. A radial plate c d is fixed to the face of the upper wheel a, and a similar plate f e to the lower wheel b. These plates terminate outward in semicircular noses d, e, so proportioned as to cause their extremities to abut against each other, as shown in the figure, when the motion given to the upper arbor by the winding has brought them into the position of contact. The clock being now wound up, the winding arbor and wheel a will begin to turn in the opposite direction. When its first complete rotation is effected the wheel b will have gained one tooth distance from the line of centres, so as to place the stop d in advance of e and thus avoid a contact with e, which would stop the motion. As each turn of the upper wheel increases the distance of the stops, it follows from the principle of the hunting cog, that after eighteen revolutions of a and nineteen of b the stops will come together again and the clock be prevented from running down too far. The winding key being applied, the upper wheel a will be rotated in the opposite direction, and the winding repeated as above.

Thus the teeth on one wheel will wear to imbed one upon the other. On the other hand the teeth of the two wheels may be of such numbers that those on one wheel will not fall into gear with the same teeth on the other except at intervals, and thus an inequality on any one tooth is subjected to correction by all the teeth in the other wheel. When a tooth is added to the number of teeth on a wheel to effect this purpose it is termed a hunting cog, or hunting tooth, because if one wheel have a tooth less, then any two teeth which meet in the first revolution are distant, one tooth in the second, two teeth in the third, three in the fourth, and so on. The odd tooth is on this account termed a hunting tooth.

It is obvious then that the shape or form to be given to the teeth must, to obtain correct results, be such that the motion of the driver will be communicated to the follower with the velocity due to the relative diameters of the wheels at the pitch circles, and since the teeth move in the arc of a circle it is also obvious that the sides of the teeth, which are the only parts that come into contact, must be of same curve. The nature of this curve must be such that the teeth shall possess the strength necessary to transmit the required amount of power, shall possess ample wearing surface, shall be as easily produced as possible for all the varying conditions, shall give as many teeth in constant contact as possible, and shall, as far as possible, exert a pressure in a direction to rotate the wheels without inducing undue wear upon the journals of the shafts upon which the wheels rotate. In cases, however, in which some of these requirements must be partly sacrificed to increase the value of the others, or of some of the others, to suit the special circumstances under which the wheels are to operate, the selection is left to the judgment of the designer, and the considerations which should influence his determinations will appear hereafter.

Fig. 18

Fig. 18.

Fig. 19

Fig. 19.

[I-8]Modern practice has accepted the curve known in general terms as the cycloid, as that best filling all the requirements of wheel teeth, and this curve is employed to produce two distinct forms of teeth, epicycloidal and involute. In epicycloidal teeth the curve forming the face of the tooth is designated an epicycloid, and that forming the flank an hypocycloid. An epicycloid may be traced or generated, as it is termed, by a point in the circumference of a circle that rolls without slip upon the circumference of another circle. Thus, in Fig. 18, a and b represent two wooden wheels, a having a pencil at p, to serve as a tracing or marking point. Now, if the wheels are laid upon a sheet of paper and while holding b in a fixed position, roll a in contact with b and let the tracing point touch the paper, the point p will trace the curve c c. Suppose now the diameter of the base circle b to be infinitely large, a portion of its circumference may be represented by a straight line, and the curve traced by a point on the circumference of the generating circle as it rolls along the base line b is termed a cycloid. Thus, in Fig. 19, b is the base line, a the rolling wheel or generating circle, and c c the cycloidal curve traced or marked by the point d when a is rolled along b. If now we suppose the base line b to represent the pitch line of a rack, it will be obvious that part of the cycloid at one end is suitable for the face on one side of the tooth, and a part at the other end is suitable for the face of the other side of the tooth.

Fig. 20

Fig. 20.

A hypocycloid is a curve traced or generated by a point on the circumference of a circle rolling within and in contact (without slip) with another circle. Thus, in Fig. 20, a represents a wheel in contact with the internal circumference of b, and a point on its circumference will trace the two curves, c c, both curves starting from the same point, the upper having been traced by rolling the generating circle or wheel a in one direction and the lower curve by rolling it in the opposite direction.

Fig. 21

Fig. 21.

To demonstrate that by the epicycloidal and hypocycloidal curves, forming the faces and flanks of what are known as epicycloidal teeth, motion may be communicated from one wheel to another with as much uniformity as by frictional contact of their circumferential surfaces, let a, b, in Fig. 21, represent two plain wheel disks at liberty to revolve about their fixed centres, and let c c represent a margin of stiff white paper attached to the face of b so as to revolve with it. Now suppose that a and b are in close contact at their perimeters at the point g, and that there is no slip, and that rotary motion commenced when the point e (where as tracing point a pencil is attached), in conjunction with the point f, formed the point of contact of the two wheels, and continued until the points e and f had arrived at their respective positions as shown in the figure; the pencil at e will have traced upon the margin of white paper the portion of an epicycloid denoted by the curve e f; and as the movement of the two wheels a, b, took place by reason of the contact of their circumferences, it is evident that the length of the arc e g must be equal to that of the arc g f, and that the motion of a (supposing it to be the driver) would be communicated uniformly to b.

Fig. 22

Fig. 22.

Now suppose that the wheels had been rotated in the opposite direction and the same form of curve would be produced, but it would run in the opposite direction, and these two curves may be utilized to form teeth, as in Fig. 22, the points on the wheel a working against the curved sides of the teeth on b.

Fig. 23

Fig. 23.

To render such a pair of wheels useful in practice, all that is necessary is to diminish the teeth on b without altering the[I-9] nature of the curves, and increase the diameter of the points on a, making them into rungs or pins, thus forming the wheels into what is termed a wheel and lantern, which are illustrated in Fig. 23.

a represents the pinion (or lantern), and b the wheel, and c, c, the primitive teeth reduced in thickness to receive the pins on a. This reduction we may make by setting a pair of compasses to the radius of the rung and describing half-circles at the bottom of the spaces in b. We may then set a pair of compasses to the curve of c, and mark off the faces of the teeth of b to meet the half-circles at the pitch line, and reduce the teeth heights so as to leave the points of the proper thickness; having in this operation maintained the same epicycloidal curves, but brought them closer together and made them shorter. It is obvious, however, that such a method of communicating rotary motion is unsuited to the transmission of much power; because of the weakness of, and small amount of wearing surface on, the points or rungs in a.

Fig. 24

Fig. 24.

In place of points or rungs we may have radial lines, these lines, representing the surfaces of ribs, set equidistant on the radial face of the pinion, as in Fig. 24. To determine the epicycloidal curves for the faces of teeth to work with these radial lines, we may take a generating circle c, of half the diameter of a, and cause it to roll in contact with the internal circumference of a, and a tracing point fixed in the circumference of c will draw the radial lines shown upon a. The circumstances will not be altered if we suppose the three circles, a, b, c, to be movable about their fixed centres, and let their centres be in a straight line; and if, under these circumstances, we suppose rotation to be imparted to the three circles, through frictional contact of their perimeters, a tracing point on the circumference of c would trace the epicycloids shown upon b and the radial lines shown upon a, evidencing the capability of one to impart uniform rotary motion to the other.

Fig. 25

Fig. 25.

To render the radial lines capable of use we must let them be the surfaces of lugs or projections on the face of the wheel, as shown in Fig. 25 at d, e, &c., or the faces of notches cut in the wheel as at f, g, h, &c., the metal between f and g forming a tooth j, having flanks only. The wheel b has the curves of each tooth brought closer together to give room for the reception of the teeth upon a. We have here a pair of gears that possess sufficient strength and are capable of working correctly in either direction.

But the form of tooth on one wheel is conformed simply to suit those on the other, hence, neither two of the wheels a, nor would two of b, work correctly together.

Fig. 26

Fig. 26.

They may be qualified to do so, however, by simply adding to[I-10] the tops of the teeth on a, teeth of the form of those on b, and adding to those on b, and within the pitch circle, teeth corresponding to those on a, as in Fig. 26, where at k′ and j′ teeth are provided on b corresponding to j and k on a, while on a there are added teeth o′, n′, corresponding to o, n, on b, with the result that two wheels such as a or two such as b would work correctly together, either being the driver or either the follower, and rotation may occur in either direction. In this operation we have simply added faces to the teeth on a, and flanks to those on b, the curves being generated or obtained by rolling the generating, or curve marking, circle c upon the pitch circles p and p′. Thus, for the flanks of the teeth of a, c is rolled upon, and within the pitch circle p of a; while for the face curves of the same teeth c is rolled upon, but without or outside of p. Similarly for the teeth of wheel b the generating circle c is rolled within p′ for the flanks and without for the faces. With the curves rolled or produced with the same diameter of generating circle the wheels will work correctly together, no matter what their relative diameter may be, as will be shown hereafter.

In this demonstration, however, the curves for the faces of the teeth being produced by an operation distinct from that employed to produce the flank curves, it is not clearly seen that the curves for the flanks of one wheel are the proper curves to insure a uniform velocity to the other. This, however, may be made clear as follows:—

Fig. 27

Fig. 27.

In Fig. 27 let a a and b b represent the pitch circles of two wheels of equal diameters, and therefore having the same number of teeth. On the left, the wheels are shown with the teeth in, while on the right-hand side of the line of centres a b, the wheels are shown blank; a a is the pitch line of one wheel, and b b that for the other. Now suppose that both wheels are capable of being rotated on their shafts, whose centres will of course be on the line a b, and suppose a third disk, q, be also capable of rotation upon its centre, c, which is also on the line a b. Let these three wheels have sufficient contact at their perimeters at the point n, that if one be rotated it will rotate both the others (by friction) without any slip or lost motion, and of course all three will rotate at an equal velocity. Suppose that there is fixed to wheel q a pencil whose point is at n. If then rotation be given to a a in the direction of the arrow s, all three wheels will rotate in that direction as denoted by their respective arrows s.

Assume, then, that rotation of the three has occurred until the pencil point at n has arrived at the point m, and during this period of rotation the point n will recede from the line of centres a b, and will also recede from the arcs or lines of the two pitch circles a a, b b. The pencil point being capable of marking its path, it will be found on reaching m to have marked inside the pitch circle b b the curve denoted by the full line m x, and simultaneously with this curve it has marked another curve outside of a a, as denoted by the dotted line y m. These two curves being marked by the pencil point at the same time and extending from y to m, and x also to m. They are prolonged respectively to p and to k for clearness of illustration only.

The rotation of the three wheels being continued, when the pencil point has arrived at o it will have continued the same curves as shown at o f, and o g, curve o f being the same as m x placed in a new position, and o g being the same as m y, but placed in a new position. Now since both these curves (o f and o g) were marked by the one pencil point, and at the same time, it follows that at every point in its course that point must have touched both curves at once. Now the pencil point having moved around the arc of the circle q from n to m, it is obvious that the two curves must always be in contact, or coincide with each other, at some point in the path of the pencil or describing point, or, in other words, the curves will always touch each other at some point on the curve of q, and between n and o. Thus when the pencil has arrived at m, curve m y touches curve k x at the point m, while when the pencil had arrived at point o, the curves o f and o g will touch at o. Now the pitch circles a a and b b, and the describing circle q, having had constant and uniform velocity while the traced curves had constant contact at some point in their lengths, it is evident that if instead of being mere lines, m y was the face of a tooth on a a, and m x was the flank of a tooth on b b, the same uniform motion may be transmitted from a a, to b b, by pressing the tooth face m y against[I-11] the tooth flank m x. Let it now be noted that the curve y m corresponds to the face of a tooth, as say the face e of a tooth on a a, and that curve x m corresponds to the flank of a tooth on b b, as say to the flank f, short portions only of the curves being used for those flanks. If the direction of rotation of the three wheels was reversed, the same shape of curves would be produced, but they would lie in an opposite direction, and would, therefore, be suitable for the other sides of the teeth. In this case, the contact of tooth upon tooth will be on the other side of the line of centres, as at some point between n and q.

Fig. 28

Fig. 28.

Fig. 29

Fig. 29.

In this illustration the diameter of the rolling or describing circle q, being less than the radius of the wheels a a or b b, the flanks of the teeth are curves, and the two wheels being of the same diameter, the teeth on the two are of the same shape. But the principles governing the proper formation of the curve remain the same whatever be the conditions. Thus in Fig. 28 are segments of a pair of wheels of equal diameter, but the describing, rolling, or curve-generating circle is equal in diameter to the radius of the wheels. Motion is supposed to have occurred in the direction of the arrows, and the tracing point to have moved from n to m. During this motion it will have marked a curve y m, a portion of the y end serving for the face of a tooth on one wheel, and also the line k x, a continuation of which serves for the flank of a tooth on the other wheel. In Fig. 29 the pitch circles only of the wheels are marked, a a being twice the diameter of b b, and the curve-generating circle being equal in diameter to the radius of wheel b b. Motion is assumed to have occurred until the pencil point, starting from n, had arrived at o, marking curves suitable for the face of the teeth on one wheel and for the flanks of the other as before, and the contact of tooth upon tooth still, at every point in the path of the teeth, occurring at some point of the arc n o. Thus when the point had proceeded as far as point m it will have marked the curve y and the radial line x, and when the point had arrived at o, it will have prolonged m y into o g and x into o f, while in either position the point is marking both lines. The velocities of the wheels remain the same notwithstanding their different diameters, for the arc n g must obviously (if the wheels rotate without slip by friction of their surfaces while the curves are traced) be equal in length to the arc n f or the arc n o.

Fig. 30

Fig. 30.

In Fig. 30 a a and b b are the pitch circles of two wheels as before, and c c the pitch circle of an annular or internal gear, and d is the rolling or describing circle. When the describing point arrived at m, it will have marked the curve y for the face of a tooth on a a, the curve x for the flank of a tooth on b b, and the curve e for the face of a tooth on the internal wheel c c.[I-12] Motion being continued m y will be prolonged to o g, while simultaneously x will be extended into o f and e into h v, the velocity of all the wheels being uniform and equal. Thus the arcs n v, n f, and n g, are of equal length.

Fig. 31

Fig. 31.

In Fig. 31 is shown the case of a rack and pinion; a a is the pitch line of the rack, b b that of the pinion, a b at a right angle to a a, the line of centres, and d the generating circle. The wheel and rack are shown with teeth n on one side simply for clearness of illustration. The pencil point n will, on arriving at m, have traced the flank curve x and the curve y for the face of the rack teeth.

Fig. 32

Fig. 32.

It has been supposed that the three circles rotated together by the frictional contact of their perimeters on the line of centres, but the circumstances will remain the same if the wheels remain at rest while the generating or describing circle is rolled around them. Thus in Fig. 32 are two segments of wheels as before, c representing the centre of a tooth on a a, and d representing the centre of a tooth on b b. Now suppose that a generating or rolling circle be placed with its pencil point at e, and that it then be rolled around a a until it had reached the position marked 1, then it will have marked the curve from e to n, a part of this curve serving for the face of tooth c. Now let the rolling circle be placed within the pitch circle a a and its pencil point n be set to e, then, on being rolled to position 2, it will have marked the flank of tooth c. For the other wheel suppose the rolling wheel or circle to have started from f and rolled to the line of centres as in the cut, it will have traced the curve forming the face of the tooth d. For the flank of d the rolling circle or wheel is placed within b b, its tracing point set at f on the pitch circle, and on being rolled to position 3 it will have marked the flank curve. The curves thus produced will be precisely the same as those produced by rotating all three wheels about their axes, as in our previous demonstrations.

The curves both for the faces and for the flanks thus obtained will vary in their curvature with every variation in either the diameter of the generating circle or of the base or pitch circle of the wheel. Thus it will be observable to the eye that the face curve of tooth c is more curved than that of d, and also that the flank curve of d is more spread at the root than is that for c, which has in this case resulted from the difference between the diameter of the wheels a a and b b. But the curves obtained by a given diameter of rolling circle on a given diameter of pitch circle will be correct for any pitch of teeth that can be used upon wheels having that diameter of pitch circle. Thus, suppose we have a curve obtained by rolling a wheel of 20 inches circumference on a pitch circle of 40 inches circumference—now a wheel of 40 inches in circumference may contain 20 teeth of 2 inch arc pitch, or 10 teeth of 4 inch arc pitch, or 8 teeth of 5 inch arc pitch, and the curve may be used for either of those pitches.

Fig. 33

Fig. 33.

If we trace the path of contact of each tooth, from the moment it takes until it leaves contact with a tooth upon the other wheel, we shall find that contact begins at the point where the flank of the tooth on the wheel that drives or imparts motion to the other wheel, meets the face of the tooth on the driven wheel, which will always be where the point of the driven tooth cuts or meets the generating or rolling circle of the driving tooth. Thus in Fig. 33 are represented segments of two spur-wheels marked respectively the driver and the driven, their generating circles being marked at g and g′, and x x representing the line of centres. Tooth a is shown in the position in which it commences its contact with tooth[I-13] b at b. Secondly, we shall find that as these two teeth approach the line of centres x, the point of contact between them moves or takes place along the thickened arc or curve c x, or along the path of the generating circle g.

Thus we may suppose tooth d to be another position of tooth a, the contact being at f, and as motion was continued the contact would pass along the thickened curve until it arrived at the line of centres x. Now since the teeth have during this path of contact approached the line of centres, this part of the whole arc of action or of the path of contact is termed the arc of approach. After the two teeth have passed the line of centres x, the path of contact of the teeth will be along the dotted arc from x to l, and as the teeth are during this period of motion receding from x this part of the contact path is termed the arc of recess.

That contact of the teeth would not occur earlier than at c nor later than at l, is shown by the dotted teeth sides; thus a and b would not touch when in the position denoted by the dotted teeth, nor would teeth i and k if in the position denoted by their dotted lines.

If we examine further into this path of contact we find that throughout its whole path the face of the tooth of one wheel has contact with the flank only of the tooth of the other wheel, and also that the flank only of the driving-wheel tooth has contact before the tooth reaches the line of centres, while the face of only the driving tooth has contact after the tooth has passed the line of centres.

Thus the flanks of tooth a and of tooth d are in driving contact with the faces of teeth b and e, while the face of tooth h is in contact with the flank of tooth i.

These conditions will always exist, whatever be the diameters of the wheels, their number of teeth or the diameter of the generating circle. That is to say, in fully developed epicycloidal teeth, no matter which of two wheels is the driver or which the driven wheel, contact on the teeth of the driver will always be on the tooth flank during the arc of approach and on the tooth face during the arc of recess; while on the driven wheel contact during the arc of approach will be on the tooth face only, and during the arc of recess on the tooth flank only, it being borne in mind that the arcs of approach and recess are reversed in location if the direction of revolution be reversed. Thus if the direction of wheel motion was opposite to that denoted by the arrows in Fig. 33 then the arc of approach would be from m to x, and the arc of recess from x to n.

Fig. 34

Fig. 34.

It is laid down by Professor Willis that the motion of a pair of gear-wheels is smoother in cases where the path of contact begins at the line of centres, or, in other words, when there is no arc of approach; and this action may be secured by giving to the driven wheel flanks only, as in Fig. 34, in which the driver has fully developed teeth, while the teeth on the driven have no faces.

In this case, supposing the wheels to revolve in the direction of arrow p, the contact will begin at the line of centres x, move or pass along the thickened arc and end at b, and there will be contact during the arc of recess only. Similarly, if the direction of motion be reversed as denoted by arrow q, the driver will begin contact at x, and cease contact at h, having, as before, contact during the arc of recess only.

But if the wheel w were the driver and v the driven, then these conditions would be exactly reversed. Thus, suppose this to be the case and the direction of motion be as denoted by arrow p, the contact would occur during the arc of approach, from h to x, ceasing at x.

Or if w were the driver, and the direction of motion was as denoted by q, then, again, the path of contact would be during the arc of approach only, beginning at b and ceasing at x, as denoted by the thickened arc b x.

Fig. 35

Fig. 35.

The action of the teeth will in either case serve to give a theoretically perfect motion so far as uniformity of velocity is concerned, or, in other words, the motion of the driver will be transmitted with perfect uniformity to the driven wheel. It will be observed, however, that by the removal of the faces of the teeth, there are a less number of teeth in contact at each instant of time; thus, in Fig. 33 there is driving contact at three points, c, f, and j, while in Fig. 34 there is driving contact at two points only. From the fact that the faces of the teeth work with the flanks only, and that one side only of the teeth comes into action, it becomes apparent that each tooth may have curves formed by four different diameters of rolling or generating circles and yet work correctly, no matter which wheel be the driver, or which the driven wheel or follower, or in which direction motion occurs. Thus in Fig. 35, suppose wheel v to be the driver, having motion in the direction of arrow p, then faces a on the teeth of v will work with flanks b of the teeth on w, and so long as the curves for these faces and flanks are obtained with the same diameter of rolling circle, the action of the teeth will be correct, no matter[I-14] what the shapes of the other parts of the teeth. Now suppose that v still being the driver, motion occurs in the other direction as denoted by q, then the faces c of the teeth on v will drive the flanks c of the teeth on w, and the motion will again be correct, providing that the same diameter (whatever it may be) of rolling circle be used for these faces and flanks, irrespective, of course, of what diameter of rolling circle is used for any other of the teeth curves. Now suppose that w is the driver, motion occurring in the direction of p, then faces e will drive flanks f, and the motion will be correct as before if the curves e and f are produced with the same diameter of rolling circle. Finally, let w be the driving wheel and motion occur in the direction of q, and faces g will drive flanks h, and yet another diameter of rolling circle may be used for these faces and flanks. Here then it is shown that four different diameters of rolling circles may be used upon a pair of wheels, giving teeth-forms that will fill all the requirements so far as correctly transmitting motion is concerned. In the case of a pair of wheels having an equal number of teeth, so that each tooth on one wheel will always fall into gear with the same tooth on the other wheel, every tooth may have its individual curves differing from all the others, providing that the corresponding teeth on the other wheel are formed to match them by using the same size of rolling circle for each flank and face that work together.

It is obvious, however, that such teeth would involve a great deal of labor in their formation and would possess no advantage, hence they are not employed. It is not unusual, however, in a pair of wheels that are to gear together and that are not intended to interchange with other wheels, to use such sizes as will give to[I-15] for the face of the teeth on the largest wheel of the pair and for the flanks of the teeth of the smallest wheel, a generating circle equal in diameter to the radius of the smallest wheel, and for the faces of the teeth of the small wheel and the flanks of the teeth of the large one, a generating circle whose diameter equals the radius of the large wheel.

Fig. 36

Fig. 36.

It will now be evident that if we have planned a pair or a train of wheels we may find how many teeth will be in contact for any given pitch, as follows. In Fig. 36 let a, b, and c, represent three blanks for gear-wheels whose addendum circles are m, n and o; p representing the pitch circles, and q representing the circles for the roots of the teeth. Let x and y represent the lines of centres, and a, h, i and k the generating or rolling circle, whose centres are on the respective lines of centres—the diameter of the generating circle being equal to the radius of the pinion, as in the Willis system, then, the pinion m being the driver, and the wheels revolving in the direction denoted by the respective arrows, the arc or path of contact for the first pair will be from point d, where the generating circle g crosses circle n to e, where generating circle h crosses the circle m, this path being composed of two arcs of a circle. All that is necessary, therefore, is to set the compasses to the pitch the teeth are to have and step them along these arcs, and the number of steps will be the number of teeth that will be in contact. Similarly, for the second pair contact will begin at r and end at s, and the compasses applied as before (from r to s) along the arc of generating circle i to the line of centres, and thence along the arc of generating circle k to s, will give in the number of steps, the number of teeth that will be in contact. If for any given purpose the number of teeth thus found to be in contact is insufficient; the pitch may be made finer.

Fig. 37

Fig. 37.

Fig. 38

Fig. 38.

When a wheel is intended to be formed to work correctly with any other wheel having the same pitch, or when there are more than two wheels in the train, it is necessary that the same size of generating circle be used for all the faces and all the flanks in the set, and if this be done the wheels will work correctly together, no matter what the number of the teeth in each wheel may be, nor in what way they are interchanged. Thus in Fig. 37, let a represent the pitch line of a rack, and b and c the pitch circles of two wheels, then the generating circle would be rolled within b, as at 1, for the flank curves, and without it, as at 2, for the face curves of b. It would be rolled without the pitch line, as at 3, for the rack faces, and within it, as at 4, for the rack flanks, and without c, as at 5, for the faces, and within it, as at 6, for flanks of the teeth on c, and all the teeth will work correctly together however they be placed; thus c might receive motion from the rack, and b receive motion from c. Or if any number of different diameters of wheels are used they will all work correctly together and interchange perfectly, with the single condition that the same size of generating circle be used throughout. But the curves of the teeth so formed will not be alike. Thus in Fig. 38 are shown three teeth, all struck with the same size of generating circle, d being for a wheel of 12 teeth, e for a wheel of 50 teeth, and f a tooth of a rack; teeth e, f, being made wider so as to let the curves show clearly on each side, it being obvious that since the curves are due to the relative sizes of the pitch and generating circles they are equally applicable to any pitch or thickness of teeth on wheels having the same diameters of pitch circle.

Fig. 39

Fig. 39.

Fig. 40

Fig. 40.

In determining the diameter of a generating circle for a set or[I-16] train of wheels, we have the consideration that the smaller the diameter of the generating circle in proportion to that of the pitch circle the more the teeth are spread at the roots, and this creates a pressure tending to thrust the wheels apart, thus causing the axle journals to wear. In Fig. 39, for example, a a is the line of centres, and the contact of the curves at b c would cause a thrust in the direction of the arrows d, e. This thrust would exist throughout the whole path of contact save at the point f, on the line of centres. This thrust is reduced in proportion as the diameter of the generating circle is increased; thus in Fig. 40, is represented a pair of pinions of 12 teeth and 3 inch pitch, and c being the driver, there is contact at e, and at g, and e being a radial line, there is obviously a minimum of thrust.

What is known as the Willis system for interchangeable gearing, consists of using for every pitch of the teeth a generating circle whose diameter is equal to the radius of a pinion having 12 teeth, hence the pinion will in each pitch have radial flanks, and the roots of the teeth will be more spread as the number of teeth in the wheel is increased. Twelve teeth is the least number that it is considered practicable to use; hence it is obvious that under this system all wheels of the same pitch will work correctly together.

Unless the faces of the teeth and the flanks with which they work are curves produced from the same size of generating circle, the velocity of the teeth will not be uniform. Obviously the revolutions of the wheels will be proportionate to their numbers of teeth; hence in a pair of wheels having an equal number of teeth, the revolutions will per force be equal, but the driver will not impart uniform motion to the driven wheel, but each tooth will during the path of contact move irregularly.

Fig. 41

Fig. 41.

The velocity of a pair of wheels will be uniform at each instant of time, if a line normal to the surfaces of the curves at their point of contact passes through the point of contact of the pitch circles on the line of centres of the wheels. Thus in Fig. 41, the line a a is tangent to the teeth curves where they touch, and d at a right angle to a a, and meets it at the point of the tooth curves, hence it is normal to the point of contact, and as it meets the pitch circles on the line of centres the velocity of the wheels will be uniform.

The amount of rolling motion of the teeth one upon the other while passing through the path of contact, will be a minimum when the tooth curves are correctly formed according to the rules given. But furthermore the sliding motion will be increased in proportion as the diameter of the generating circle is increased, and the number of teeth in contact will be increased because the[I-17] arc, or path, of contact is longer as the generating circle is made larger.

Fig. 42

Fig. 42.

Fig. 43

Fig. 43.

Thus in Fig. 42 is a pair of wheels whose tooth curves are from a generating circle equal to the radius of the wheels, hence the flanks are radial. The teeth are made of unusual depth to keep the lines in the engraving clear. Suppose v to be the driver, w the driven wheel or follower, and the direction of motion as at p, contact upon tooth a will begin at c, and while a is passing to the line of centres the path of contact will pass along the thickened line to x. During this time the whole length of face from c to r will have had contact with the length of flank from c to n, and it follows that the length of face on a that rolled on c n can only equal the length of c n, and that the amount of sliding motion must be represented by the length of r n on a, and the amount of rolling motion by the length n c. Again, during the arc of recess (marked by dots) the length of flank that will have had contact is the depth from s to ls, and over this depth the full length of tooth face on wheel v will have swept, and as l s equals c n, the amount of rolling and of sliding motion during the arc of recess is equal to that during the arc of approach, and the action is in both cases partly a rolling and partly a sliding one. The two wheels are here shown of the same diameter, and therefore contain an equal number of teeth, hence the arcs of approach and of recess are equal in length, which will not be the case when one wheel contains more teeth than the other. Thus in Fig. 43, let a represent a segment of a pinion, and b a segment of a spur-wheel, both segments being blank with their pitch circles, the tooth height and depth being marked by arcs of circles. Let c and d represent the generating circles shown in the two respective positions on the line of centres. Let pinion a be the driver moving in the direction of p, and the arc of approach will be from e to x along the thickened arc, while the arc of recess will be as denoted by the dotted arc from x to f. The distance e x being greater than distance x f, therefore the arc of approach is longer than that of recess.

But suppose b to be the driver and the reverse will be the case, the arc of approach will begin at g and end at x, while the arc of recess will begin at x and end at h, the latter being farther from the line of centres than g is. It will be found also that, one wheel being larger than the other, the amount of sliding and rolling contact is different for the two wheels, and that the flanks of the teeth on the larger wheel b, have contact along a greater portion of their depths than do the flanks of those on the smaller, as is shown by the dotted arc i being farther from the pitch circle than the dotted arc j is, these two dotted arcs representing the paths of the lowest points of flank contact, points f and g, marking the initial lowest contact for the two directions of revolution.

Thus it appears that there is more sliding action upon the teeth of the smaller than upon those of the larger wheel, and this is a condition that will always exist.

Fig. 44

Fig. 44.

In Fig. 44 is represented portion of a pair of wheels corresponding to those shown in Fig. 42, except that in this case the diameter of the generating circle is reduced to one quarter that of the pitch diameter of the wheels. v is the driver in the direction[I-18] the teeth of v that will have contact is c n, which, the wheels, being of equal diameter, will remain the same whichever wheel be the driver, and in whatever direction motion occurs. The amount of rolling motion is, therefore, c n, and that of sliding is the difference between the distance c n and the length of the tooth face.

If now we examine the distance c n in Fig. 42, we find that reducing the diameter of generating circle in Fig. 44 has increased the depth of flank that has contact, and therefore increased the rolling motion of the tooth face along the flank, and correspondingly diminished the sliding action of the tooth contact. But at the same time we have diminished the number of teeth in contact. Thus in Fig. 42 there are three teeth in driving contact, while in Fig. 44 there are but two, viz., d and e.

Fig. 45

Fig. 45.

Fig. 46

Fig. 46.

In an article by Professor Robinson, attention is called to the fact that if the teeth of wheels are not formed to have correct curves when new, they cannot be improved by wear; and this will be clearly perceived from the preceding remarks upon the amount of rolling and sliding contact. It will also readily appear that the nearer the diameter of the generating to that of the base circle the more the teeth wear out of correct shape; hence, in a train of gearing in which the generating circle equals the radius of the pinion, the pinion will wear out of shape the quickest, and the largest wheel the least; because not only does each tooth on the pinion more frequently come into action on account of its increased revolutions, but furthermore the length of flank that has contact is less, while the amount of sliding action is greater. In Fig. 45, for example, are a wheel and pinion, the latter having radial flanks and the pinion being the driver, the arc of approach is the thickened arc from c to the line of centres, while the arc of recess is denoted by the dotted arc. As contact on the pinion flank begins at point c and ends at the line of centres, the total depth of flank that suffers wear from the contact is that from c to n; and as the whole length of the wheel tooth face sweeps over this depth c n, the pinion flanks must wear faster than the wheel faces, and the pinion flanks will wear underneath, as denoted by the dotted curve on the flanks of tooth w. In the case of the wheel, contact on its tooth flanks begins at the line of centres and ends at l, hence that flank can only wear between point l and the pitch line l; and as the whole length of pinion face sweeps on this short length l s, the pinion flank will wear most, the wear being in the direction of the dotted arc on the left-hand side v of the tooth. Now the pinion flank depth c n, being less than the wheel flank depth s l, and the same length of tooth face sweeping (during the path of contact) over both, obviously the pinion tooth will wear the most, while both will, as the wear proceeds, lose their proper flank curve. In Fig. 46 the generating arcs, g and g′, and the wheel are the same, but the pinion is larger. As a result the acting length c n, of pinion flank is increased, as is also the acting length s l, of wheel flank; hence, the flanks of both wheels would wear better, and also better preserve their correct and original shapes.

Fig. 47

Fig. 47.

Fig. 48

Fig. 48.

Fig. 49

Fig. 49.

It has been shown, when referring to Figs. 42 and 44, when treating of the amount of sliding and of rolling motion, that the smaller the diameter of rolling circle in proportion to that of pitch circle, the longer the acting length of flank and the more the amount of rolling motion; and it follows that the teeth would also preserve their original and true shape better. But the wear of the teeth, and the alteration of tooth form by reason of that wear, will, in any event, be greater upon the pinion than upon the[I-19] wheel, and can only be equal when the two wheels are of equal diameter, in which case the tooth curves will be alike on both wheels, and the acting depths of flank will be equal, as shown in Fig. 47, the flanks being radial, and the acting depths of flank being shown at j k. In Fig. 48 is shown a pair of wheels with a generating circle, g and g′, of one quarter the diameter of the base circle or pitch diameter, and the acting length of flank is shown at l m. The wear of the teeth would, therefore, in this latter case, cause it in time to assume the form shown in Fig. 49. But it is to be noted that while the acting depth of flank has been increased the arcs of contact have been diminished, and that in Fig. 47 there are two teeth in contact, while in Fig. 48 there is but one, hence the pressure upon each tooth is less in proportion as the diameter of the generating circle is increased. If a train of wheels are to be constructed, or if the wheels are to be capable of interchanging with other combinations of wheels of the same pitch, the diameter of the generating circle must be equal to the smallest wheel or pinion, which is, under the Willis system, a pinion of 12 teeth; under the Pratt and Whitney, and Brown and Sharpe systems, a pinion of 15 teeth.

But if a pair or a particular train of gears are to be constructed, then a diameter of generating circle may be selected that is considered most suitable to the particular conditions; as, for example, it may be equal to the radius of the smallest wheel giving it radial flanks, or less than that radius giving parallel or spread flanks. But in any event, in order to transmit continuous motion, the diameter of generating circle must be such as to give arcs of action that are equal to the pitch, so that each pair of teeth will come into action before the preceding pair have gone out of action.

It may now be pointed out that the degrees of angle that the teeth move through always exceeds the number of degrees of angle contained in the paths of contact, or, in other words, exceeds the degrees contained in the arcs of approach and recess combined.

Fig. 50

Fig. 50.

In Fig. 50, for example, are a wheel a and pinion b, the teeth on the wheel being extended to a point. Suppose that the wheel a is the driver, and contact will begin between the two teeth d and f on the dotted arc. Now suppose tooth d to have moved to position c, and f will have been moved to position h. The degrees of angle the pinion has been moved through are therefore denoted by i, whereas the degrees of angle the arcs of contact contain are therefore denoted by j.

The degrees of angle that the wheel a has moved through are obviously denoted by e, because the point of tooth d has during the arcs of contact moved from position d to position c. The degrees of angle contained in its path of contact are denoted by k, and are less than e, hence, in the case of teeth terminating in a point as tooth d, the excess of angle of action over path of contact is as many degrees as are contained in one-half the thickness[I-20] of the tooth, while when the points of the teeth are cut off, the excess is the number of degrees contained in the distance between the corner and the side of the tooth as marked on a tooth at p.

With a given diameter of pitch circle and pitch diameter of wheel, the length of the arc of contact will be influenced by the height of the addendum from the pitch circle, because, as has been shown, the arcs of approach and of recess, respectively, begin and end on the addendum circle.

If the height of the addendum on the follower be reduced, the arc of approach will be reduced, while the arc of recess will not be altered; and if the follower have no addendum, contact between the teeth will occur on the arc of recess only, which gives a smoother motion, because the action of the driver is that of dragging rather than that of pushing the follower. In this case, however, the arc of recess must, to produce continuous motion, be at least equal to the pitch.

It is obvious, however, that the follower having no addendum would, if acting as a driver to a third wheel, as in a train of wheels, act on its follower, or the fourth wheel of the train, on the arc of approach only; hence it follows that the addendum might be reduced to diminish, or dispensed with to eliminate action, on the arc of approach in the follower of a pair of wheels only, and not in the case of a train of wheels.

To make this clear to the reader it may be necessary to refer again to Fig. 33 or 34, from which it will be seen that the action of the teeth of the driver on the follower during the arc of approach is produced by the flanks of the driver on the faces of the follower. But if there are no such faces there can be no such contact.

On the arc of recess, however, the faces of the driver act on the flanks of the follower, hence the absence of faces on the follower is of no import.

From these considerations it also appears that by giving to the driver an increase of addendum the arc of recess may be increased without affecting the arc of approach. But the height of addendum in machinists’ practice is made a constant proportion of the pitch, so that the wheel may be used indiscriminately, as circumstances may require, as either a driver or a follower, the arcs of approach and of recess being equal. The height of addendum, however, is an element in determining the number of teeth in contact, and upon small pinions this is of importance.

Fig. 51

Fig. 51.

In Fig. 51, for example, is shown a section of two pinions of equal diameters, and it will be observed that if the full line a determined the height of the addendum there would be contact either at c or b only (according to the direction in which the motion took place).

With the addendum extended to the dotted circle, contact would be just avoided, while with the addendum extended to d there would be contact either at e or at f, according to which direction the wheel had motion.

This, by dividing the strain over two teeth instead of placing it all upon one tooth, not only doubles the strength for driving capacity, but decreases the wear by giving more area of bearing surface at each instant of time, although not increasing that area in proportion to the number of teeth contained in the wheel.

In wheels of larger diameter, short teeth are more permissible, because there are more teeth in contact, the number increasing with the diameters of the wheels. It is to be observed, however, that from having radial flanks, the smallest wheel is always the weakest, and that from making the most revolutions in a given[I-21] time, it suffers the most from wear, and hence requires the greatest attainable number of teeth in constant contact at each period of time, as well as the largest possible area of bearing or wearing surface on the teeth.

It is true that increasing the “depth of tooth to pitch line” increases the whole length of tooth, and, therefore, weakens it; but this is far more than compensated for by distributing the strain over a greater number of teeth. This is in practice accomplished, when circumstances will permit, by making the pitch finer, giving to a wheel, of a given diameter, a greater number of teeth.

Fig. 52

Fig. 52.

Fig. 53

Fig. 53.

When the wheels are required to transmit motion rather than power (as in the case of clock wheels), to move as frictionless as possible, and to place a minimum of thrust on the journals of the shafts of the wheels, the generating circle may be made nearly as large as the diameter of the pitch circle, producing teeth of the form shown in Fig. 52. But the minimum of friction is attained when the two flanks for the tooth are drawn into one common hypocycloid, as in Fig. 53. The difference between the form of tooth shown in Fig. 52 and that shown in Fig. 53, is merely due to an increase in the diameter of the generating circle for the latter. It will be observed that in these forms the acting length of flank diminishes in proportion as the diameter of the generating circle is increased, the ultimate diameter of generating circle being as large as the pitch circles.

Fig. 54

Fig. 54.

[1]This form is undesirable in that there is contact on one side only (on the arc of approach) of the line of centres, but the flanks of the teeth may be so modified as to give contact on the arc of recess also, by forming the flanks as shown in Fig. 54, the flanks, or rather the parts within the pitch circles, being nearly half circles, and the parts without with peculiarly formed faces, as shown in the figure. The pitch circles must still be regarded as the rolling circles rolling upon each other. Suppose b a tracing point on b, then as b rolls on a it will describe the epicycloid a b. A parallel line c d will work at a constant distance as at c d from a b, and this distance may be the radius of that part of d that is within the pitch line, the same process being applied to the teeth on both wheels. Each tooth is thus composed of a spur based upon a half cylinder.

[1] From an article by Professor Robinson.

Comparing Figs. 53 and 54, we see that the bases in 53 are flattest, and that the contact of faces upon them must range nearer the pitch line than in 54. Hence, 53 presents a more favorable obliquity of the line of direction of the pressures of tooth upon tooth. In seeking a still more favorable direction by going outside for the point of contact, we see by simply recalling the method of generating the tooth curves, that tooth contacts outside the pitch lines have no possible existence; and hence, Fig. 53 may be regarded as representing that form of toothed gear which will operate with less friction than any other known form.

This statement is intended to cover fixed teeth only, and not that complicated form of the trundle wheel in which the cylinder teeth are friction rollers. No doubt such would run still easier, even with their necessary one-sided contacts. Also, the statement is supposed to be confined to such forms of teeth as have good practical contacts at and near the line of centres.

Fig. 55

Fig. 55.

Bevel-gear wheels are employed to transmit motion from one shaft to another when the axis of one is at an angle to that of the other. Thus in Fig. 55 is shown a pair of bevel-wheels to transmit motion from shafts at a right angle. In bevel-wheels all the lines of the teeth, both at the tops or points of the teeth, at the bottoms of the spaces, and on the sides of the teeth, radiate from the centre e, where the axes of the two shafts would meet if produced. Hence the depth, thickness, and height of the tooth decreases as[I-22] the point e is approached from the diameter of the wheel, which is always measured on the pitch circle at the largest end of the cone, or in other words, at the largest pitch diameter.

The principles governing the practical construction of the curves for the teeth of the bevel-wheels may be explained as follows:—

Fig. 56

Fig. 56.

In Fig. 56 let f and g represent two shafts, rotating about their respective axes; and having cones whose greatest diameters are at a and b, and whose points are at e. The diameter a being equal to that of b their circumferences will be equal, and the angular and velocity ratios will therefore be equal.

Fig. 57

Fig. 57.

Let c and d represent two circles about the respective cones, being equidistant from e, and therefore of equal diameters and circumferences, and it is obvious that at every point in the length of each cone the velocity will be equal to a point upon the other so long as both points are equidistant from the points of intersection of the axes of the two shafts; hence if one cone drive the other by frictional contact of surfaces, both shafts will be rotated at an equal speed of rotation, or if one cone be fixed and the other moved around it, the contact of the surfaces will be a rolling contact throughout. The line of contact between the two cones will be a straight line, radiating at all times from the point e. If such, however, is not the case, then the contact will no longer be a rolling one. Thus, in Fig. 57 the diameters or circumferences at a and b being equal, the surfaces would roll upon each other, but on account of the line of contact not radiating from e (which is the common centre of motion for the two shafts) the circumference c is less than that of d, rendering a rolling contact impossible.

Fig. 58

Fig. 58.

We have supposed that the diameters of the cones be equal, but the conditions will remain the same when their diameters are unequal; thus, in Fig. 58 the circumference of a is twice that of b, hence the latter will make two rotations to one of the former, and the contact will still be a rolling one. Similarly the circumference of d is one half that of c, hence d will also make two rotations to one of c, and the contact will also be a rolling one; a condition which will always exist independent of the diameters of the wheels so long as the angles of the faces, or wheels, or (what is the same thing, the line of contact between the two,) radiates from the point e, which is located where the axes of the shafts would meet.

Fig. 59

Fig. 59.

The principles governing the forms of the cones on which the teeth are to be located thus being explained, we may now consider the curves of the teeth. Suppose that in Fig. 59 the cone a is fixed, and that the cone whose axis is f be rotated upon it in the direction of the arrow. Then let a point be fixed in any part of the circumference of b (say at d), and it is evident that the path of this point will be as b rolls around the axis f, and at the same time around a from the centre of motion, e. The curve so generated or described by the point d will be a spherical epicycloid. In this case the exterior of one cone has rolled upon the coned surface of the other; but suppose it rolls upon the interior, as around the walls of a conical recess in a solid body; then a point in its circumference would describe a curve known as the spherical hypocycloid; both curves agreeing (except in their spherical property) to the epicycloid and hypocycloid of the spur-wheel. But this spherical property renders it very difficult indeed to practically delineate or mark the curves by rolling contact, and on account of this difficulty Tredgold devised a method of construction whereby the curves may be produced sufficiently accurate for all practical purposes, as follows:—

Fig. 60

Fig. 60.

In Fig. 60 let a a represent the axis of one shaft, and b the axis of the other, the axes of the two meeting at w. Mark e,[I-23] representing the diameter of one wheel, and f that of the other (both lines representing the pitch circles of the respective wheels). Draw the line g g passing through the point w, and the point t, where the pitch circles e, f meet, and g g will be the line of contact between the cones. From w as a centre, draw on each side of g g dotted lines as p, representing the height of the teeth above and below the pitch line g g. At a right angle to g g mark the line j k, and from the junction of this line with axis b (as at q) as a centre, mark the arc a, which will represent the pitch circle for the large diameter of pinion d; mark also the arc b for the addendum and c for the roots of the teeth, so that from b to c will represent the height of the tooth at that end.

Similarly from p, as a centre, mark (for the large diameter of wheel c,) the pitch circle g, root circle h, and addendum i. On these arcs mark the curves in the same manner as for spur-wheels. To obtain these arcs for the small diameters of the wheels, draw m m parallel to j k. Set the compasses to the radius r l, and from p, as a centre, draw the pitch circle k. To obtain the depth for the tooth, draw the dotted line p, meeting the circle h, and the point w. A similar line from circle i to w will show the height of the addendum, or extreme diameter; and mark the tooth curves on k, l, m, in the same manner as for a spur-wheel.

Similarly for the pitch circle of the small end of the pinion teeth, set the compasses to the radius s l, and from q as a centre, mark the pitch circle d, outside of d mark e for the height of the addendum and inside of d mark f for the roots of the teeth at that end. The distance between the dotted lines (as p) represents the full height of the teeth, hence h meets line p, being the root of tooth for the large wheel, and to give clearance, the point of the pinion teeth is marked below, thus arc b does not meet h or p. Having obtained these arcs the curves are rolled as for a spur-wheel.

A tooth thus marked out is shown at x, and from its curves between b c, a template for the large diameter of the pinion tooth may be made, while from the tooth curves between the arcs e f, a template for the smallest tooth diameter of the pinion can be made.

Similarly for the wheel c the outer end curves are marked on the lines g, h, i, and those for the inner end on the lines k, l, m.

Fig. 61

Fig. 61.

Fig. 62

Fig. 62.

Fig. 63

Fig. 63.

Fig. 64

Fig. 64.

Internal or annular gear-wheels have their tooth curves formed by rolling the generating circle upon the pitch circle or base circle, upon the same general principle as external or spur-wheels. But the tooth of the annular wheel corresponds with the space in the spur-wheel, as is shown in Fig. 61, in which curve a forms the flank of a tooth on a spur-wheel p, and the face of a tooth on the annular wheel w. It is obvious then that the generating circle is rolled within the pitch circle for the face of the wheel and without for its flank, or the reverse of the process for spur-wheels. But in the case of internal or annular wheels the path of contact of tooth upon tooth with a pinion having a given number of teeth increases in proportion as the number of teeth in the wheel is diminished, which is also the reverse of what occurs in spur-wheels; as will readily be perceived when it is considered that if in an internal wheel the pinion have as many teeth as the wheel the contact would exist around the whole pitch circles of the wheel and pinion and the two would rotate together without any motion of tooth upon tooth. Obviously then we have, in the case of internal wheels, a consideration as to what is the greatest number (as well as what is the least number) of teeth a pinion may contain to work with a given wheel, whereas in spur-wheels the reverse is again the case, the consideration being how few teeth the wheel may contain to work with a given pinion. Now it is found that although the curves of the teeth in internal wheels and pinions may be rolled according to the principles already laid down for spur-wheels, yet cases may arise in which internal gears will not work under conditions in which spur-wheels would work, because the internal wheels will not engage together. Thus, in Fig. 62, is a pinion of 12 teeth and a wheel of 22 teeth, a generating circle having a diameter equal to the radius of the pinion having been used for all the tooth curves of both wheel and pinion. It will be observed that teeth a, b, and c clearly overlap teeth d, e, and f, and would therefore prevent the wheels from engaging to the requisite depth. This may of course be remedied by taking the faces off the pinion, as in Fig. 63, and thus confining the arc of contact to an arc of recess if the pinion drives, or an arc of approach if the wheel drives; or the number of teeth in the pinion may be reduced, or that in the wheel increased; either of which may be carried out to a degree sufficient to enable the teeth to engage and not interfere one with the other. In Fig. 64 the number of teeth in the pinion p is reduced from 12 to 6, the wheel w having 22 as before, and it will be observed that the teeth engage and properly clear each other.

By the introduction into the figure of a segment of a spur-wheel[I-24] also having 22 teeth and placed on the other side of the pinion, it is shown that the path of contact is greater, and therefore the angle of action is greater, in internal than in spur gearing. Thus suppose the pinion to drive in the direction of the arrows and the thickened arcs a b will be the arcs of approach, a measuring longer than b. The dotted arcs c d represent the arcs of receding contact and c is found longer than d, the angles of action being 66° for the spur-wheels and 72° for the annular wheel.

On referring again to Fig. 62 it will be observed that it is the faces of the teeth on the two wheels that interfere and will prevent them from engaging, hence it will readily occur to the mind that it is possible to form the curves of the pinion faces correct to work with the faces of the wheel teeth as well as with the flanks; or it is possible to form the wheel faces with curves that will work correctly with the faces, as well as with the flanks of the pinion teeth, which will therefore increase the angle of action, and Professor McCord has shown in an article in the London Engineering how to accomplish this in a simple and yet exceedingly ingenious manner which may be described as follows:—

It is required to find a describing circle that will roll the curves for the flanks of the pinion and the faces of the wheels, and also a describing circle for the flanks of the wheel and the faces of the pinion; the curve for the wheel faces to work correctly with the faces as well as with the flanks of the pinion, and the curve for the pinion faces to work correctly with both the flanks and faces of the internal wheel.

Fig. 65

Fig. 65.

Fig. 66

Fig. 66.

In Fig. 65 let p represent the pitch circle of an annular or internal wheel whose centre is at a, and q the pitch circle of a pinion whose centre is at b, and let r be a describing circle whose centre is at c, and which is to be used to roll all the curves for the teeth. For the flanks of the annular wheel we may roll r within p, while for the faces of the wheel we may roll r outside of p, but in the case of the pinion we cannot roll r within q, because r is larger than q, hence we must find some other rolling circle of less diameter than r, and that can be used in its stead (the radius of r always being greater than the radius of the axis of the wheel and pinion for reasons that will appear presently). Suppose then that in Fig. 66 we have a ring whose bore r corresponds in diameter to the intermediate describing circle r, Fig. 65 and that q represents the pinion. Then we may roll r around and in contact with the pinion q, and a tracing point in r will trace the curve m n o, giving a curve a portion of which may be used for the faces of the pinion. But suppose that instead of rolling the intermediate describing circle r around p, we roll the circle t around p, and it will trace precisely the same curve m n o; hence for the faces of the pinion we have found a rolling circle t which is a perfect substitute for the intermediate circle q, and which it will always be, no matter what the diameters of the pinion and of the intermediate describing circle may be, providing that the diameter of t is equal to the difference between the diameters of the pinion and that of the intermediate describing[I-25] circle as in the figure. If now we use this describing circle to roll the flanks of the annular wheel as well as the faces of the pinion, these faces and flanks will obviously work correctly together. Since this describing circle is rolled on the outside of the pinion and on the outside of the annular wheel we may distinguish it as the exterior describing circle.

Fig. 67

Fig. 67.

Now instead of rolling the intermediate describing circle r within the annular wheel p for the face curves of the teeth upon p, we may find some other circle that will give the same curve and be small enough to be rolled within the pinion q for its teeth flanks. Thus in Fig. 67 p represents the pitch circle of the annular wheel and r the intermediate circle, and if r be rolled within p, a point on the circumference of r will trace the curve v w. But if we take the circle s, having a diameter equal to the difference between the diameter of r and that of p, and roll it within p, a point in its circumference will trace the same curve v w; hence s is a perfect substitute for r, and a portion of the curve v w may be used for the faces of the teeth on the annular wheel. The circle s being used for the pinion flanks, the wheel faces and pinion flanks will work correctly together, and as the circle s is rolled within the pinion for its flanks and within the wheel for its faces, it may be distinguished as the interior describing circle.

To prove the correctness of the construction it may be noted that with the particular diameter of intermediate describing circle used in Fig. 65, the interior and exterior describing circles are of equal diameters; hence, as the same diameter of describing circle is used for all the faces and flanks of the pair of wheels they will obviously work correctly together, in accordance with the rules laid down for spur gearing. The radius of s in Fig. 69 is equal to the radius of the annular wheel, less the radius of the intermediate circle, or the radius from a to c. The radius of the exterior describing circle t is the radius of the intermediate circle less the radius of the pinion, or radius c b in the figure.

Fig. 68

Fig. 68.

Now the diameter of the intermediate circle may be determined at will, but cannot exceed that of the annular wheel or be less than the pinion. But having been selected between these two limits the interior and exterior describing circles derived from it give teeth that not only engage properly and avoid the interference shown in Fig. 62, but that will also have an additional arc of action during the recess, as is shown in Fig. 68, which represents the wheel and pinion shown in Fig. 62, but produced by means of the interior and exterior describing circles. Supposing the pinion to be the driver the arc of approach will be along the thickened arc of the interior describing circle, while during the arc of recess there will be an arc of contact along the dotted portion of the exterior describing circle as in ordinary gearing. But in addition there will be an arc of recess along the dotted portion of the intermediate circle r, which arc is due to the faces of the pinion acting upon the faces as well as upon the flanks of the wheel teeth. It is obvious from this that as soon as a tooth passes the line of centres it will, during a certain period, have two points of contact, one on the arc of the exterior describing circle, and another along the arc of r, this period continuing until the addendum circle of the pinion crosses the dotted arc of the exterior describing circle at z.

Fig. 69

Fig. 69.

The diameters of the interior and exterior describing circles obviously depend upon the diameter of the intermediate circle, and as this may, as already stated, be selected, within certain limits, at will, it is evident that the relative diameters of the[I-26] interior and exterior describing circles will vary in proportion, the interior becoming smaller and the exterior larger, while from the very mode of construction the radius of the two will equal that of the axes of the wheel and pinion. Thus in Fig. 69 the radii of s, t, equal a b, or the line of centres, and their diameters, therefore, equal the radius of the annular wheel, as is shown by dotting them in at the upper half of the figure. But after their diameters have been determined by this construction either of them may be decreased in diameter and the teeth of the wheels will clear (and not interfere as in Fig. 62), but the action will be the same as in ordinary gear, or in other words there will be no arc of action on the circle r. But s cannot be increased without correspondingly decreasing t, nor can t be increased without correspondingly decreasing s.

Fig. 70

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70 shows the same pair of gears as in Fig. 68 (the wheel having 22 and the pinion 12 teeth), the diameter of the intermediate circle having been enlarged to decrease the diameter of s and increase that of t, and as these are left of the diameter derived from the construction there is receding action along r from the line of centres to t.

Fig. 71

Fig. 71.

In Fig. 71 are represented a wheel and pinion, the pinion having but four teeth less than the wheel, and a tooth, j, being shown in position in which it has contact at two places. Thus at k it is in contact with the flank of a tooth on the annular wheel, while at l it is in contact with the face of the same tooth.

As the faces of the teeth on the wheel do not have contact higher than point t, it is obvious that instead of having them 310 of the pitch as at the bottom of the figure, we may cut off the portion x without diminishing the arc of contact, leaving them formed as at the top of the figure. These faces being thus reduced in height we may correspondingly reduce the depth of flank on the pinion by filling in the portion g, leaving the teeth formed as at the top of the pinion. The teeth faces of the wheel being thus reduced we may, by using a sufficiently large intermediate circle, obtain interior and exterior describing circles that will form teeth that will permit of the pinion having but one tooth less than the wheel, or that will form a wheel having but one tooth more than the pinion.

Fig. 72

Fig. 72.

The limits to the diameter of the intermediate describing circle are as follows: in Fig. 72 it is made equal in diameter to the pitch diameter of the pinion, hence b will represent the centre of the intermediate circle as well as of the pinion, and the pitch circle of the pinion will also represent the intermediate circle r. To obtain the radius for the interior describing circle we subtract the radius of the intermediate circle from the radius of the annular wheel, which gives a p, hence the pitch circle of the pinion also represents the interior circle r. But when we come to obtain the radius for the exterior describing circle (t), by subtracting[I-27] the radius of the pinion from that of the intermediate circle, we find that the two being equal give o for the radius of (t), hence there could be no flanks on the pinion.

Now suppose that the intermediate circle be made equal in diameter to the pitch circle of the annular wheel, and we may obtain the radius for the exterior describing circle t; by subtracting the radius of the pinion from that of the intermediate circle, we shall obtain the radius a b; hence the radius of (t) will equal that of the pinion. But when we come to obtain the radius for the interior describing circle by subtracting the radius of the intermediate circle from that of the annular wheel, we find these two to be equal, hence there would be no interior describing circle, and, therefore, no faces to the pinion.

Fig. 73

Fig. 73.

The action of the teeth in internal wheels is less a sliding and more a rolling one than that in any other form of toothed gearing. This may be shown as follows: In Fig. 73 let a a represent the pitch circle of an external pinion, and b b that of an internal one, and p p the pitch circle of an external wheel for a a or an internal one for b b, the point of contact at the line of centres being at c, and the direction of rotation p p being as denoted by the arrow; the two pinions being driven, we suppose a point at c, on the pitch circle p p, to be coincident with a point on each of the two pinions at the line of centres. If p p be rotated so as to bring this point to the position denoted by d, the point on the external pinion having moved to e, while that on the internal pinion has moved to f, both having moved through an arc equal to c d, then the distance from e to d being greater than from d to f, more sliding motion must have accompanied the contact of the teeth at the point e than at the point f; and the difference in the length of the arc e d and that of f d, may be taken to represent the excess of sliding action for the teeth on e; for whatever, under any given condition, the amount of sliding contact may be, it will be in the proportion of the length of e d to that of f d. Presuming, then, that the amount of power transmitted be equal for the two pinions, and the friction of all other things being equal—being in proportion to the space passed (or in this case slid) over—it is obvious that the internal pinion has the least friction.


[I-28]

Chapter II.—THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS.—CAMS.

Wheel and Tangent Screw or Worm and Worm Gear.

In Fig. 74 are shown a worm and worm gear partly in section on the line of centres. The worm or tangent screw w is simply one long tooth wound around a cylinder, and its form may be determined by the rules laid down for a rack and pinion, the tangent screw or worm being considered as a rack and the wheel as an ordinary spur-wheel.

Fig. 74

Fig. 74.

Worm gearing is employed for transmitting motion at a right angle, while greatly reducing the motion. Thus one rotation of the screw will rotate the wheel to the amount of the pitch of its teeth only. Worm gearing possesses the qualification that, unless of very coarse pitch, the worm locks the wheel in any position in which the two may come to a state of rest, while at the same time the excess of movement of the worm over that of the wheel enables the movement of the latter, through a very minute portion of a revolution. And it is evident that, when the plane of rotation of the worm is at a right angle to that of the wheel, the contact of the teeth is wholly a sliding one. The wear of the worm is greater than that of the wheel, because its teeth are in continuous contact, whereas the wheel teeth are in contact only when passing through the angle of action. It may be noted, however, that each tooth upon the worm is longer than the teeth on the wheel in proportion as the circumference of the worm is to the length of wheel tooth.

Fig. 75

Fig. 75.

If the teeth of the wheel are straight and are set at an angle equal to the angle of the worm thread to its axis, as in Fig. 75, p p representing the pitch line of the worm, c d the line of centres, and d the worm axis, the contact of tooth upon tooth will be at the centre only of the sides of the wheel teeth. It is generally preferred, however, to have the wheel teeth curved to envelop a part of the circumference of the worm, and thus increase the line of contact of tooth upon tooth, and thereby provide more ample wearing surface.

Fig. 76

Fig. 76.

In this case the form of the teeth upon the worm wheel varies at every point in its length as the line of centres is departed from. Thus in Fig. 76 is shown an end view of a worm and a worm gear in section, c d being the line of centres, and it will be readily perceived that the shape of the teeth if taken on the line e f, will differ from that on the line of centres c d; hence the form of the wheel teeth must, if contact is to occur along the full length of the tooth, be conformed to fit to the worm, which may be done by taking a series of section of the worm thread at varying distances from, and parallel to, the line of centres and joining the wheel teeth to the shape so obtained. But if the teeth of the wheel are to be cut to shape, then obviously a worm may be provided with teeth (by serrating it along its length) and mounted in position upon the wheel so as to cut the teeth of the wheel to shape as the worm rotates. The pitch line of the wheel teeth, whether they be straight and are disposed at an angle as in Fig. 75, or curved as in Fig. 76, is at a right angle to the line of centres c d, or in other words in the plane of g h, in Fig. 76. This is evident because the pitch line must be parallel to the wheel axis, being at an equal radius from that axis, and therefore having an equal velocity of rotation at every point in the length of the pitch line of the wheel tooth.

Fig. 77

Fig. 77.

If we multiply the number of teeth by their pitch to obtain the circumference of the pitch circle we shall obtain the circumference due to the radius of g h, from the wheel axis, and so long as g h is parallel to the wheel axis we shall by this means obtain the same diameter of pitch circle, so long as we measure it on a line parallel to the line of centres c d. The pitch of the worm is the same at whatever point in the tooth depth it may be measured, because the teeth curves are parallel one to the other, thus in Fig. 77 the pitch measures are equal at m, n, or o.

Fig. 78

Fig. 78.

But the action of the worm and wheel will nevertheless not be correct unless the pitch line from which the curves were rolled coincides with the pitch line of the wheel on the line of centres, for although, if the pitch lines do not so coincide, the worm will at each revolution move the pitch line of the wheel through a distance equal to the pitch of the worm, yet the motion of the wheel will not[I-29] be uniform because, supposing the two pitch lines not to meet, the faces of the pinion teeth will act against those of the wheel, as shown in Fig. 78, instead of against their flanks, and as the faces are not formed to work correctly together the motion will be irregular.

The diameter of the worm is usually made equal to four times the pitch of the teeth, and if the teeth are curved as in figure 76 they are made to envelop not more than 30° of the worm.

The number of teeth in the wheel should not be less than thirty, a double worm being employed when a quicker ratio of wheel to worm motion is required.

Fig. 79

Fig. 79.

When the teeth of the wheel are curved to partly envelop the worm circumference it has been found, from experiments made by Robert Briggs, that the worm and the wheel will be more durable, and will work with greatly diminished friction, if the pitch line of the worm be located to increase the length of face and diminish that of the flank, which will decrease the length of face and increase the length of flank on the wheel, as is shown in Fig. 79; the location for the pitch line of the worm being determined as follows:—

Fig. 80

Fig. 80.

The full radius of the worm is made equal to twice the pitch of its teeth, and the total depth of its teeth is made equal to .65 of its pitch. The pitch line is then drawn at a radius of 1.606 of the pitch from the worm axis. The pitch line is thus determined in Fig. 76, with the result that the area of tooth face and of worm surface is equalized on the two sides of the pitch line in the figure. In addition to this, however, it may be observed that by thus locating the pitch line the arcs both of approach and of recess are altered. Thus in Fig. 80 is represented the same worm and wheel as in Fig. 79, but the pitch lines are here laid down as in ordinary gearing. In the two figures the arcs of approach are marked by the thickened part of the generating circle, while the arcs of recess are denoted by the dotted arc on the generating circle, and it is shown that increasing the worm face, as in Fig. 79, increases the arc of recess, while diminishing the worm flank diminishes the arc of approach, and the action of the worm is smoother because the worm exerts more pulling than pushing action, it being noted that the action of the worm on the wheel is a pushing one before reaching, and a pulling one after passing, the line of centres.

Fig. 81

Fig. 81.

It may here be shown that a worm-wheel may be made to work correctly with a square thread. Suppose, for example, that the diameter of the generating circle be supposed to be infinite, and the sides of the thread may be accepted as rolled by the circle. On the wheel we roll a straight line, which gives a cycloidal curve suitable to work with the square thread. But the action will be confined to the points of the teeth, as is shown in Fig. 81, and also to the arc of approach. This is the same thing as taking the faces off the worm and filling in the flanks of the wheel. Obviously, then, we may reverse the process and give the worm faces only, and the wheel, flanks only, using such size of generating circle as will make the spaces of the wheel parallel in their depths and rolling the same generating circle upon the pitch line of the worm to obtain its face curve. This would enable the teeth on the wheel to be cut by a square-threaded tap, and would confine the contact of tooth upon tooth to the recess.

The diameter of generating circle used to roll the curves for a worm and worm-wheel should in all cases be larger than the radius of the worm-wheel, so that the flanks of the wheel teeth may be at least as thick at the root as they are at the pitch circle.

To find the diameter of a wheel, driven by a tangent-screw, which is required to make one revolution for a given number of turns of the screw, it is obvious, in the first place, that when the[I-30] screw is single-threaded, the number of teeth in the wheel must be equal to the number of turns of the screw. Consequently, the pitch being also given, the radius of the wheel will be found by multiplying the pitch by the number of turns of the screw during one turn of the wheel, and dividing the product by 6.28.

When a wheel pattern is to be made, the first consideration is the determination of the diameter to suit the required speed; the next is the pitch which the teeth ought to have, so that the wheel may be in accordance with the power which it is intended to transmit; the next, the number of the teeth in relation to the pitch and diameter; and, lastly, the proportions of the teeth, the clearance, length, and breadth.

Fig. 82

Fig. 82.

When the amount of power to be transmitted is sufficient to cause excessive wear, or when the velocity is so great as to cause rapid wear, the worm instead of being made parallel in diameter from end to end, is sometimes given a curvature equal to that of the worm-wheel, as is shown in Fig. 82.

Fig. 83

Fig. 83.

The object of this design is to increase the bearing area, and thus, by causing the power transmitted to be spread over a larger area of contact, to diminish the wear. A mechanical means of cutting a worm to the required form for this arrangement is shown in Fig. 83, which is extracted from “Willis’ Principles of Mechanism.” “a is a wheel driven by an endless screw or worm-wheel, b, c is a toothed wheel fixed to the axis of the endless screw b and in gear with another and equal toothed gear d, upon whose axis is mounted the smooth surfaced solid e, which it is desired to cut into Hindley’s[2] endless screw. For this purpose a cutting tooth f is clamped to the face of the wheel a. When the handle attached to the axis of b c is turned round, the wheel a and solid wheel e will revolve with the same relative velocity as a and b, and the tool f will trace upon the surface of the solid e a thread which will correspond to the conditions. For from the very mode of its formation the section of every thread through the axis will point to the centre of the wheel a. The axis of e lies considerably higher than that of b to enable the solid e to clear the wheel a.

[2] The inventor of this form of endless screw.

“The edges of the section of the solid e along its horizontal centre line exactly fit the segment of the toothed wheel, but if a section be made by a plane parallel to this the teeth will no longer be equally divided as they are in the common screw, and therefore this kind of screw can only be in contact with each tooth along a line corresponding to its middle section. So that the advantage of this form over the common one is not so great as appears at first sight.

Fig. 84

Fig. 84.

Fig. 85

Fig. 85.

“If the inclination of the thread of a screw be very great, one or more intermediate threads may be added, as in Fig. 84, in which case the screw is said to be double or triple according to the number of separate spiral threads that are so placed upon its surface. As every one of these will pass its own wheel-tooth across the line of centres in each revolution of the screw, it follows that as many teeth of the wheel will pass that line during one revolution of the screw as there are threads to the screw. If we suppose the number of these threads to be considerable, for example, equal to those of the wheel teeth, then the screw and wheel may be made exactly alike, as in Fig. 85; which may serve as an example of the disguised forms which some common arrangements may assume.”

Fig. 86

Fig. 86.

In Fig. 86 is shown Hawkins’s worm gearing. The object of this ingenious mechanical device is to transmit motion by means of screw or worm gearing, either by a screw in which the threads are of equal diameter throughout its length, or by a spiral worm, in which the threads are not of equal diameter throughout, but increase in diameter each way from the centre of its length, or[I-31] about the centre of its length outwardly. Parallel screws are most applicable to this device when rectilinear motions are produced from circular motions of the driver, and spiral worms are applied when a circular motion is given by the driver, and imparted to the driven wheel. The threads of a spiral worm instead of gearing into teeth like those of an ordinary worm-wheel, actuate a series of rollers turning upon studs, which studs are attached to a wheel whose axis is not parallel to that of the worm, but placed at a suitable inclination thereto. When motion is given to the worm then rotation is produced in the roller wheel at a rate proportionable to the pitch of worm and diameter of wheel respectively.

In the arrangement for transmitting rectilinear motion from a screw, rollers may be employed whose axes are inclined to the axis of the driving screw, or else at right angles to or parallel to the same. When separate rollers are employed with inclined axes, or axes at right angles with that of the main driving screw, each thread in gear touches a roller at one part only; but when the rollers are employed with axes parallel to that of the driving screw a succession of grooves are turned in these rollers, into which the threads of the driving screw will be in gear throughout the entire length of the roller. These grooves may be separate and apart from each other, or else form a screw whose pitch is equal to that of the driving screw or some multiple thereof.

In Fig. 86 the spiral worm is made of such a length that the edge of one roller does not cease contact until the edge of the next comes into contact; a wheel carries four rollers which turn on studs, the latter being secured by cottars; the axis of the worm is at right angles with that of the wheel. The edges of the rollers come near together, leaving sufficient space for the thread of the worm to fit between any two contiguous rollers. The pitch line of the screw thread forms an arc of a circle, whose centre coincides with that of the wheel, therefore the thread will always bear fairly against the rollers and maintain rolling contact therewith during the whole of the time each roller is in gear, and by turning the screw in either direction the wheel will rotate.

Fig. 87

Fig. 87.

To prevent end thrust on a worm shaft it may have a right-hand worm a, and a left-hand one c (Fig. 87), driving two wheels b and d which are in gear, and either of which may transmit the power. The thrust of the two worms a and c, being in opposite directions, one neutralizes the other, and it is obvious that as each revolution of the worm shaft moves both wheels to an amount equal to the pitch of the worms, the two wheels b d may, if desirable, be of different diameters.

Fig. 88

Fig. 88.

Fig. 89

Fig. 89.

Involute teeth.—These are teeth having their whole operative surfaces formed of one continuous involute curve. The diameter of the generating circle being supposed as infinite, then a portion of its circumference may be represented by a straight line, such as a in Fig. 88, and if this straight line be made to roll upon the circumference of a circle, as shown, then the curve traced will be involute p. In practice, a piece of flat spring steel, such as a piece of clock spring, is used for tracing involutes. It may be of any length, but at one end it should be filed so as to leave a scribing point that will come close to the base circle or line, and have a short handle, as shown in Fig. 89, in which s represents the piece of spring, having the point p′, and the handle h. The operation is, to make a template for the base circle, rest this template on drawing paper and mark a circle round its edge to represent on the paper the pitch circle, and to then bend the spring around the circle b, holding the point p′ in contact with the drawing paper, securing the other end of the piece of steel, so that it cannot slip upon b, and allowing the steel to unwind from the cylinder or circle b. The point p′ will mark the involute curve p. Another way to mark an involute is to use a piece of twine in place of the spring and a pencil instead of the tracing point; but this is not so accurate, unless, indeed, a piece of wood be laid on the drawing-board and the pencil held firmly against it, so as to steady the pencil point and prevent the variation in the curve that would arise from variation in the vertical position of the pencil.

The flanks being composed of the same curve as the faces of the teeth, it is obvious that the circle from which the tracing point starts, or around which the straight line rolls, must be of less diameter than the pitch circle, or the teeth would have no flanks.

A circle of less diameter than the pitch circle of the wheel is, therefore, introduced, wherefrom to produce the involute curves forming the full side of the tooth.

Fig. 90

Fig. 90.

The depth below pitch line or the length of flank is, therefore, the distance between the pitch circle and the base circle. Now even supposing a straight line to be a portion of the circumference of a circle of infinite diameter or radius, the conditions would here appear to be imperfect, because the generating circle is not rolled upon the pitch circle but upon a circle of lesser diameter. But it can be shown that the requirements of a proper velocity ratio will be met, notwithstanding the employment of the base instead of the pitch circle. Thus, in Fig. 90, let a and b represent the respective centres of the two pitch circles, marked in dotted lines. Draw the base circle for b as e q, which may be[I-32] of any radius less than that of the pitch circle of b. Draw the straight line q d r touching this base circle at its perimeter and passing through the point of contact on the pitch circles as at d. Draw the circle whose radius is a r forming the base circle for wheel a. Thus the line r p q will meet the perimeters of the two circles while passing through the point of contact d at the line of centres (a condition which the relative diameters of the base circles must always be so proportioned as to attain).

If now we take any point on r q, as p in the figure, as a tracing point, and suppose the radius or distance p q to represent the steel spring shown in Fig. 89, and move the tracing point back to the base circle of b, it will trace the involute e p. Again we may take the tracing point p (supposing the line p r to represent the steel spring), and trace the involute p f, and these two involutes represent each one side of the teeth on the respective wheels.

Fig. 91

Fig. 91.

The line r p q is at a right angle to the curves p e and p f, at their point of contact, and, therefore, fills the conditions referred to in Fig. 41. Now the line r p q denotes the path of contact of tooth upon tooth as the wheels revolve; or, in other words, the point of contact between the side of a tooth on one wheel, and the side of a tooth on the other wheel, will always move along the line q r, or upon a similar line passing through d, but meeting the base circles upon the opposite sides of the line of centres, and since line q r always cuts the line of centres at the point of contact of the pitch circles, the conditions necessary to obtain a correct angular velocity are completely fulfilled. The velocity ratio is, therefore, as the length of b q is to that of a r, or, what is the same thing, as the radius of the base circle of one wheel is to that of the other. It is to be observed that the line q r will vary in its angle to the line of centres a b, according to the diameter of the base circle from which it is struck, and it becomes a consideration as to what is its most desirable angle to produce the least possible amount of thrust tending to separate the wheels, because this thrust (described in Fig. 39) tends to wear the journals and bearings carrying the wheel shafts, and thus to permit the pitch circles to separate. To avoid, as far as possible, this thrust the proportions between the diameters of the base circles d and e, Fig. 91, must be such that the line d e passes through the point of contact on the line of centres, as at c, while the angles of the straight line d e should be as nearly 90° to a radial line, meeting it from the centres of the wheels (as shown in the figure, by the lines b e and d e), as is consistent with the length of d e, which in order to impart continuous motion must at least equal the pitch of the teeth. It is obvious, also, that, to give continuous motion, the length of d e must be more than the pitch in proportion, as the points of the teeth come short of passing through the base circles at d and e, as denoted by the dotted arcs, which should therefore represent the addendum circles. The least possible obliquity, or angle of d e, will be when the construction under any given conditions be made such by trial, that the base circles d and e coincide with the addendum circles on the line of centres, and thus, with a given depth of both beyond, the pitch circle, or addenda as it is termed, will cause the tooth contacts to extend over the greatest attainable length of line between the limits of the addendum circles, thus giving a maximum number of teeth in contact at any instant of time. These conditions are fulfilled in Fig. 92,[3] the addendum on the small wheel being longer than the depth below pitch line, while the faces of the teeth are the narrowest.

[3] From an article by Prof. Robinson.

In seeking the minimum obliquity or angle of d e in the figure, it is to be observed that the less it is, the nearer the base circle approaches the pitch circle; hence, the shorter the operative length of tooth flank and the greater its wear.

Fig. 92

Fig. 92.

In comparing the merits of involute with those of epicycloidal teeth, the direction of the line of pressure at each point of contact must always be the common perpendicular to the surfaces at the point of contact, and these perpendiculars or normals must pass through the pitch circles on the line of centres, as was shown in Fig. 41, and it follows that a line drawn from c (Fig. 91) to any point of contact, is in the direction of the pressure on the surfaces at that point of contact. In involute teeth, the contact will always be on the line d e (Fig. 92), but in epicycloidal, on the line of the generating circle, when that circle is tangent at the line of centres; hence, the direction of pressure will be a chord of the circle drawn from the pitch circle at the line of centres to the position of contact considered. Comparing involute with radial flanked epicycloidal teeth, let c d a (Fig. 91) represent the rolling circle for the latter, and d c will be the direction of pressure for the contact at d; but for point of contact nearer c, the direction will be much nearer 90°, reaching that angle as the point of contact approaches c. Now, d is the most remote legitimate contact for involute teeth (and considering it so far as epicycloidal struck with a generating circle of infinite diameter), we find that the aggregate directions of the pressures of the teeth upon each other is much nearer perpendicular in epicycloidal, than in involute gearing; hence, the latter exert a greater pressure, tending to force the wheels apart. Hence, the former are, in this respect, preferable.

It is to be observed, however, that in some experiments made by Mr. Hawkins, he states that he found “no tendency to press the wheels apart, which tendency would exist if the angle of the line d e (Fig. 92) deviated more than 20° from the line of centres a b of the two wheels.”

A method commonly employed in practice to strike the curves of involute teeth, is as follows:—

Fig. 93

Fig. 93.

In Fig. 93 let c represent the centre of a wheel, d d the full diameter, p p the pitch circle, and e the circle of the roots of the[I-33] teeth, while r is a radial line. Divide on r, the distance between the pitch circle and the wheel centre, into four equal parts, by 1, 2, 3, &c. From point or division 2, as a centre, describe the semicircle s, cutting the wheel centre and the pitch circle at its junction with r (as at a). From a, with compasses set to the length of one of the parts, as a 3, describe the arc b, cutting s at f, and f will be the centre from which one side of the tooth may be struck; hence from f as a centre, with the compasses set to the radius a b, mark the curve g. From the centre c strike, through f, a circle t t, and the centres wherefrom to strike all the teeth curves will fall on t t. Thus, to strike the other curve of the tooth, mark off from a the thickness of the tooth on the pitch circle p p, producing the point h. From h as a centre (with the same radius as before,) mark on t t the point i, and from i, as a centre, mark the curve j, forming the other side of the tooth.

Fig. 94

Fig. 94.

In Fig. 94 the process is shown carried out for several teeth. On the pitch circle p p, divisions 1, 2, 3, 4, &c., for the thickness of teeth and the width of the spaces are marked. The compasses are set to the radius by the construction shown in Fig. 93, then from a, the point b on t is marked, and from b the curve c is struck.

In like manner, from d, g, j, the centres e, h, k, wherefrom to strike the respective curves, f, i, l, are obtained.

Then from m the point n, on t t, is marked, giving the centre wherefrom to strike the curve at h m, and from o is obtained the point p, on t t, serving as a centre for the curve e o.

Fig. 95

Fig. 95.

A more simple method of finding point f is to make a sheet metal template, c, as in Fig. 95, its edges being at an angle one to the other of 75° and 30′. One of its edges is marked off in quarters of an inch, as 1, 2, 3, 4, &c. Place one of its edges coincident with the line r, its point touching the pitch circle at the side of a tooth, as at a, and the centre for marking the curve on that side of the tooth will be found on the graduated edge at a distance from a equal to one-fourth the length of r.

The result obtained in this process is precisely the same as that by the construction in Fig. 93, as will be plainly seen, because there are marked on Fig. 93 all the circles by which point f was arrived at in Fig. 95; and line 3, which in Fig. 95 gives the centre wherefrom to strike curve o, is coincident with point f, as is shown in Fig. 95. By marking the graduated edge of c in quarter-inch divisions, as 1, 2, 3, &c., then every division will represent the distance from a for the centre for every inch of wheel radius. Suppose, for example, that a wheel has 3 inches radius, then with the scale c set to the radial line r, the centre therefrom to strike the curve o will be at 3; were the radius of the wheel 4 inches, then the scale being set the same as before (one edge coincident with r), the centre for the curve o would be at 4, and arc t would require to meet the edge of c at 4. Having found the radius from the centre of the wheel of point f for one tooth, we may mark circle t, cutting point f, and mark off all the teeth by setting one point of the compasses (set to radius a f) on one side of the tooth and marking on circle t the centre wherefrom to mark the curve (as o), continuing the process all around the wheel and on both sides of the tooth.

This operation of finding the location for the centre wherefrom to strike the tooth curves, must be performed separately for each wheel, because the distance or radius of the tooth curves varies with the radius of each wheel.

Fig. 96

Fig. 96.

In Fig. 96 this template is shown with all the lines necessary to set it, those shown in Fig. 95 to show the identity of its results with those given in Fig. 93 being omitted.

Fig. 97

Fig. 97.

The principles involved in the construction of a rack to work correctly with a wheel or pinion, having involute teeth, are as in Fig. 97, in which the pitch circle is shown by a dotted circle and the base circle by a full line circle. Now the diameter of the base circle has been shown to be arbitrary, but being assumed the radius b q will be determined (since it extends from the centre b to the point of contact of d q, with the base circle); b d is a straight line from the centre b of the pinion to the pitch line of the rack, and (whatever the angle of q d to b d) the sides of the rack teeth must be straight lines inclined to the pitch line of the rack at an angle equal to that of b d q.

Involute teeth possess four great advantages—1st, they are[I-34] thickest at the roots, where they should be to have a maximum of strength, which is of great importance in pinions transmitting much power; 2nd, the action of the teeth will remain practically perfect, even though the wheels are spread apart so that the pitch circles do not meet on the line of centres; 3rd, they are much easier to mark, and truth in the marking is easier attained; and 4th, they are much easier to cut, because the full depth of the teeth can, on spur-wheels, in all cases be cut with one revolving cutter, and at one passage of the cutter, if there is sufficient power to drive it, which is not the case with epicycloidal teeth whenever the flank space is wider below than it is at the pitch circle. On account of the first-named advantage, they are largely employed upon small gears, having their teeth cut true in a gear-cutting machine; while on account of the second advantage, interchangeable wheels, which are merely required to transmit motion, may be put in gear without a fine adjustment of the pitch circle, in which case the wear of the teeth will not prove destructive to the curves of the teeth. Another advantage is, that a greater number of teeth of equal strength may be given to a wheel than in the epicycloidal form, for with the latter the space must at least equal the thickness of the tooth, while in involute the space may be considerably less in width than the tooth, both measured, of course, at the pitch circle. There are also more teeth in contact at the same time; hence, the strain is distributed over more teeth.

These advantages assume increased value from the following considerations.

In a train of epicycloidal gearing in which the pinion or smallest wheel has radial flanks, the flanks of the teeth will become spread as the diameters of the wheels in the train increase. Coincident with spread at the roots is the thrust shown with reference to Fig. 39, hence under the most favorable conditions the wear on the journals of the wheel axles and the bearings containing them will take place, and the pitch circles will separate. Now so soon as this separation takes place, the motion of the wheels will not be as uniformly equal as when the pitch circles were in contact on the line of centres, because the conditions under which the tooth curves, necessary to produce a uniform velocity of motion, were formed, will have become altered, and the value of those curves to produce constant regularity of motion will have become impaired in proportion as the pitch circles have separated.

In a single pair of epicycloidal wheels in which the flanks of the teeth are radial, the conditions are more favorable, but in this case the pinion teeth will be weaker than if of involute form, while the wear of the journals and bearings (which will take place to some extent) will have the injurious effect already stated, whereas in involute teeth, as has been noted, the separation of the pitch circles does not affect the uniformity of the motion or the correct working of the teeth.

If the teeth of wheels are to be cut to shape in a gear-cutting machine, either the cutters employed determine from their shapes the shapes or curves of the teeth, or else the cutting tool is so guided to the work that the curves are determined by the operations of the machine. In either case nothing is left to the machine operator but to select the proper tools and set them, and the work in proper position in the machine. But when the teeth are to be cast upon the wheel the pattern wherefrom the wheel is to be moulded must have the teeth proportioned and shaped to proper curve and form.

Wheels that require to run without noise or jar, and to have uniformity of motion, must be finished in gear-cutting machines, because it is impracticable to cast true wheels.

When the teeth are to be cast upon the wheels the pattern-maker makes templates of the tooth curves (by some one of the methods to be hereafter described), and carefully cuts the teeth to shape. But the production of these templates is a tedious and costly operation, and one which is very liable to error unless much experience has been had. The Pratt and Whitney Company have, however, produced a machine that will produce templates of far greater accuracy than can be made by hand work. These templates are in metal, and for epicycloidal teeth from 15 to a rack, and having a diametral pitch ranging from 112 to 32.

The principles of action of the machine are that a segment of a ring (representing a portion of the pitch circle of the wheel for whose teeth a template is to be produced) is fixed to the frame of the machine. Upon this ring rolls a disk representing the rolling, generating, or describing circle, this disk being carried by a frame mounted upon an arm representing the radius of the wheel, and therefore pivoted at a point central to the ring. The describing disk is rolled upon the ring describing the epicycloidal curve, and by suitable mechanical devices this curve is cut upon a piece of steel, thus producing a template by actually rolling the generating upon the base circle, and the rolling motion being produced by positive mechanical motion, there cannot possibly be any slip, hence the curves so produced are true epicycloids.

VOL. I. TEMPLATE‑CUTTING MACHINES FOR GEAR TEETH. PLATE I.
Fig. 98
Fig. 98.
 
Fig. 99
Fig. 99.
 
Fig. 100 Fig. 101
Fig. 100. Fig. 101.
Fig. 102

Fig. 102.

Fig. 103

Fig. 103.

Fig. 104

Fig. 104.

Fig. 105

Fig. 105.

The general construction of the machine is shown in the side view, Fig. 98 (Plate I.), and top view, Fig. 99 (Plate I.), details of construction being shown in Figs. 100, 101 (Plate I.), 102, 103, 104, 105, and 106. a a is the segment of a ring whose outer edge represents a part of the pitch circle. b is a disk representing the rolling or generating circle carried by the frame c, which is attached to a rod pivoted at d. The axis of pivot d represents the axis of the base circle or pitch circle of the wheel, and d is adjustable along the rod to suit the radius of a a, or what is the same thing, to equal the radius of the wheel for whose teeth a template is to be produced.

When the frame c is moved its centre or axis of motion is therefore at d and its path of motion is around the circumference of a a, upon the edge of which it rolls. To prevent b from slipping instead of rolling upon a a, a flexible steel ribbon is fastened at one end upon a a, passes around the edge of a a and thence around the circumference of b, where its other end is fastened; due allowance for the thickness of this ribbon being made in adjusting the radii of a a and of b.

e′ is a tubular pivot or stud fixed on the centre line of pivots e and d, and distant from the edge of a a to the same amount that e is. These two studs e and e′ carry two worm-wheels f and f′ in Fig. 102, which stand above a and b, so that the axis of the worm g is vertically over the common tangent of the pitch and describing circles.

[I-35]The relative positions of these and other parts will be most clearly seen by a study of the vertical section, Fig. 102.[4] The worm g is supported in bearings secured to the carrier c and is driven by another small worm turned by the pulley i, as seen in Fig. 101 (Plate I.); the driving cord, passing through suitable guiding pulleys, is kept at uniform tension by a weight, however c moves; this is shown in Figs. 98 and 99 (Plate I.).

[4] From “The Teeth of Spur Wheels,” by Professor McCord.

Upon the same studs, in a plane still higher than the worm-wheels turn the two disks h, h′, Figs. 103, 104, 105. The diameters of these are equal, and precisely the same as those of the describing circles which they represent, with due allowance, again, for the thickness of a steel ribbon, by which these also are connected. It will be understood that each of these disks is secured to the worm-wheel below it, and the outer one of these, to the disk b, so that as the worm g turns, h and h′ are rotated in opposite directions, the motion of h being identical with that of b; this last is a rolling one upon the edge of a, the carrier c with all its attached mechanism moving around d at the same time. Ultimately, then, the motions of h, h′, are those of two equal describing circles rolling in external and internal contact with a fixed pitch circle.

In the edge of each disk a semicircular recess is formed, into which is accurately fitted a cylinder j, provided with flanges, between which the disks fit so as to prevent end play. This cylinder is perforated for the passage of the steel ribbon, the sides of the opening, as shown in Fig. 103, having the same curvature as the rims of the disks. Thus when these recesses are opposite each other, as in Fig. 104, the cylinder j fills them both, and the tendency of the steel ribbon is to carry it along with h when c moves to one side of this position, as in Fig. 105, and along with h′ when c moves to the other side, as in Fig. 103.

This action is made positively certain by means of the hooks k, k′, which catch into recesses formed in the upper flange of j, as seen in Fig. 104. The spindles, with which these hooks turn, extend through the hollow studs, and the coiled springs attached to their lower ends, as seen in Fig. 102, urge the hooks in the directions of their points; their motions being limited by stops o, o′, fixed, not in the disks h, h′, but in projecting collars on the upper ends of the tubular studs. The action will be readily traced by comparing Fig. 104 with Fig. 105; as c goes to the left, the hook k′ is left behind, but the other one, k, cannot escape from its engagement with the flange of j; which, accordingly, is carried along with h by the combined action of the hook and the steel ribbon.

On the top of the upper flange of j, is secured a bracket, carrying the bearing of a vertical spindle l, whose centre line is a prolongation of that of j itself. This spindle is driven by the spur-wheel n, keyed on its upper end, through a flexible train of gearing seen in Fig. 99; at its lower end it carries a small milling cutter m, which shapes the edge of the template t, Fig. 105, firmly clamped to the framing.

When the machine is in operation, a heavy weight, seen in Fig. 98 (Plate I.), acts to move c about the pivot d, being attached to the carrier by a cord guided by suitably arranged pulleys; this keeps the cutter m up to its work, while the spindle l is independently driven, and the duty left for the worm g to perform is merely that of controlling the motions of the cutter by the means above described, and regulating their speed.

The centre line of the cutter is thus automatically compelled to travel in the path r s, Fig. 105, composed of an epicycloid and a hypocycloid if a a be the segment of a circle as here shown; or of two cycloids, if a a be a straight bar. The radius of the cutter being constant, the edge of the template t is cut to an outline also composed of two curves; since the radius m is small, this outline closely resembles r s, but particular attention is called to the fact that it is not identical with it, nor yet composed of truly epicycloidal curves of any generation whatever: the result of which will be subsequently explained.

Number and Sizes of Templates.

With a given pitch every additional tooth increases the diameter of the wheel, and changes the form of the epicycloid; so that it would appear necessary to have as many different cutters, as there are wheels to be made, of any one pitch.

[I-36]But the proportional increment, and the actual change of form, due to the addition of one tooth, becomes less as the wheel becomes larger; and the alteration in the outline soon becomes imperceptible. Going still farther, we can presently add more teeth without producing a sensible variation in the contour. That is to say, several wheels can be cut with the same cutter, without introducing a perceptible error. It is obvious that this variation in the form is least near the pitch circle, which is the only part of the epicycloid made use of; and Prof. Willis many years ago deduced theoretically, what has since been abundantly proved by practice, that instead of an infinite number of cutters, 24 are sufficient of one pitch, for making all wheels, from one with 12 teeth up to a rack.

Accordingly, in using the epicycloidal milling engine, for forming the template, segments of pitch circles are provided of the following diameters (in inches):

12, 16, 20, 27, 43, 100,
13, 17, 21, 30, 50, 150,
14, 18, 23, 34, 60, 300.
15, 19, 25, 38, 75,

 

Fig. 106

Fig. 106.

In Fig. 106, the edge t t is shaped by the cutter t t, whose centre travels in the path r s, therefore these two lines are at a constant normal distance from each other. Let a roller p, of any reasonable diameter, be run along t t, its centre will trace the line u v, which is at a constant normal distance from t t, and therefore from r s. Let the normal distance between u v and r s be the radius of another milling cutter n, having the same axis as the roller p, and carried by it, but in a different plane as shown in the side view; then whatever n cuts will have r s for its contour, if it lie upon the same side of the cutter as the template.

The diameter of the disks which act as describing circles is 712 inches, and that of the milling cutter which shapes the edge of the template is 18 of an inch.

Now if we make a set of 1-pitch wheels with the diameters above given, the smallest will have twelve teeth, and the one with fifteen teeth will have radial flanks. The curves will be the same whatever the pitch; but as shown in Fig. 106, the blank should be adjusted in the epicycloidal engine, so that its lower edge shall be 116th of an inch (the radius of the cutter m) above the bottom of the space; also its relation to the side of the proposed tooth should be as here shown. As previously explained, the depth of the space depends upon the pitch. In the system adopted by the Pratt & Whitney Company, the whole height of the tooth is 218 times the diametral pitch, the projection outside the pitch circle being just equal to the pitch, so that diameter of blank = diameter of pitch circle + 2 × diametral pitch.

We have now to show how, from a single set of what may be called 1-pitch templates, complete sets of cutters of the true epicycloidal contour may be made of the same or any less pitch.

Now if t t be a 1-pitch template as above mentioned, it is clear that n will correctly shape a cutting edge of a gear cutter for a 1-pitch wheel. The same figure, reduced to half size, would correctly represent the formation of a cutter for a 2-pitch wheel of the same number of teeth; if to quarter size, that of a cutter for a 4-pitch wheel, and so on.

But since the actual size and curvature of the contour thus determined depend upon the dimensions and motion of the cutter n, it will be seen that the same result will practically be accomplished, if these only be reduced; the size of the template, the diameter and the path of the roller remaining unchanged.

The nature of the mechanism by which this is effected in the Pratt & Whitney system of producing epicycloidal cutters will be hereafter explained in connection with cutters.


[I-37]

Chapter III.—THE TEETH OF GEAR-WHEELS (continued).

The revolving cutters employed in gear-cutting machines, gear-cutters, or cutting engines (as the machines for cutting the teeth of gear-wheels to shape are promiscuously termed), are of the form shown in Fig. 107, which represents what is known as a Brown and Sharpe patent cutter, whose peculiarities will be explained presently. This class of cutters is made as follows:—

Fig. 107

Fig. 107.

A cast steel disk is turned in the lathe to the required form and outline. After turning, its circumference is serrated as shown, so as to provide protuberances, or teeth, on the face of which the cutting edges may be formed. To produce a cutting edge it is necessary that the metal behind that edge should slope or slant away leaving the cutting edge to project. Two methods of accomplishing this are employed: in the first, which is that embodied in the Brown and Sharpe system, each tooth has the curved outline, forming what may be termed its circumferential outline, of the same curvature and shape from end to end, and from front to back, as it may more properly be termed, the clearance being given by the back of the tooth approaching the centre of the cutter, so that if a line be traced along the circumference of a tooth, from the cutting edge to the back, it will approach the centre of the cutter as the back is approached, but the form of the tooth will be the same at every point in the line. It follows then that the radial faces of the teeth may be ground away to sharpen the teeth without affecting the shape of the tooth, which being made correct will remain correct.

This not only saves a great deal of labor in sharpening the teeth, but also saves the softening and rehardening process, otherwise necessary at each resharpening.

Fig. 108

Fig. 108.

Fig. 109

Fig. 109.

Fig. 110

Fig. 110.

The ordinary method of producing the cutting edges after turning the cutter and serrating it, is to cut away the metal with a file or rotary cutter of some kind forming the cutting edge to correct shape, but paying no regard to the shape of the back of the tooth more than to give it the necessary amount of clearance. In this case the cutter must be softened and reset to sharpen it. To bring the cutting edge up to a sharp edge all around its profile, while still preserving the shape to which it was turned, the pantagraphic engine, shown in Fig. 108, has been made by the Pratt and Whitney Company. Figs. 109 and 110 show some details of its construction.[5] “The milling cutter n is driven by a flexible train acting upon the wheel o, whose spindle is carried by the bracket b, which can slide from right to left upon the piece b, and this again is free to slide in the frame f. These two motions are in horizontal planes, and perpendicular to each other.

[5] From “The Teeth of Spur Wheels,” by Professor McCord.

“The upper end of the long lever p c is formed into a ball, working in a socket which is fixed to p c. Over the cylindrical upper part of this lever slides an accurately fitted sleeve d, partly spherical externally, and working in a socket which can be clamped at any height on the frame f. The lower end p of this lever being accurately turned, corresponds to the roller p in Fig. 109, and is moved along the edge of the template t, which is fastened in the frame in an invariable position.

“By clamping d at various heights, the ratio of the lever arms p d, p d, may be varied at will, and the axis of n made to travel in a path similar to that of the axis of p, but as many times smaller as we choose; and the diameter of n must be made less than that of p in the same proportion.

“The template being on the left of the roller, the cutter to be shaped is placed on the right of n, as shown in the plan view at z, because the lever reverses the movement.

“This arrangement is not mathematically perfect, by reason of the angular vibration of the lever. This is, however, very small, owing to the length of the lever; it might have been compensated for by the introduction of another universal joint, which would practically have introduced an error greater than the one to be obviated, and it has, with good judgment, been omitted.

“The gear-cutter is turned nearly to the required form, the notches are cut in it, and the duty of the pantagraphic engine is merely to give the finishing touch to each cutting edge, and give[I-38] it the correct outline. It is obvious that this machine is in no way connected with, or dependent upon, the epicycloidal engine; but by the use of proper templates it will make cutters for any desired form of tooth; and by its aid exact duplicates may be made in any numbers with the greatest facility.

“It forms no part of our plan to represent as perfect that which is not so, and there are one or two facts, which at first thought might seem serious objections to the adoption of the epicycloidal system. These are:

“1. It is physically impossible to mill out a concave cycloid, by any means whatever, because at the pitch line its radius of curvature is zero, and a milling cutter must have a sensible diameter.

“2. It is impossible to mill out even a convex cycloid or epicycloid, by the means and in the manner above described.

“This is on account of a hitherto unnoticed peculiarity of the curve at a constant normal distance from the cycloid. In order to show this clearly, we have, in Fig. 110, enormously exaggerated the radius c d, of the milling cutter (m of Figs. 105 and 106). The outer curve h l, evidently, could be milled out by the cutter, whose centre travels in the cycloid c a; it resembles the cycloid somewhat in form, and presents no remarkable features. But the inner one is quite different; it starts at d, and at first goes down, inside the circle whose radius is c d, forms a cusp at e, then begins to rise, crossing this circle at g, and the base line at f. It will be seen, then, that if the centre of the cutter travel in the cycloid a c, its edge will cut away the part g e d, leaving the template of the form o g i. Now if a roller of the same radius c d, be rolled along this edge, its centre will travel in the cycloid from a, to the point p, where a normal from g, cuts it; then the roller will turn upon g as a fulcrum, and its centre will travel from p to c, in a circular arc whose radius g p = c d.

“That is to say even a roller of the same size as the original milling cutter, will not retrace completely the cycloidal path in which the cutter travelled.

“Now in making a rack template, the cutter, after reaching c, travels in the reversed cycloid c r, its left-hand edge, therefore, milling out a curve d k, similar to h l. This curve lies wholly outside the circle d i, and therefore cuts o g at a point between f and g, but very near to g. This point of intersection is marked s in Fig. 110, where the actual form of the template o s k is shown. The roller which is run along this template is larger, as has been explained, than the milling cutter. When the point of contact reaches s (which so nearly corresponds to g that they practically coincide), this roller cannot now swing about s through an angle so great as p g c of Fig. 110; because at the root d, the radius of curvature of d k is only equal to that of the cutter, and g and s are so near the root that the curvature of s k, near the latter point, is greater than that of the roller. Consequently there must be some point u in the path of the centre of the roller, such, that when the centre reaches it, the circumference will pass through s, and be also tangent to s k. Let t be the point of tangency; draw s u and t u, cutting the cycloidal path a r in x and y. Then, u y being the radius of the new milling cutter (corresponding to n of Fig. 109), it is clear that in the outline of the gear cutter shaped by it, the circular arc x y will be substituted for the true cycloid.

The System Practically Perfect.

“The above defects undeniably exist; now, what do they amount to? The diagram is drawn purposely with these sources of error greatly exaggerated, in order to make their nature apparent and their existence sensible. The diameters used in practice, as previously stated, are: describing circle, 712 inches; cutter for shaping template, 18 of an inch; roller used against edge of template, 118 inches; cutter for shaping a 1-pitch gear cutter, 1 inch.

Fig. 111

Fig. 111.

“With these data the writer has found that the total length of the arc x y of Fig. 110, which appears instead of the cycloid in the outline of a cutter for a 1-pitch rack, is less than 0.0175 inch; the real deviation from the true form, obviously, must be much less than that. It need hardly be stated that the effect upon the velocity ratio of an error so minute, and in that part of the contour, is so extremely small as to defy detection. And the best proof of the practical perfection of this system of making epicycloidal teeth[I-39] is found in the smoothness and precision with which the wheels run; a set of them is shown in gear in Fig. 111, the rack gearing as accurately with the largest as with the smallest. To which is to be added, finally, that objection taken, on whatever grounds, to the epicycloidal form of tooth, has no bearing upon the method above described of producing duplicate cutters for teeth of any form, which the pantagraphic engine will make with the same facility and exactness, if furnished with the proper templates.

“The front faces of the teeth of rotary cutters for gear-cutting are usually radial lines, and are ground square across so as to stand parallel with the axis of the cutter driving spindle, so that to whatever depth the cutter may have entered the wheel, the whole of the cutting edge within the wheel will meet the cut simultaneously. If this is not the case the pressure of the cut will spring the cutter, and also the arbor driving it, to one side. Suppose, for example, that the tooth faces not being square across, one side of the teeth meets the work first, then there will be as each tooth meets its cut an endeavour to crowd away from the cut until such time as the other side of the tooth also takes its cut.”

It is obvious that rotating cutters of this class cannot be used to cut teeth having the width of the space wider below than it is at the pitch line. Hence, if such cutters are required to be used upon epicycloidal teeth, the curves to be theoretically correct must be such as are due to a generating circle that will give at least parallel flanks. From this it becomes apparent that involute teeth being always thicker at the root than at the pitch line, and the spaces being, therefore, narrower at the root, may be cut with these cutters, no matter what the diameter of the base circle of the involute.

To produce with revolving cutters teeth of absolutely correct theoretical curvature of face and flank, it is essential that the cutter teeth be made of the exact curvature due to the diameter of pitch circle and generating circle of the wheel to be cut; while to produce a tooth thickness and space width, also theoretically correct, the thickness of the cutter must also be made to exactly answer the requirements of the particular wheel to be cut; hence, for every different number of teeth in wheels of an equal pitch a separate cutter is necessary if theoretical correctness is to be attained.

This requirement of curvature is necessary because it has been shown that the curvatures of the epicycloid and hypocycloid, as also of the involute, vary with every different diameter of base circle, even though, in the case of epicycloidal teeth, the diameter of the generating circle remain the same. The requirement of thickness is necessary because the difference between the arc and the chord pitch is greater in proportion as the diameter of the base or pitch circle is decreased.

But the difference in the curvature on the short portions of the curves used for the teeth of fine pitches (and therefore of but little height) due to a slight variation in the diameter of the base circle is so minute, that it is found in practice that no sensible error is produced if a cutter be used within certain limits upon wheels having a different number of teeth than that for which the cutter is theoretically correct.

The range of these limits, however, must (to avoid sensible error) be more confined as the diameter of the base circle (or what is the same thing, the number of the teeth in the wheel) is decreased, because the error of curvature referred to increases as the diameters of either the base or the generating circles decrease. Thus the difference in the curve struck on a base circle of 20 inches diameter, and one of 40 inches diameter, using the same diameter of generating circle, would be very much less than that between the curves produced by the same diameter of generating circle on base circles respectively 10 and 5 inches diameter.

For these reasons the cutters are limited to fewer wheels according as the number of teeth decreases, or, per contra, are allowed to be used over a greater range of wheels as the number of teeth in the wheels is increased.

Thus in the Brown and Sharpe system for involute teeth there are 8 cutters numbered numerically (for convenience in ordering) from 1 to 8, and in the following table the range of the respective cutters is shown, and the number of teeth for which the cutter is theoretically correct is also given.

BROWN AND SHARPE SYSTEM.

No. of cutter. Involute teeth. Teeth.
1 Used upon all wheels having from 135 teeth to a rack correct for 200
2 55 to 134 teeth, 68
3 35 to 54 40
4 26 to 34 29
5 21 to 25 22
6 17 to 20 18
7 14 to 16 16
8 12 to 14 13

Suppose that it was required that of a pair of wheels one make twice the revolutions of the other; then, knowing the particular number of teeth for which the cutters are made correct, we may obtain the nearest theoretically true results as follows: If we select cutters Nos. 8 and 4 and cut wheels having respectively 13 and 26 teeth, the 13 wheel will be theoretically correct, and the 26 will contain the minute error due to the fact that the cutter is used upon a wheel having three less teeth than the number it is theoretically correct for. But we may select the cutters that are correct for 16 and 29 teeth respectively, the 16th tooth being theoretically correct, and the 29th cutter (or cutter No. 4 in the table) being used to cut 32 teeth, this wheel will contain the error due to cutting 3 more teeth than the cutter was made correct for. This will be nearer correct, because the error is in a larger wheel, and, therefore, less in actual amount. The pitch of teeth may be selected so that with the given number of teeth the diameters of the wheels will be that required.

We may now examine the effect of the variation of curvature in combination with that of the thickness, upon a wheel having less and upon one having more teeth than the number in the wheel for which the cutter is correct.

First, then, suppose a cutter to be used upon a wheel having less teeth and it will cut the spaces too wide, because of the variation of thickness, and the curves too straight or insufficiently curved because of the error of curvature. Upon a wheel having more teeth it will cut the spaces too narrow, and the curvature of the teeth too great; but, as before stated, the number of wheels assigned to each cutter may be so apportioned that the error will be confined to practically unappreciable limits.

If, however, the teeth are epicycloidal, it is apparent that the spaces of one wheel must be wide enough to admit the teeth of the other to a depth sufficient to permit the pitch lines to coincide on the line of centres; hence it is necessary in small diameters, in which there is a sensible difference between the arc and the chord pitches, to confine the use of a cutter to the special wheel for which it is designed, that is, having the same number of teeth as the cutter is designed for.

Thus the Pratt and Whitney arrangement of cutters for epicycloidal teeth is as follows:—

PRATT AND WHITNEY SYSTEM.

EPICYCLOIDAL TEETH.

[All wheels having from 12 to 21 teeth have a special cutter for each number of teeth.][6]

Cutter correct for  
No. of teeth.  
23 Used on wheels having from 22 to 24 teeth.
25 25 to 26
27 26 to 29
30 29 to 32
34 32 to 36
38 36 to 40
43 40 to 46
50 46 to 55
60 55 to 67
76 67 to 87
100 87 to 123
150 123 to 200
300 200 to 600
Rack 600 to rack.  

[6] For wheels having less than 12 teeth the Pratt and Whitney Co. use involute cutters.

Here it will be observed that by a judicious selection of pitch and cutters, almost theoretically perfect results may be obtained[I-40] for almost any conditions, while at the same time the cutters are so numerous that there is no necessity for making any selection with a view to taking into consideration for what particular number of teeth the cutter is made correct.

For epicycloidal cutters made on the Brown and Sharpe system so as to enable the grinding of the face of the tooth to sharpen it, the Brown and Sharpe company make a separate cutter for wheels from 12 to 20 teeth, as is shown in the accompanying table, in which the cutters are for convenience of designation denoted by an alphabetical letter.

24 CUTTERS IN EACH SET.

Letter A cuts     12 teeth. Letter M cuts 27 to 29 teeth.
  B     13   N 30 33
  C     14   O 34 37
  D     15   P 38 42
  E     16   Q 43 49
  F     17   R 50 59
  G     18   S 60 74
  H     19   T 75 99
  I     20   U 100 149
  J 21 to 22   V 150 249
  K 23 24   W 250 Rack.
  L 25 26   X Rack.

In these cutters a shoulder having no clearance is placed on each side of the cutter, so that when the cutter has entered the wheel until the shoulder meets the circumference of the wheel, the tooth is of the correct depth to make the pitch circles coincide.

In both the Brown and Sharpe and Pratt and Whitney systems, no side clearance is given other than that quite sufficient to prevent the teeth of one wheel from jambing into the spaces of the other. Pratt and Whitney allow 18 of the pitch for top and bottom clearance, while Brown and Sharpe allow 110 of the thickness of the tooth for top and bottom clearance.

It may be explained now, why the thickness of the cutter if employed upon a wheel having more teeth than the cutter is correct for, interferes with theoretical exactitude.

Fig. 112

Fig. 112.

Fig. 113

Fig. 113.

First, then, with regard to the thickness of tooth and width of space. Suppose, then, Fig. 112 to represent a section of a wheel having 12 teeth, then the pitch circle of the cutter will be represented by line a, and there will be the same difference between the arc and chord pitch on the cutter as there is on the wheel; but suppose that this same cutter be used on a wheel having 24 teeth, as in Fig. 113, then the pitch circle on the cutter will be more curved than that on the wheel as denoted at c, and there will be more difference between the arc and chord pitches on the cutter than there is on the wheel, and as a result the cutter will cut a groove too narrow.

The amount of error thus induced diminishes as the diameter of the pitch circle of the cutter is increased.

But to illustrate the amount. Suppose that a cutter is made to be theoretically correct in thickness at the pitch line for a wheel to contain 12 teeth, and having a pitch circle diameter of 8 inches, then we have

  3.1416  =  ratio of circumference to diameter.
  8  =  diameter.
Number of teeth  =  12 ) 25.1328  =  circumference.
  2.0944  =  arc pitch of wheel.

If now we subtract the chord pitch from the arc pitch, we shall obtain the difference between the arc and the chord pitches of the wheel; here

2 .0944  =  arc pitch.
2 .0706  =  chord pitch.
  .0238  =  difference between the arc and the chord pitch.

Now suppose this cutter to be used upon a wheel having the same pitch, but containing 18 teeth; then we have

2 .0944  =  arc pitch.
2 .0836  =  chord pitch.
  .0108  =  difference between the arc and the chord pitch.

Then

.0238  =  difference on wheel with 12 teeth.
.0108  =  18
.0130  =  variation between the differences.

And the thickness of the tooth equalling the width of the space, it becomes obvious that the thickness of the cutter at the pitch line being correct for the 12 teeth, is one half of .013 of an inch too thin for the 18 teeth, making the spaces too narrow and the teeth too thick by that amount.

Now let us suppose that a cutter is made correct for a wheel having 96 teeth of 2.0944 arc pitch, and that it be used upon a wheel having 144 teeth. The proportion of the wheels one to the other remains as before (for 96 bears the proportion to 144 as 12 does to 18).

Then we have for the 96 teeth

2 .0944  =  arc pitch.
2 .0934  =  chord pitch.
  .0010  =  difference.

For the 144 teeth we have

2 .0944  =  arc pitch.
2 .0937  =  chord pitch.
  .0007  =  difference.

We find, then, that the variation decreases as the size of the wheels increases, and is so small as to be of no practical consequence.

If our examples were to be put into practice, and it were actually required to make one cutter serve for wheels having, say, from 12 to 18 teeth, a greater degree of correctness would be obtained if the cutter were made to some other wheel than the smallest. But it should be made for a wheel having less than the mean diameter (within the range of 12 and 18), that is, having less than 15 teeth; because the difference between the arc and chord pitch increases as the diameter of the pitch circle increases, as already shown.

A rule for calculating the number of wheels to be cut by each cutter when the number of cutters in the set and the number of teeth in the smallest and largest wheel in the train are given is as follows:—

Rule.—Multiply the number of teeth in the smallest wheel of the train by the number of cutters it is proposed to have in the set, and divide the amount so obtained by a sum obtained as follows:—

From the number of cutters in the set subtract the number of the cutter, and to the remainder add the sum obtained by multiplying the number of the teeth in the smallest wheel of the set or train by the number of the cutter and dividing the product by the number of teeth in the largest wheel of the set or train.

Example.—I require to find how many wheels each cutter should cut, there being 8 cutters and the smallest wheel having 12 teeth, while the largest has 300.

Number of teeth in
smallest wheel.
  Number of cutters
in the set.
 
12  ×  8  =  96

Then

Number of cutters
in set.
  Number of
cutter.
 
8  -  7  =  1

[I-41]Then

Number of teeth in
smallest wheel.
  The number of the
cutter.
  The number of the teeth
in largest wheel.
12  ×  8  ÷  300
  12  
  8    
300  )  96 0  (  0.32
  90 0  
  6 00  
  6 00  

Now add the 1 to the .32 and we have 1.32, which we must divide into the 96 first obtained.

Thus

1.32  )  96 .00  (  72
  92 4  
  3 60  
  2 64  
  96  

Hence No. 8 cutter may be used for all wheels that have between 72 teeth and 300 teeth.

To find the range of wheels to be cut by the next cutter, which we will call No. 7, proceed again as before, but using 7 instead of 8 as the number of the cutter.

Thus

Number of teeth in
smallest wheel.
  Number of cutters in
the set.
 
12  ×  8  =  96

Then

Number of cutters
in the set.
  Number of
cutters.
 
8  -  6  =  2

And

Number of teeth in
smallest wheel.
  The number of the
cutter
  The number of teeth
in the largest wheel.
12  ×  8  ÷  300

Here

  12  
  8    
300  )  96 0  (  0.32
  90 0    
  6 00  
  6 00  

Add the 2 to the .32 and we have 2.32 to divide into the 96.

Thus

2.32  )  96 .00  (  41
  92 8  
  3 20  
  2 32  
  88  

Hence this cutter will cut all wheels having not less than the 41 teeth, and up to the 72 teeth where the other cutter begins. For the range of the next cutter proceed the same, using 6 as the number of the cutter, and so on.

By this rule we obtain the lowest number of teeth in a wheel for which the cutter should be used, and it follows that its range will continue upwards to the smallest wheel cut by the cutter above it.

Having by this means found the range of wheels for each cutter, it remains to find for what particular number of teeth within that range the cutter teeth should be made correct, in order to have whatever error there may be equal in amount on the largest and smallest wheel of its range. This is done by using precisely the same rule, but supposing there to be twice as many cutters as there actually are, and then taking the intermediate numbers as those to be used.

Applying this plan to the first of the two previous examples we have—

Number of teeth in the
smallest wheel.
  Number of cutters in
the set.
 
12  ×  16  =  192

Then

Number of cutters
in the set.
  Number of the
cutter.
 
16  -  15  =  1

And

Number of teeth in
smallest wheel.
  The number of the
cutter.
  The number of the teeth in
the largest wheel.
12  ×  15  ÷  300
  1 2  
  1 5  
  6 0  
  12    
300  )  18 0.0    (  0.6
  18 00  

Then add the 1 to the .6 = 1.6, and this divided into 192 = 120.

By continuing this process for each of the 16 cutters we obtain the following table:—

Number of
Cutter.
Number of
Teeth.
Number of
Cutter.
Number of
Teeth.
1   12   9   26  
*2   13   *10   30  
3   14   11   35  
*4   15   *12   42  
5   17   13   54  
*6   18   *14   75  
7   20 .61 15   120  
*8   23   *16   300  

Suppose now we take for our 8 cutters those marked by an asterisk, and use cutter 2 for all wheels having either 12, 13, or 14 teeth, then the next cutter would be that numbered 4, cutting 14, 15, or 16 toothed wheels, and so on.

A similar table in which 8 cutters are required, but 16 are used in the calculation, the largest wheel having 200 teeth in the set, is given below.

Number of
Cutter.
Number of
Teeth.
Number of
Cutter.
Number of
Teeth.
1   12 .7 9   26 .5
2   13 .5 10   29  
3   14 .5 11   35  
4   15 .6 12   40 .6
5   16 .9 13   52 .9
6   18   14   67 .6
7   21   15   101  
8   23 .5 16   200  

To assist in the selections as to what wheels in a given set the determined number of cutters should be made correct for, so as to obtain the least limit of error, Professor Willis has calculated the following table, by means of which cutters may be selected that will give the same difference of form between any two consecutive numbers, and this table he terms the table of equidistant value of cutters.

TABLE OF EQUIDISTANT VALUE OF CUTTERS.

Number of Teeth.
Rack—300, 150, 100, 76, 60, 50, 43, 38, 34, 30, 27,  25, 23, 21, 20, 19, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12.

The method of using the table is as follows:—Suppose it is required to make a set of wheels, the smallest of which is to contain 50 teeth and the largest 150, and it is determined to use but one cutter, then that cutter should be made correct for a wheel containing 76; because in the table 76 is midway between 50 and 150.

But suppose it were determined to employ two cutters, then one of them should be made correct for a wheel having 60 teeth, and used on all the wheels having between 50 and 76 teeth, while the other should be made correct for a wheel containing 100 teeth, and used on all wheels containing between 76 and 150 teeth.

In the following table, also arranged by Professor Willis, the most desirable selection of cutters for different circumstances is given, it being supposed that the set of wheels contains from 12 teeth to a rack.

Number of
cutters in
the set.
Number of Teeth in Wheel for which the Cutter is to be made correct.
2 50 16  
3 75 25 15  
4 100 34 20 14  
6 150 50 30 21 16 13  
8 200 67 40 29 22 18 15 13  
10 200 77 50 35 27 22 19 16 14 13  
12 300 100 60 43 34 27 23 20 17 15 14 13  
18 300 150 100 70 50 40 30 26 24 22 20 18 16 15 14 13 12  
24 Rack 300 150 100 76 60 50 43 38 34 30 27 25 23 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

[I-42]Suppose now we take the cutters, of a given pitch, necessary to cut all the wheels from 12 teeth to a rack, then the thickness of the teeth at the pitch line will for the purposes of designation be the thickness of the teeth of all the wheels, which thickness may be a certain proportion of the pitch.

But in involute teeth while the depth of tooth on the cutter may be taken as the standard for all the wheels in the range, and the actual depth for the wheel for which the cutter is correct, yet the depth of the teeth in the other wheels in the range may be varied sufficiently on each wheel to make the thickness of the teeth equal the width of the spaces (notwithstanding the variation between the arc and chord pitches), so that by a variation in the tooth depth the error induced by that variation may be corrected. The following table gives the proportions in the Brown and Sharpe system.

Arc Pitch. Depth of
Tooth.
Depth in
terms of the
arc pitch.
inches. inches. inches.
1.570 1.078 .686
1.394 .958 .687
1.256 .863 .686
1.140 .784 .697
1.046 .719 .687
.896 .616 .686
.786 .539 .685
.628 .431 .686
.524 .359 .685
.448 .307 .685
.392 .270 .686
.350 .240 .686
.314 .216 .687

To avoid the trouble of measuring, and to assist in obtaining accuracy of depth, a gauge is employed to mark on the wheel face a line denoting the depth to which the cutter should be entered.

Suppose now that it be required to make a set of cutters for a certain range of wheels, and it be determined that the cutters be so constructed that the greatest permissible amount of error in any wheel of the set be 1100 inch. Then the curves for the smallest wheel, and those for the largest in the set, and the amount of difference between them ascertained, and assuming this difference to amount to 116 inch, which is about 6100, then it is evident that 6 cutters must be employed for the set.

It has been shown that on bevel-wheels the tooth curves vary at every point in the tooth breadth; hence it is obvious that the cutter being of a fixed curve will make the tooth to that curve. Again, the thickness of the teeth and breadth of the spaces vary at every point in the breadth, while with a cutter of fixed thickness the space cut will be parallel from end to end. To overcome these difficulties it is usual to give to the cutter a curve corresponding to the curve required at the middle of the wheel face and a thickness equal to the required width of space at its smallest end, which is at the smallest face diameter.

The cutter thus formed produces, when passed through the wheel once, and to the required depth, a tooth of one curve from end to end, having its thickness and width of space correct at the smaller face diameter only, the teeth being too thick and the spaces too narrow as the outer diameter of the wheel is approached. But the position and line of traverse of the cutter may be altered so as to take a second cut, widening the space and reducing the tooth thickness at the outer diameter.

By moving the cutter’s position two or three times the points of contact between the teeth may be made to occur at two or three points across the breadth of the teeth and their points of contact; the wear will soon spread out so that the teeth bear all the way across.

Another plan is to employ two or three cutters, one having the correct curve for the inner diameter, and of the correct thickness for that diameter, another having the correct curve for the pitch circle, and another having the correct curve at the largest diameter of the teeth.

The thickness of the first and second cutters must not exceed the required width of space at the small end, while that for the third may be the same as the others, or equal to the thickness of the smallest space breadth that it will encounter in its traverse along the teeth.

The second cutter must be so set that it will leave the inner end of the teeth intact, but cut the space to the required width in the middle of the wheel face. The third cutter must be so set as to leave the middle of the tooth breadth intact, and cut the teeth to the required thickness at the outer or largest diameter.

Cutting Worm-wheels.

The most correct method of cutting the teeth of a worm-wheel is by means of a worm-cutter, which is a worm of the pitch and form of tooth that the working worm is intended to be, but of hardened steel, and having grooves cut lengthways of the worm so as to provide cutting edges similar to those on the cutter shown in Fig. 107.

The wheel is mounted on an arbor or mandril free to rotate on its axis and at a right angle to the cutter worm, which is rotated and brought to bear upon the perimeter of the worm-wheel in the same manner as the working worm-wheel when in action. The worm-cutter will thus cut out the spaces in the wheel, and must therefore be of a thickness equal to those spaces. The cutter worm acting as a screw causes the worm-wheel to rotate upon its axis, and therefore to feed to the cutter.

In wheels of fine pitch and small diameter this mode of procedure is a simple matter, especially if the form of tooth be such that it is thicker, as the root of the tooth is approached from the pitch line, because in that case the cutter worm may be entered a part of the depth in the worm-wheel and a cut be taken around the wheel. The cutter may then be moved farther into the wheel and a second cut taken around the wheel, so that by continuing the process until the pitch line of the cutter worm coincides with that of the worm-cutter, the worm-wheel may be cut with a number of light cuts, instead of at one heavy cut.

But in the case of large wheels the strain due to such a long line of cutting edge as is possessed by the cutter worm-teeth springs or bends the worm-wheel, and on account of the circular form of the breadth of the teeth this bending or spring causes that part of the tooth arc above the centre of the wheel thickness to lock against the cutter.

To prevent this, several means may be employed. Thus the grooves forming the cutting edges of the worm-cutter may wind spirally along instead of being parallel to the axis of the cutter.

The distance apart of these grooves may be greater than the breadth of tooth a width of worm-wheel face, in which case the cutting edge of one tooth only will meet the work at one time. In addition to this two stationary supports may be placed beneath the worm-wheel (one on each side of the cutter). But on coarse pitches with their corresponding depth of tooth, the difficulty presents itself, that the arbor driving the worm-cutter will spring, causing the cutter to lift and lock as before; hence it is necessary to operate on part of the space at a time, and shape it out to so nearly the correct form that the finishing cut may be a very light one indeed, in which case the worm-cutter will answer for the final cut.

The removal of the surplus metal preparatory to the introduction of the worm-cutter to finish, may be made with a cutter-worm that will cut out a narrow groove being of the thickness equal to the bottom of the tooth space and cutting on its circumference only. This cutter may be fed into the wheel to the permissible depth of cut, and after the cut is taken all around the wheel, it may be entered deeper and a second cut taken, and so on until it has entered the wheel to the necessary depth of tooth. A second cutter-worm may then be used, it being so shaped as to cut the face curve only of the teeth. A third may cut the flank curve only, and finally a worm-cutter of correct form may take a finishing cut over both the faces and the flanks. In this manner teeth of any pitch and depth may be cut. Another method is to use a revolving cutter such as shown in Fig. 107, and to set it at the required angle to the wheel, and then take a succession of cuts around the wheel, the first cut forming a certain part of the tooth depth, the second increasing this depth, and so on until the[I-43] final cut forms the tooth to the requisite depth. In this case the cutter operates on each space separately, or on one space only at a time, and the angle at which to set the cutter may be obtained as follows in Fig. 114. Let the length of the line a a equal the diameter of the worm at the pitch circle, and b b (a line at a right angle to a a) represent the axial line of the worm. Let the distance c equal the pitch of the teeth, and the angle of the line d with a a or b b according to circumstances, will be that to which the cutter must be set with reference to the tooth.

Fig. 114

Fig. 114.

If then a piece of sheet metal be cut to the lines a, d, and the cutter so set that with the edge d of the piece held against the side face of the cutter (which must be flat or straight across), the edge a will stand truly vertical, and the cutter will be at the correct angle supposing the wheel to be horizontal.

Fig. 115

Fig. 115.

Fig. 116

Fig. 116.

Fig. 117

Fig. 117.

Fig. 118

Fig. 118.

In making patterns wherefrom gear-wheels may be cast in a mould, the true curves are frequently represented by arcs of circles struck from the requisite centres and of the most desirable radius with compasses, and this will be treated after explaining the pattern maker’s method of obtaining true curves by rolling segments by hand. If, then, the wheels are of small diameter, as say, less than 12 inches in diameter, and precision is required, it is best to turn in the lathe wooden disks representing in their diameters the base and generating circles. But otherwise, wooden segments to answer the same purpose may be made as from a piece of soft wood, such as pine or cedar, about three-eighths inch thick, make two pieces a and b, in Fig. 115, and trim the edges c and d to the circle of the pitch line of the required wheel. If the diameter of the pitch circle is marked on a drawing, the pieces may be laid on the drawing and sighted for curvature by the eye. In the absence of a drawing, strike a portion of the pitch circle with a pair of sharp-pointed compasses on a piece of zinc, which will show a very fine line quite clear. After the pieces are filed to the circle, try them together by laying them flat on a piece of board, bringing the curves in contact and sweeping a against b, and the places of contact will plainly show, and may be filed until continuous contact along the curves is obtained. Take another similar piece of wood and form it as shown in Fig. 116, the edge e representing a portion of the rolling circle. In preparing these segments it is an excellent plan to file the convex edges, as shown in Fig. 117, in which p is a piece of iron or wood having its surface s trued; f is a file held firmly to s, while its surface stands vertical, and t is the template laid flat on s, while swept against the file. This insures that the edge shall be square across or at least at the same angle all around, which is all that is absolutely necessary. It is better, however, that the edges be square. So likewise in fitting a and b (Fig. 115) together, they should be laid flat on a piece of board. This will insure that they will have contact clear across the edge, which will give more grip and make slip less likely when using the segments. Now take a piece of stiff drawing paper or of sheet zinc, lay segment a upon it, and mark a line coincident with the curved edge. Place the segment representing the generating circle flat on the paper or zinc, hold its edge against segment a, and roll it around a sufficient distance to give as much of the curve as may be required; the operation being illustrated in Fig. 118, in which a is the segment representing the pitch or base circle, e is the segment representing the generating circle, p is the paper, c the curve struck by the tracing point or pencil o.

This tracing point should be, if paper be used to trace on, a piece of the hardest pencil obtainable, and should be filed so that its edge, if flat, shall stand as near as may be in the line of motion when rolled, thus marking a fine line. If sheet zinc be used instead of paper a needle makes an excellent tracing point. Several of the curves, c, should be struck, moving the position of the generating segment a little each time.

Fig. 119

Fig. 119.

On removing the segments from the paper, there will appear the lines shown in Fig. 119; a representing the pitch circle, and o o o the curves struck by the tracing point.

Fig. 120

Fig. 120.

[I-44]Cut out a piece of sheet zinc so that its edge will coincide with the curve a and the epicycloid o, trying it with all four of the epicycloids to see that no slip has occurred when marking them; shape a template as shown in Fig. 120. Cutting the notches at a b, acts to let the file clear well when filing the template, and to allow the scriber to go clear into the corner. Now take the segment a in Fig. 118, and use it as a guide to carry the pitch circle across the template as at p, in Fig. 120. A zinc template for the flank curve is made after the same manner, using the rolling segment in conjunction with the segment b in Fig. 115.

Fig. 121

Fig. 121.

But the form of template for the flank should be such as shown in Fig. 121, the curve p representing, and being of the same radius as the pitch circle, and the curve f being that of the hypocycloid. Both these templates are set to the pitch circles and to coincide with the marks made on the wheel teeth to denote the thickness, and with a hardened steel point a line is traced on the tooth showing the correct curve for the same.

Fig. 122

Fig. 122.

An experienced hand will find no difficulty in producing true templates by this method, but to avoid all possibility of the segments slipping on coarse pitches, and with large segments, the segments may be connected, as shown in Fig. 122, in which o represents a strip of steel fastened at one end into one segment and at the other end to the other segment. Sometimes, indeed, where great accuracy is requisite, two pieces of steel are thus employed, the second one being shown at p p, in the figure. The surfaces of these pieces should exactly coincide with the edge of the segments.

Fig. 123

Fig. 123.

Fig. 124

Fig. 124.

The curve templates thus produced being shaped to apply to the pitch circle may be correctly applied to that circle independently of its concentricity to the wheel axis or of the points of the teeth, but if the points of the teeth are turned in the lathe so as to be true (that is, concentric to the wheel axis) the form of the template may be such as shown in Fig. 123, the radius of the arc a a equalling that of the addendum circle or circumference at the points of the teeth, and the width at b (the pitch circle) equaling the width of a space instead of the thickness of a tooth. The curves on each side of the template may in this case be filed for the full side of a tooth on each side of the template so that it will completely fill the finished space, or the sides of two contiguous teeth may be marked at one operation. This template may be set to the marks made on the teeth at the pitch circle to denote their requisite thickness, or for greater accuracy, a similar template made double so as to fill two finished tooth spaces may be employed, the advantage being that in this case the template also serves to mark or test the thickness of the teeth. Since, however, a double template is difficult to make, a more simple method is to provide for the thickness of a tooth, the template shown in Fig. 124, the width from a to b being either the thickness of tooth required or twice the thickness of a tooth plus the width of a space, so that it may be applied to the outsides of two contiguous teeth. The arc c may be made both in its radius and distance from the pitch circle d d to equal that of the addendum circle, so as to serve as a gauge for the tooth points, if the latter are not turned true in the lathe, or to rest on the addendum circle[I-45] (if the teeth points are turned true), and adjust the pitch circle d d to the pitch circle on the wheel.

The curves for the template must be very carefully filed to the lines produced by the rolling segments, because any error in the template is copied on every tooth marked from it. Furthermore, instead of drawing the pitch circle only, the addendum circle and circle for the roots of the teeth or spaces should also be drawn, so that the template may be first filed to them, and then adjusted to them while filing the edges to the curves.

Fig. 125

Fig. 125.

Fig. 126

Fig. 126.

Another form of template much used is shown in Fig. 125. The curves a and b are filed to the curve produced by rolling segments as before, and the holes c, d, e, are for fastening the template to an arm, such as shown in Fig. 126, which represents a section of a wheel w, with a plug p, fitting tightly into the hub h of the wheel. This plug carries at its centre a cylindrical pin on which pivots the arm a. The template t is fastened to the arm by screws, and set so that its pitch circle coincides with the pitch circle p on the wheel, when the curves for one side of all the teeth may be marked. The template must then be turned over to mark the other side of the teeth.

The objection to this form of template is that the length of arc representing the pitch circle is too short, for it is absolutely essential that the pitch line on the template (or line representing the arc of the addendum if that be used) be greater than the width of a single tooth, because an error of the thickness of a line (in the thickness of a tooth), in the coincidence of the pitch line of the template with that of the tooth, would throw the tooth curves out to an extent altogether inadmissible where true work is essential.

Fig. 127

Fig. 127.

To overcome this objection the template may be made to equal half the thickness of a tooth and its edge filed to represent a radial line on the wheel. But there are other objections, as, for example, that the template can only be applied to the wheel when adjusted on the arm shown in Fig. 126, unless, indeed, a radial line be struck on every tooth of the wheel. Again, to produce the template a radial line representing the radius of the wheel must be produced, which is difficult where segments only are used to produce the curves. It is better, therefore, to form the template as shown in Fig. 127, the projections at a b having their edges filed to coincide with the pitch circle p, so that they may be applied to a length of one arc of pitch circle at least equal to the pitch of the teeth.

The templates for the tooth curves being obtained, the wheel must be divided off on the pitch circle for the thickness of the teeth and the width of the spaces, and the templates applied to the marks or points of division to serve as guides to mark the tooth curves. Since, however, as already stated, the tooth curves are as often struck by arcs of circles as by templates, the application of such arcs and their suitability may be discussed.

Marking the Curves by Hand.

In the employment of arcs of circles several methods of finding the necessary radius are found in practice.

Fig. 128

Fig. 128.

In the best practice the true curve is marked by the rolling segments already described, and the compass points are set by trial to that radius which gives an arc nearest approaching to the true face and flank curves respectively. The degree of curve error thus induced is sufficient that the form of tooth produced cannot with propriety be termed epicycloidal teeth, except in the case of fine pitches in which the arc of a circle may be employed to so nearly approach the true curve as to be permissible as a substitute. But in coarse pitches the error is of much importance. Thus in Fig. 128 is shown the curve of the former or template attachment used on the celebrated Corliss Bevel Gear Cutting Machine, to cut the teeth on the bevel-wheels employed upon the line shafting at the Centennial Exhibition. These gears, it may[I-46] be remarked, were marvels of smooth and noiseless running, and attracted wide attention both at home and abroad. The engraving is made from a drawing marked direct from the former itself, and kindly furnished me by Mr. George H. Corliss. a a is the face and b b the flank of the tooth, c c is the arc of a circle nearest approaching to the face curve, and d d the arc of a circle nearest approaching the flank curve. In the face curve, there are but two points where the circle coincides with the true curve, while in the flank there are three such points; a circle of smaller radius than c c would increase the error at b, but decrease it at a; one of a greater radius would decrease it at b, and increase it at a. Again, a circle larger in radius than d d would decrease the error at e and increase it at f; while one smaller would increase it at e and decrease it at f. Only the working part of the tooth is given in the illustration, and it will be noted that the error is greatest in the flank, although the circle has three points of coincidence.

In this case the depth of the former tooth is about three and three-quarter times greater than the depth of tooth cut on the bevel-wheels; hence, in the figure the actual error is magnified three and three-quarter times. It demonstrates, however, the impropriety of calling coarsely pitched teeth that are found by arcs of circles “epicycloidal” teeth.

When, however, the pitches of the teeth are fine as, say an inch or less, the coincidence of an arc of a circle with the true curve is sufficiently near for nearly all practical purposes, and in the case of cast gear the amount of variation in a pitch of 2 inches would be practically inappreciable.

To obtain the necessary set of the compasses to mark the curves, the following methods may be employed.

Fig. 129

Fig. 129.

First by rolling the true curves with segments as already described, and the setting the compass points (by trial) to that radius which gives an arc nearest approaching the true curves. In this operation it is not found that the location for the centre from which the curve must be struck always falls on the pitch circle, and since that location will for every tooth curve lie at the same radius from the wheel centre it is obvious that after the proper location for one of the curves, as for the first tooth face or tooth flank as the case may be, is found, a circle may be struck denoting the radius of the location for all the teeth. In Fig. 129, for example, p p represents the pitch circle, a b the radius that will produce an arc nearest approaching the true curve produced by rolling segments, and a the location of the centre from which the face arc b should be struck. The point a being found by trial with the compasses applied to the curve b, the circle a c may be struck, and the location for the centres from which the face arcs of each tooth must be struck will also fall on this circle, and all that is necessary is to rest one point of the compasses on the side of the tooth as, say at e, and mark on the second circle a c the point c, which is the location wherefrom to mark the face arc d.

Fig. 130

Fig. 130.

If the teeth flanks are not radial, the locations of the centre wherefrom to strike the flank curves are found in like manner by trial of the compasses with the true curves, and a third circle, as i in Fig. 130, is struck to intersect the first point found, as at g in the figure. Thus there will be upon the wheel face three circles, p p the pitch circle, j j wherefrom to mark the face curves, and i wherefrom to mark the flank curves.

Fig. 131

Fig. 131.

When this method is pursued a little time may be saved, when dividing off the wheel, by dividing it into as many divisions as there are teeth in the wheel, and then find the locations for the curves as in Fig. 131, in which 1, 2, 3 are points of divisions on the pitch circle p p, while a, b, struck from point 2, are centres wherefrom to strike the arcs e, f; c, d, struck also from point 2 are centres wherefrom to strike the flank curves g, h.

It will be noted that all the points serving as centres for the face curves, in Fig. 130, fall within a space; hence if the teeth were rudely cast in the wheel, and were to be subsequently cut or trimmed to the lines, some provision would have to be made to receive the compass points.

To obviate the necessity of finding the necessary radius from rolling segments various forms of construction are sometimes employed.

Fig. 132

Fig. 132.

Thus Rankine gives that shown in Fig. 132, which is obtained as follows. Draw the generating circle d, and a d the line of centres. From the point of contact at c, mark on circle d, a point distance from c one-half the amount of the pitch, as at p, and draw the line p c of indefinite length beyond c. Draw a line from p, passing through the line of centres at e, which is[I-47] equidistant between c and a. Then multiply the length from p to c by the distance from a to d, and divide by the distance between d and e. Take the length and radius so found, and mark it upon p c, as at f, and the latter will be the location of centre for compasses to strike the face curve.

Fig. 133

Fig. 133.

Another method of finding the face curve, with compasses, is as follows: In Fig. 133, let p p represent the pitch circle of the wheel to be marked, and b c the path of the centre of the generating or describing circle as it rolls outside of p p. Let the point b represent the centre of the generating circle when that circle is in contact with the pitch circle at a. Then from b, mark off on b c any number of equidistant points, as d, e, f, g, h, and from a, mark on the pitch circle, points of division, as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, at the intersection of radial lines from d, e, f, g, and h. With the radius of the generating circle, that is, a b, from b, as a centre, mark the arc i, from d the arc j, from e the arc k, &c., to m, marking as many arcs as there are points of division on b c. With the compasses set to the radius of divisions 1, 2, step off on arc m the five divisions, n, o, s, t, v, and v will be a point in the epicycloidal curves. From point of division 4, step off on l four points of division, as a, b, c, d, and d will be another point in the epicycloidal curve. From point 3 set off three divisions on k, from point 2 two dimensions on l, and so on, and through the points so obtained, draw by hand or with a scroll the curve represented in the cut by curve a v.

Fig. 134

Fig. 134.

Hypocycloids for the flanks of the teeth may be traced in a similar manner. Thus in Fig. 134 p p is the pitch circle, and b c the line of motion of the centre of the generating circle to be rolled within p p, and r a radial line. From 1 to 6 are points of equal division on the pitch circle, and d to i are arc locations for the centre of the generating circle. Starting from a, which represents the supposed location for the centre of the generating circle, the point of contact between the generating and base circles will be at b. Then from 1 to 6 are points of equal division on the pitch circle, and from d to i are the corresponding locations for the centres of the generating circle. From these centres the arcs j, k, l, m, n, o, are struck. From 6 mark the six points of division from a to f, and f is a point in the curve. Five divisions on n, four on m, and so on, give respectively points in the curve which is marked in the figure from a to f.

There is this, however, to be noted concerning the constructions of the last two figures. Since the circle described by the centre of the generating circle is of different arc or curve to that of the pitch circle, the chord of an arc having an equal length on each will be different. The amount is so small as to be practically correct. The direction of the error is to give to the curves a less curvature, as though they had been produced by a generating circle of larger diameter. Suppose, for example, that the difference between the arc n 5 (Fig. 133) and its chord is .1, and that the difference between the arc 4 5, and its chord is .01, then the error in one step is .09, and, as the point v is formed in 5 steps, it will contain this error multiplied five times. Point d would contain it multiplied four times, because it has 4 steps, and so on.

The error will increase in proportion as the diameter of the generating is less than that of the pitch circle, and though in large wheels, working with large wheels (so that the difference between the radius of the generating circle and that of the smallest wheel is not excessive), it is so small as to be practically inappreciable, yet in small wheels, working with large ones, it may form a sensible error.

 
  TABLE SHOWING THE PLACE OF THE CENTRES UPON THE SCALE.  
  CENTRES FOR THE FLANKS OF THE TEETH.  
  PITCH IN INCHES AND PARTS.  
  Number
of
teeth.
 14   38   12   58   34  1 114 112 134 2 214 212 3 312  
  13 32 48 64 80 96 129 160 193 225 257 289 321 386 450  
  14 17 26 35 43 52 69 87 104 121 139 156 173 208 242  
  15 12 18 25 31 37 49 62 74 86 99 111 123 148 173  
  16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 59 69 79 89 99 119 138  
  17 8 13 17 21 25 34 43 50 59 67 75 84 101 117  
  18 7 11 15 19 22 30 37 45 52 59 67 74 89 104  
  19 ... 10 13 17 20 27 35 40 47 54 60 67 80 94  
  20 6 9 12 16 19 25 31 37 43 49 56 62 74 86  
  22 5 8 11 14 16 22 27 33 39 43 49 54 65 76  
  24 ... 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 49 59 69  
  26 ... ... 9 11 14 18 23 27 32 37 41 46 55 64  
  28 4 6 ... ... 13 ... 22 26 30 35 40 43 52 60  
  30 ... ... 8 10 12 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 49 58  
  35 ... ... ... 9 11 16 19 23 26 30 34 38 45 53  
  40 ... 5 7 ... ... 15 18 21 25 28 32 35 42 49  
  60 3 ... 6 8 9 13 15 19 22 25 28 31 37 43  
  80 ... 4 ... 7 ... 12 ... 17 20 23 26 29 35 41  
  100 ... ... ... ... 8 11 14 ... ... 22 25 28 34 39  
  150 ... ... 5 ... ... ... 13 16 19 21 24 27 32 38  
  Rack. 2 ... ... 6 7 10 12 15 17 20 22 25 30 34  
 

Fig. 135.

An instrument much employed in the best practice to find the radius which will strike an arc of a circle approximating the true epicycloidal curve, and for finding at the same time the location of the centre wherefrom that curve should be struck, is found in the Willis’ odontograph. This is, in reality, a scale of centres or radii for different and various diameters of wheels and generating circles. It consists of a scale, shown in Fig. 135, and is formed of a piece of sheet metal, one edge of which is marked or graduated in divisions of one-twentieth of an inch. The edge meeting the graduated edge at o is at angle of 75° to the graduated edge.

On one side of the odontograph is a table (as shown in the cut), for the flanks of the teeth, while on the other is the following table for the faces of the teeth:

TABLE SHOWING THE PLACE OF THE CENTRES UPON THE SCALE.

CENTRES FOR THE FACES OF THE TEETH.

Pitch in Inches and Parts.

No. of
Teeth
14 38 12 58 34 1 114 112 134 2 214 212 3 312
12 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 17
15 .. .. 3 .. .. .. 7 8 10 11 12 14 17 19
20 2 .. .. 4 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15 18 21
30 .. 3 4 .. .. 7 9 10 12 14 16 18 21 25
40 .. .. .. .. 6 8 .. 11 13 15 17 19 23 26
60 .. .. .. 5 .. .. 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 29
80 .. .. .. .. .. 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 26 30
100 .. .. .. .. 7 .. .. .. .. 18 20 22 .. 31
150 .. .. 5 6 .. .. .. 14 16 19 21 23 27 32
Rack. .. 4 .. .. .. 10 12 15 17 20 22 25 30 34
Fig. 136

Fig. 136.

[I-48]The method of using the instrument is as follows: In Fig. 136, let c represent the centre, and p the pitch circle of a wheel to contain 30 teeth of 3 inch arc pitch. Draw the radial line l, meeting the pitch circle at a. From a mark on the pitch circle, as at b, a radius equal to the pitch of the teeth, and the thickness of the tooth as a k. Draw from b to c the radial line e. Then for the flanks place the slant edge of the odontograph coincident and parallel with e, and let its corners coincide with the pitch circle as shown. In the table headed centres for the flanks of the teeth, look down the column of 3 inch pitch, and opposite to the 30 in the column of numbers of teeth, will be found the number 49, which indicates that the centre from which to draw an arc for the flank is at 49 on the graduated edge of the odontograph, as denoted in the cut by r. Thus from r to the side k of the tooth is the radius for the compasses, and at r, or 49, is the location for the centre to strike the flank curve f. For the face curve set the slant edge of the odontograph coincident with the radial line l, and in the table of centres for the faces of teeth, look down the column of 3-inch pitch, and opposite to 30 in the number of teeth column will be found the number 21, indicating that at 21 on the graduated edge of the odontograph, is the location of the centre wherefrom to strike the curve d for the face of the tooth, this location being denoted in the cut at r.

The requisite number on the graduated edge for pitches beyond 312 (the greatest given in the tables), may be obtained by direct proportion from those given in the tables. Thus for 4 inch pitch, by doubling the numbers given for a 2 inch pitch, containing the same number of teeth, for 412 inch pitch by doubling the numbers given for a 214 inch pitch. If the pitch be a fraction that cannot be so obtained, no serious error will be induced if the nearest number marked be taken.

Fig. 137

Fig. 137.

An improved form of template odontograph, designed by Professor Robinson of the Illinois School of Industry, is shown in Fig. 137.

In this instrument the curved edge, having graduated lines, approaches more nearly to the curves produced by rolling circles than can be obtained from any system in which an arc of a circle is taken to represent the curve; hence, that edge is applied direct to the teeth and used as a template wherefrom to mark the curve. The curve is a logarithmic spiral, and the use of the instrument involves no other labor than that of setting it in position. The applicability of this curve, for the purpose, arises from two of its properties: first, that the involute of the logarithmic spiral is another like spiral with poles in common; and, second, that the obliquity or angle between a normal and radius sector is constant, the latter property being possessed by this curve only. By the first property it is known that a line, lying tangent to the curve c e h, will be normal or perpendicular to[I-49] the curve c d b; so that when the line d e f is tangent to the pitch line, the curve a d b will coincide very closely with the true epicycloidal curve, or, rather, with that portion of it which is applied to the tooth curve of the wheel. By the second quality, all sectors of the spiral, with given angle at the poles, are similar figures which admit of the same degree of coincidence for all similar epicycloids, whether great or small, and nearly the same for epicycloids in general; thus enabling the application of the instrument to epicycloids in general.

To set the instrument in position for drawing a tooth face a table which accompanies the instrument is used. From this table a numerical value is taken, which value depends upon the diameters of the wheels, and the number of teeth in the wheel for which the curve is sought. This tabular value, when multiplied by the pitch of the teeth, is to be found on the graduated edge on the instrument a d b in Fig. 137. This done, draw the line d e f tangent to the pitch line at the middle of the tooth, and mark off the half thickness of the tooth, as e, d, either on the tangent line or the pitch line. Then place the graduated edge of the odontograph at d, and in such a position that the number and division found as already stated shall come precisely on the tangent line at d, and at the same time so set the curved edge h f c so that it shall be tangent to the tangent line, that is to say, the curved edge c h must just meet the tangent line at some one point, as at f in the figure. A line drawn coincident with the graduated edge will then mark the face curve required, and the odontograph may be turned over, and the face on the other side of the tooth marked from a similar setting and process.

Fig. 138

Fig. 138.

For the flanks of the teeth setting numbers are obtained from a separate table, and the instrument is turned upside down, and the tangent line d f, Fig. 137, is drawn from the side of the tooth (instead of from the centre), as shown in Fig. 138.

It is obvious that this odontograph may be set upon a radial arm and used as a template, as shown in Fig. 126, in which case the instrument would require but four settings for the whole wheel, while rolling segments and the making of templates are entirely dispensed with, and the degree of accuracy is greater than is obtainable by means of the employment of arcs of circles.

The tables wherefrom to find the number or mark on the graduated edge, which is to be placed coincident with the tangent line in each case, are as follows:—

TABLE OF TABULAR VALUES WHICH, MULTIPLIED BY THE ARC PITCH OF THE TEETH, GIVES THE SETTING NUMBER ON THE GRADUATED EDGE OF THE INSTRUMENT.

Ratios.[7] Number of Teeth in Wheel Sought; or, Wheel for Which Teeth are Sought.
8 12 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 200 300 500
For Faces: Flanks Radial or Curved.
Draw Setting Tangent at Middle of Tooth.—Epicycloidal Spur or Bevel Gearing.
  112  =  .083 .32 .39 .46 .51                          
  14  =  .250 .31 .37 .44 .49 .61 .70 .78 .85 .92 .99 1.05 1.11 1.22 1.36 1.55 1.94 2.54
  12  =  .500 .28 .34 .41 .46 .57 .66 .73 .80 .87 .93 1.00 1.06 1.15 1.29 1.50 1.86 2.41
  23  =  .667 .27 .32 .38 .43 .54 .62 .70 .77 .83 .89 .95 1.01 1.11 1.24 1.45 1.79 2.32
  1     .23 .28 .34 .39 .49 .58 .65 .72 .78 .83 .89 .94 1.03 1.15 1.36 1.65 2.10
  32  =  1.50 .19 .25 .29 .34 .44 .51 .58 .64 .69 .74 .79 .84 .93 1.05 1.25 1.53 1.94
  2     .17 .22 .26 .30 .38 .46 .53 .59 .63 .68 .72 .76 .84 .95 1.13 1.40 1.81
  3       .16 .19 .23 .31 .38 .44 .49 .53 .57 .60 .63 .71 .82 .97 1.23 1.60
  4       .14 .17 .20 .26 .33 .38 .42 .46 .49 .53 .56 .63 .73 .87 1.08 1.42
  6             .22 .26 .30 .34 .37 .41 .44 .47 .53 .61 .71 .90 1.20
  12               .20 .23 .25 .28 .30 .32 .34 .37 .42 .49 .60 .82
  24                         .19 .21 .23 .26 .31 .40 .57
  For Flanks, when Curved.
Draw Setting Tangent at Side of Tooth.—Epicycloidal Spur and Bevel Gearing. Faces of Internal, and Flanks of Pinion Teeth.
De- 1.5 slight. .77 .98 1.18 1.36 1.75 2.05 2.31 2.56 2.75 2.92 3.08 3.24 3.52 3.87 4.51 5.50 7.20
gree 2 good. .44 .54 .63 .72 .92 1.09 1.24 1.38 1.49 1.59 1.79 1.79 1.98 2.23 2.67 3.22 4.50
of 3 more. .20 .28 .35 .40 .54 .65 .76 .86 .95 1.02 1.10 1.18 1.31 1.46 1.67 2.08 2.76
flank 4 much.   .20 .23 .25 .34 .42 .51 .59 .66 .71 .77 .82 .92 1.06 1.25 1.64 2.15
cur- 6       .16 .17 .26 .32 .38 .43 .48 .52 .56 .60 .66 .76 .93 1.20 1.54
va- 12           .19 .24 .28 .31 .34 .36 .38 .40 .45 .52 .63 .80 .98
ture 24                         .22 .25 .28 .33 .47 .60
For Faces of Racks; and of Pinions for Racks and Internal Gears; for Flanks of Internal and Sides of Involute Teeth.
Draw Setting Tangent at Middle of Tooth, regarding Space as Tooth in Internal Teeth. For Rack use Number of Teeth in Pinion.
Pinion. .31 .39 .48 .57 .73 .88 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.48 1.65 1.85 2.15 2.65 3.50
Rack. .32 .38 .44 .50 .62 .72 .80 .87 .93 .99 1.03 1.08 1.16 1.27 1.49 1.86 2.44

[7] These ratios are obtained by dividing the radius of the wheel sought by the diameter of the generating circle.

From these tables may be found a tabular value which, multiplied by the pitch of the wheel to be marked (as stated at the head of the table), will give the setting number on the graduated edge of the instrument, the procedure being as follows:—

For the teeth of a pair of wheels intended to gear together only (and not with other wheels having a different number of teeth).

For the face of such teeth where the flanks are to be radial lines.

Rule.—Divide the pitch circle radius of the wheel to have its teeth marked by the pitch circle radius of the wheel with which it is to gear: or, what is the same thing, divide the number of teeth in the wheel to have its teeth marked by the number of teeth in the wheel with which it is to gear, and the quotient is the “ratio.” In the ratio column find this number, and look along that line, and in the column at the head of which is the number of teeth contained in the wheel to be marked, is a number termed the tabular value, which, multiplied by the arc pitch of the teeth, will give the number on the graduated edge by which to set the instrument to the tangent line.

Example.—What is the setting number for the face curves of a wheel to contain 12 teeth, of 3-inch arc pitch, and to gear with a wheel having 24 teeth?

Here number of teeth in wheel to be marked = 12, divided by the number of teeth (24) with which it gears; 12 ÷ 24 = .5. Now in column of ratios may be found 12 = .500 (which is the same thing as .5), and along the same horizontal line in the table, and in the column headed 12 (the number of teeth in the wheel) is found .34. This is the tabular value, which, multiplied by 3 (the arc[I-50] pitch of the teeth), gives 1.02, which is the setting number on the graduated edge. It will be noted, however, that the graduated edge is marked 1, 2, 3, &c., and that between each consecutive division are ten subdivisions; hence, for the decimal .02 an allowance may be made by setting the line 1 a proportionate amount below the tangent line marked on the wheel to set the instrument by.

Required now the setting number for the wheel to have the 24 teeth.

Here number of teeth on the wheel = 24, divided by the number of teeth (12) on the wheel with which it gears; 24 ÷ 12 = 2. Now, there is no column in the “number of teeth sought” for 24 teeth; but we may find the necessary tabular value from the columns given for 20 teeth and 30 teeth, thus:—opposite ratio 2, and under 20 teeth is given .30, and under 30 teeth is given .38—the difference between the two being .08. Now the difference between 20 teeth and 24 teeth is 410; hence, we take 410 of the .08 and add it to the tabular value given for 20 teeth, thus: .08 × 4 ÷ 10 = .032, and this added to .30 (the tabular value given for 20 teeth = .33, which is the tabular value for 24 teeth). The .33 multiplied by arc pitch (3) gives .99. This, therefore, is the setting number for the instrument, being sufficiently near to the 1 on the graduated edge to allow that 1 to be used instead of .99.

It is to be noted here that the pinion, having radial lines, the other wheel must have curved flanks; the rule for which is as follows:—

CURVED FLANKS FOR A PAIR OF WHEELS.

Note.—When the flanks are desired to be curved instead of radial, it is necessary to the use of the instrument to select and assume a value for the degree of curve, as is done in the table in the column marked “Degree for flank curving;” in which

1.5 slight—a slight curvature of flank.
2 good—an increased curvature of flank.
3 more—a degree of pronounced spread at root.
4 much—spread at root is a distinguishing feature of tooth form.
6—still increased spread in cases where the strength at root of pinion is of much importance to give strength.
12—as above, under aggravated conditions.
24—undesirable (unless requirement of strength compels this degree), because of excessive strain on pinion.

Rule.—For faces of teeth to have curved flanks.

Divide the number of teeth in the wheel to be marked by the number of teeth in the wheel with which it gears, and multiply by the degree of flank curve selected for the wheel with which that to be marked is to gear, and this will give the ratio. Find this number in ratio column, and the tabular number under the column of number of teeth of wheel to be marked; multiply tabular number so found by arc pitch of wheel to be marked, and the product will be the setting number for the instrument.

Example.—What is the setting number on the graduated edge of the odontograph for the faces of a wheel (of a pair) to contain 12 teeth of 2-inch arc pitch, and to gear with a wheel having 24 teeth and a flank curvature represented by 3 in “Degree of flank curving” column?

Here teeth in wheel to be marked (12) divided by number of teeth in the wheel it is to gear with (24), 12 ÷ 24 = .5, which multiplied by 3 (degree of curvature selected for flanks of 24-teeth wheel), .5 × 3 = 1.5. In column of ratio numbers find 1.5, and in 12-teeth column is .25, which multiplied by pitch (2) gives .5 as the setting number for the instrument; this being the fifth line on the instrument, and half way between the end and mark 1.

For Curved Flanks.

[I-51]Rule.—Assume the degree of curve desired for the flanks to be marked, select the corresponding value in the column of “Degrees of flank curving,” and find the tabular value under the number of teeth column.

Multiply tabular value so found by the arc pitch of the teeth, and the product is the setting number on the instrument.

Example.—What is the setting number on the odontograph for the flanks of a wheel to contain 12 teeth and gear with one having 24 teeth, the degree of curvature for the flanks being represented by 4 in the column of “Degree of flank curvature?”

Here in column of degrees of flank curvature on the 3 line and under 12 teeth is .20, which multiplied by pitch of teeth (2) is .20 × 2 = 40, or 410; hence, the fourth line of division on the curved corner is the setting line, it representing 410 of 1.

For Interchangeable Gearing (that is, a Train of Gears any one of which will work correctly with any other of the same set).

Rule—both for the faces and for the flanks. For each respective wheel divide the number of teeth in that wheel by some one number not greater than the number of teeth in the smallest wheel in the set, which gives the ratio number for the wheel to be marked. On that line of ratio numbers, and in the column of numbers of teeth, find the tabular value number; multiply this by the arc pitch of the wheel to be marked, and the product is the setting number of the instrument.

Example.—A set of wheels is to contain 10 wheels; the smallest is to contain 12 teeth; the arc pitch of the wheels is four inches. What is the setting number for the smallest wheel?

Here number of teeth in smallest wheel of set is 10; divide this by any number smaller than itself (as say 5), 10 ÷ 5 = 2 = the ratio number on ratio line for 2; and under column for 12 is .17, which is the tabular value, which multiplied by pitch (4) is .17 × 4 = 68, or 610 and 8100; hence, the instrument must be set with its seventh line of division just above the tangent line marked on the wheel. It will be noted that, if the seventh line were used as the setting, the adjustment would be only the 2100 of a division out, an amount scarcely practically appreciable.

Both for the faces and flanks, the second number is obtained in precisely the same manner for every wheel in the set, except that instead of 10 the number of teeth in each wheel must be substituted.

Rack and Pinion.—For radial flanks use for faces the two lower lines of table. For curved flanks find tabular value for pinion faces in lowest line. For flanks of pinion choose degree of curving, and find tabular value under “flanks,” as for other wheels. For faces of rack divide number of teeth in pinion by degree of curving, which take for number of teeth in looking opposite “rack.” Flanks of rack are still parallel, but may be arbitrarily curved beyond half way below pitch line.

Internal Gears.—For tooth curves within the pitch lines, divide radius of each wheel by any number not greater than radius of pinion, and look in the table under “flanks.” For curves outside pitch line use lower line of table; or, divide radii by any number and look under “faces.” In applying instrument draw tangents at middle and side of space, for internal teeth.

Involute Teeth.—For tabular values look opposite “Pinion,” under proper number of teeth, for each wheel. Draw setting tangent from “base circle” of involute, at middle of tooth. For this the instrument gives the whole side of tooth at once.

In all cases multiply the tabular value by the pitch in inches.

Bevel-Wheels.—Apply above rules, using the developed normal cone bases as pitch lines. For right-angled axes this is done by using in place of the actual ratio of radii, or of teeth numbers, the square of that ratio; and for number of teeth, the actual number multiplied by the square root of one plus square of ratio or radii; the numerator of ratio, and number of teeth, belonging to wheel sought.

When the first column ratio and teeth numbers fall between those given in the table, the tabular values are found by interpolating as seen in the following examples:

EXAMPLES OF TABULAR VALUES AND SETTING NUMBERS.

Take a pair of 16 and 56 teeth; radii 5.09 and 17.82 inches respectively; and 2 inches pitch.

Kind of Gearing. Number
of Teeth.
} Kind of Flank. Ratio
Radii.
First Column Ratio. Tab. Val.
Flank. Face. Flank. Face.
Epicycloidal, } Small   Radial   . 29 Radial . 29 .. .44
Radial Flanks Large   Radial   3. 5 Radial 3. 5 .. .44
Epicycloidal, } Small   Curved 2 deg.   . .29 2 . 87 .63 .36
Curved Flanks. Large   Curved 3 deg. } 3. 5 3 7.   .82 .30
Epicycloidal, } Small   “Sets,” Divide 2.   2 2.   .63 .26
Interchange’bl. Large   Radii by 2.55 7.   7 7.   .40 .30
Epicycloidal, } Pinion   Curved 2 deg.     2 Pinion .63 .44
Internal. Wheel   Int. face 7 deg.   3. 5 Pinion 7 [8] .84 .39
Epicycloidal, } Pinion   Curved 2 deg.     2 Pinion .63 .44
Rack & Pinion. Rack   Parallel     Parallel Rack .. .31
Involute } Small   Face and Flank     Pinion. .44
Gearing. Large   One Curve     Pinion. .84

[8] The face being here internal, the tabular value is to be found under “flanks.” If bevels, use ratio radii .082 and 12.25; and teeth numbers 16.6 and 203.8 respectively.

Walker’s Patent Wheel Scale.—This scale is used in many manufactories in the United States to mark off the teeth for patterns, wherefrom to mould cast gears, and consists of a diagram from which the compasses may be set to the required radius to strike the curves of the teeth.

Fig. 139

Fig. 139.

The general form of this diagram is shown in Fig. 139. From[I-52] the portion a the length of the teeth, according to the pitch, is obtained. From the portion b half the thickness of the tooth at the pitch line is obtained. From the part c half the thickness at the root is obtained, and from the part d half the thickness at the point is obtained.

Fig. 140

Fig. 140.

Fig. 141

Fig. 141.

Fig. 142

Fig. 142.

Each of these parts is marked with the number of teeth the wheel is to contain, and with the pitch of the teeth as shown in Fig. 140, which represents part c full size. Now suppose it is required to find the thickness at the root, for a tooth of a wheel having 60 teeth of one inch pitch, the circles from the point a, pitch line b and root c being drawn, and a radial line representing the middle of the tooth being marked, as is shown in Fig. 142, the compass points are set to the distance f b, Fig. 140f being at the junction of line 1 with line 60; the compasses are then rested at g, and the points h i are marked. Then, from the portion b, Fig. 139 of the diagram, which is shown full-size in Fig. 141, the compasses may be set to half the thickness at the pitch circle, as in this case (for ordinary teeth) from e to e, and the points j k, Fig. 142, are marked. By a reference to the portion d of the diagram, half the thickness of the tooth at the point is obtained, and marked as at l m in Fig. 142. It now remains to set compasses to the radius for the face and that for the flank curves, both of which may be obtained from the part a of the diagram. The locations of the centres, wherefrom to strike these curves, are obtained as in Fig. 142. The compasses set for the face curve are rested at h, and the arc n is struck; they are then rested at j and the arc o struck; and from the intersection of n o, as a centre, the face curve h j is marked. By a similar process, reference to the portion d of the diagram, half the thickness of the tooth at the point is obtained, and marked as at l m in Fig. 142. It now remains to set the compasses to the radius to strike the respective face and flank curves, and for this purpose the operator turns to the portion a, Fig. 139, of the diagram or scale, and sets the compasses from the marks on that portion to the required radii.

It now remains to find the proper location from which to strike the curves.

The face curve on the other side of the tooth is struck. The compasses set to the flank radius is then rested at m, and the arc p is marked and rested at k to mark the arc q; and from the intersection of p q, as a centre, the flank curve k m is marked: that on the other side of the tooth being marked in a similar manner.

Additional scales or diagrams, not shown in Fig. 139, give similar distances to set the compasses for the teeth of internal wheels and racks.

It now remains to explain the method whereby the author of the scale has obtained the various radii, which is as follows: A wheel of 200 teeth was given the form of tooth curve that would be obtained by rolling it upon another wheel, containing 200 teeth of the same pitch. It was next given the form of tooth that would be obtained by rolling upon it a wheel having 10 teeth of the same pitch, and a line intermediate between the two curves was taken as representing the proper curve for the large wheel.[I-53] The wheel having 10 teeth was then given the form of tooth that would be obtained by rolling upon it another wheel of the same diameter of pitch circle and pitch of teeth. It was next given the form of tooth that would be given by rolling upon it a wheel having 200 teeth, and a curve intermediate between the two curves thus obtained was taken as representing the proper curve for the pinion of 10 teeth. By this means the inventor does not claim to produce wheels having an exactly equal velocity ratio, but he claims that he obtains a curve that is the nearest approximation to the proper epicycloidal curve. The radii for the curves for all other numbers of teeth (between 10 and 200) are obtained in precisely the same manner, the pinion for each pitch being supposed to contain 10 teeth. Thus the scale is intended for interchangeable cast gears.

The nature of the scale renders it necessary to assume a constant height of tooth for all wheels of the same pitch, and this Mr. Walker has assumed as .40 of the pitch, from the pitch line to the base, and .35 from the pitch line to the point.

The curves for the faces obtained by this method have rather more curvature than would be due to the true epicycloid, which causes the points to begin and leave contact more easily than would otherwise be the case.

For a pair of wheels Mr. Walker strikes the face curve by a point on the pitch rolling circle, and the flanks by a point on the addendum circle, fastening a piece of wood to the pitch circle to carry the tracing point. The flank of each wheel is struck with a tracing point, thus attached to the pitch circle of the other wheel.

The proportions of teeth and of the spaces between them are usually given in turns of the pitch, so that all teeth of a given pitch shall have an equal thickness, height, and breadth, with an equal addendum and flank, and the same amount of clearance.

The term “clearance” as applied to gear-wheel teeth means the amount of space left between the teeth of one wheel, and the spaces in the other, or, in other words, the difference between the width of the teeth and that of the spaces between the teeth.

Fig. 143

Fig. 143.

This clearance exists at the sides of the teeth, as in Fig. 143, at a, and between the tops of the teeth and the bottoms or roots of the spaces as at b. When, however, the simple term clearance is employed it implies the side clearance as at a, the clearance at b being usually designated as top and bottom clearance. Clearance is necessary for two purposes; first, in teeth cut in a machine to accurate form and dimensions, to prevent the teeth of one wheel from binding in the spaces of the other, and second, in cast teeth, to allow for the imperfections in the teeth which are incidental to casting in a founder’s mould. In machine-cut teeth the amount of clearance is a minimum.

In wheels which are cast with their teeth complete and on the pattern, the amount of clearance must be a maximum, because, in the first place, the teeth on the pattern must be made taper to enable the extraction of the pattern from the mould without damage to the teeth in the mould, and the amount of this taper must be greater than in machine-moulded teeth, because the pattern cannot be lifted so truly vertical by hand as to avoid, in all cases, damage to the mould; in which case the moulder repairs the mould either with his moulding tools and by the aid of the eye, or else with a tooth and a space made on a piece of wood for the purpose. But even in this case the concentricity of the teeth is scarcely likely to be preserved.

It is obvious that by reason of this taper each wheel is larger in diameter on one side than on the other, hence to preserve the true curves to the teeth the pitch circle is made correspondingly smaller. But if in keying the wheels to their shafts the two large diameters of a pair of wheels be placed to work together, the teeth of the pair would have contact on that side of the wheel only, and to avoid this and give the teeth contact across their full breadth the wheels are so placed on their shafts that the large diameter of one shall work with the small one of the other, the amount of taper being the same in each wheel irrespective of their relative diameters. This also serves to keep the clearance equal in amount both top, and bottom, and sideways.

A second imperfection is that in order to loosen the pattern in the sand or mould, and enable its extraction by hand from the mould, the pattern requires to be rapped in the mould, the blows forcing back the sand of the mould and thus loosening the pattern. In ordinary practice the amount of this rapping is left entirely to the judgment of the moulder, who has nothing to guide him in securing an equal amount of pattern movement in each direction in the mould; hence, the finished mould may be of increased radius at the circumference in the direction in which the wheel moved most during the rapping. Again, the wood pattern is apt in time to shrink and become out of round, while even iron patterns are not entirely free from warping. Again, the cast metal is liable to contract in cooling more in one direction than in another. The amount of clearance usually allowed for pattern-moulded cast gearing is given by Professor Willis as follows:—Whole depth of tooth 710, of the pitch working depth 610; hence 110 of the pitch is allowed for top and bottom clearance, and this is the amount shown at b in Fig. 143. The amount of side clearance given by Willis as that ordinarily found in practice is as follows:—“Thickness of tooth 511 of the pitch; breadth of space 611; hence, the side clearance equals 111 of the pitch, which in a 3-inch pitch equals .27 of an inch in each wheel.” Calling this in round figures, which is near enough for our purpose, 14 inch, we have thickness of tooth 114, width of space 134, or 12 inch of clearance in a 3-inch pitch, an amount which on wheels of coarse pitch is evidently more than that necessary in view of the accuracy of modern moulding, however suitable it may have been for the less perfect practice of Professor Willis’s time. It is to be observed that the rapping of the pattern in the founder’s mould reduces the thickness of the teeth and increases the width of the spaces somewhat, and to that extent augments the amount of side clearance allowed on the pattern, and the amount of clearance thus obtained would be nearly sufficient for a small wheel, as say of 2 inches diameter. It is further to be observed that the amount of rapping is not proportionate to the diameter of the wheel; thus, in a wheel of 2 inches diameter, the rapping would increase the size of the mould about 132 inch. But in the proportion of 132 inch to every 2 inches of diameter, the rapping on a 6-foot wheel would amount to 1116 inches, whereas, in actual practice, a 6-foot wheel would not enlarge the mould more than at most 18 inch from the rapping.

It is obvious, then, that it would be more in accordance with the requirements to proportion the amount of clearance to the diameter of the wheel, so as to keep the clearance as small as possible. This will possess the advantage that the teeth will be stronger, it being obvious that the teeth are weakened both from the loss of thickness and the increase of height due to the clearance.

It is usual in epicycloidal teeth to fill in the corner at the root of the tooth with a fillet, as at c, d, in Fig. 143, to strengthen it.[I-54] This is not requisite when the diameter of the generating circle is so small in proportion to the base circle as to produce teeth that are spread at the roots; but it is especially advantageous when the teeth have radial flanks, in which case the fillets may extend farther up the flanks than when they are spread; because, as shown in Fig. 47, the length of operative flank is a minimum in teeth having radial flanks, and as the smallest pinion in the set is that with radial flanks, and further as it has the least number of teeth in contact, it is the weakest, and requires all the strengthening that the fillets in the corners will give, and sometimes the addition of the flanges on the sides of the pinion, such gears being termed “shrouded.”

The proportion of the teeth to the pitch as found in ordinary practice is given by Professor Willis as follows:—

Depth to pitch line 310  of the  pitch.
Working depth 610
Whole depth 710
Thickness of tooth 511
Breadth of space 611

The depth to pitch line is, of course, the same thing as the height of the addendum, and is measured through the centre of the tooth from the point to the pitch line in the direction of a radial line and not following the curve of tooth face.

Referring to the working depth, it was shown in Figs. 42 and 44 that the height of the addendum remaining constant, it varies with the diameter of the generating circle.

Fig. 144

Fig. 144.

From these proportions or such others as may be selected, in which the proportions bear a fixed relation to the pitch, a scale may be made and used as a gauge, to set the compasses by, and in marking off the teeth for any pitch within the capacity of the scale. A vertical line a b in Fig. 144, is drawn and marked off in inches and parts of an inch, to represent the pitches of the teeth; at a right angle to a b, the line b c is drawn, its length equalling the whole depth of tooth, which since the coarsest pitch in the scale is 4 inches will be 710 of 4 inches. From the end of line c we draw a diagonal line to a, and this gives us the whole depth of tooth for any pitch up to 4 inches: thus the whole depth for a 4-inch pitch is the full length of the horizontal line b c; the whole depth for a 3-inch pitch will be the length of the horizontal line running from the 3 on line a b, to line a c on the right hand of the figure; similarly for the full depth of tooth for a 2-inch pitch is the length of the horizontal line running from 2 to a c. The working depth of tooth being 610 of the pitch a diagonal is drawn from a meeting line c at a distance from b of 610 of 4 inches and we get the working depth for any other pitch by measuring (along the horizontal line corresponding to that pitch), from the line of pitches to the diagonal line for working depth of tooth. The thickness of tooth is 511 of the pitch and its diagonal is distant 511 of 4 (from b) on line b c, the thickness for other pitches being obtained on the horizontal line corresponding to those pitches as before.

Fig. 145

Fig. 145.

The construction of a pattern wherefrom to make a foundry mould, in which to cast a spur gear-wheel, is as shown in section, and in plan of Fig. 145. The method of constructing these patterns depends somewhat on their size. Large patterns are constructed with the teeth separate, and the body of the wheel is built of separate pieces, forming the arms, the hub, the rim, and the teeth respectively. Pinion patterns, of six inches and less in diameter, are usually made out of a solid piece, in which case the grain of the wood must lie in the direction of the teeth height. The chuck or face plate of the lathe, for turning the piece, must be of smaller diameter than the pinion, so that it will permit access to a tool applied on both sides, so as to strike the pitch circle on both sides. A second circle is also struck for the roots or depths of the teeth, and also, if required, an extra circle for striking the curves of the teeth with compasses, as was described in Fig. 130. All these circles are to be struck on both sides of the pattern, and as the pattern is to be left slightly taper, to[I-55] permit of its leaving the mould easily, they must be made of smaller diameter on one side than on the other of the pattern; the reduction in diameter all being made on the same side of the pattern. The pinion body must then be divided off on the pitch line into as many equal divisions as there are to be teeth in it; the curves of the teeth are then marked by some one of the methods described in the remarks on curves of gear-teeth. The top of the face curves are then marked along the points of the teeth by means of a square and scribe, and from these lines the curves are marked in on the other side of the pinion, and the spaces cut out, leaving the teeth projecting. For a larger pinion, without arms, the hub or body is built up of courses of quadrants, the joints of the second course breaking joint with those of the first.

The quadrants are glued together, and when the whole is formed and the glue dry, it is turned in the lathe to the diameter of the wheel at the roots of the teeth. Blocks of wood, to form the teeth, are then planed up, one face being a hollow curve to fit the circle of the wheel. The circumference of the wheel is divided, or pitched off, as it is termed, into as many points of equal division as there are to be teeth, and at these points lines are drawn, using a square, having its back held firmly against the radial face of the pinion, while the blade is brought coincidal with the point of division, so as to act as a guide in converting that point into a line running exactly true with the pinion. All the points of division being thus carried into lines, the blocks for the teeth are glued to the body of the pinion, as denoted by a, in Fig. 145. Another method is to dovetail the teeth into the pinion, as in Fig. 145 at b. After the teeth blocks are set, the process is, as already described, for a solid pinion.

Fig. 146

Fig. 146.

Fig. 147

Fig. 147.

Fig. 148

Fig. 148.

Fig. 149

Fig. 149.

The construction of a wheel, such as shown in Fig. 145, is as follows: The rim r must be built up in segments, but when the courses of segments are high enough to reach the flat sides of the arms they should be turned in the lathe to the diameter on the inside, and the arms should be let in, as shown in the figure at o. The rest of the courses of segments should then be added. The arms are then put in, and the inside of the segments last added may then be turned up, and the outside of the rim turned. The hub should then be added, one-half on each side of the arms, as in the figure. The ribs c of the arms are then added, and the body is completed (ready to receive the teeth), by filleting in the corners. An excellent method of getting out the teeth is as follows: Shape a piece of hard wood, as in Fig. 146, making it some five or six inches longer than the teeth, and about three inches deeper, the thickness being not less than the thickness of the required teeth at the pitch line. Parallel to the edge b c, mark the line a d, distant from b c to an amount equal to the required depth of tooth. Mark off, about midway of the piece, the lines a b and c d, distant from each other to an amount equal to the breadth of the wheel rim, and make two saw cuts to those lines. Take a piece of board an inch or two longer than the radius of the gear-wheel and insert a piece of wood (which is termed a box) tightly into the board, as shown in Fig. 147, e representing the box. Let the point f on the board represent the centre of the wheel, and draw a radial line r from f through the centre of the box. From the centre f, with a trammel, mark the addendum line g g, pitch line h i, and line j k for the depth of the teeth (and also a line wherefrom to strike the teeth curves, as shown in Fig. 129 if necessary). From the radial line r, as a centre, mark off on the pitch circle, points of division for several teeth, so as to be able to test the accuracy of the spacing across the several points, as well as from one point to the next, and mark the curves for the teeth on the end of the box, as shown. Turn the box end for end in the board, and mark out a tooth by the same method on the other end of the box. The box being removed from the board must now have its sides planed to the lines, when it will be ready to shape the teeth in. The teeth are got out for length, breadth, and thickness at the pitch line as follows: The lumber from which they are cut should be very straight grained, and should be first cut into strips of a width and thickness slightly greater than that of the teeth at the pitch line. These strips (which should be about two feet long) should then be planed down on the sides to very nearly the thickness of the tooth at the pitch line, and hollow on one edge to fit the curvature of the wheel rim. From these strips, pieces a trifle longer than the breadth of the wheel rim are cut, these forming the teeth. The pieces are then planed on the ends to the exact width of the wheel rim. To facilitate this planing a number of the pieces or blank teeth may be set in a frame, as in Figs. 148 and 149, in which a is a piece having the blocks b b affixed to it. c is a clamp secured by the screws at s s, and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 are the ends of the blank teeth. The clamp need not be as wide as the[I-56] teeth, as in Fig. 148, but it is well to let the pieces a and b b equal the breadth of the wheel rim, so that they will act as a template to plane the blank teeth ends to. The ends of b b may be blackleaded, so as to show plainly if the plane blade happens to shave them, and hence to prevent planing b b with the teeth. The blank teeth may now be separately placed in the box (Fig. 146) and secured by a screw, as shown in that figure, in which s is the screw, and t the blank tooth. The sides of the tooth must be carefully planed down equal and level with the surface of the box. The rim of the wheel, having been divided off into as many divisions as there are to be teeth in the wheel, as shown in Fig. 150, at a, a, a, &c., the finished teeth are glued so that the same respective side of each tooth exactly meets one of the lines a. Only a few spots of glue should be applied, and these at the middle of the root thickness, so that the glue shall not exude and hide the line a, which would make it difficult to set the teeth true to the line. When the teeth are all dry they must be additionally secured to the rim by nails. Wheels sufficiently large to incur difficulty of transportation are composed of a number of sections, each usually consisting of an arm, with an equal length of the rim arc on each side of it, so that the joint where the rim segments are bolted together will be midway between the two arms.

Fig. 150

Fig. 150.

This, however, is not absolutely necessary so long as the joints are so arranged as to occur in the middle of tooth spaces, and not in the thickness of the tooth. This sometimes necessitates that the rim sections have an unequal length of arc, in which event the pattern is made for the longest segment, and when these are cast the teeth superfluous for the shorter segments are stopped off by the foundry moulder. This saves cutting or altering the pattern, which, therefore, remains good for other wheels when required.

When the teeth of wheels are to be cut in a gear-cutting machine the accurate spacing of the teeth is determined by the index plate and gearing of the machine itself; but when the teeth are to be cast upon the wheel and a pattern is to be made, wherefrom to cast the wheel the points of division denoting the thickness of the teeth and the width of the spaces are usually marked by hand. This is often rendered necessary from the wheels being of too large a diameter to go into dividing machines of the sizes usually constructed.

To accurately divide off the pitch circle of a gear-wheel by hand, requires both patience and skilful manipulation, but it is time and trouble that well repays its cost, for in the accuracy of spaces lies the first requisite of a good gear-wheel.

It is a very difficult matter to set the compasses so that by commencing at any one point and stepping the compasses around the circle continuously in one direction, the compass point shall fall into the precise point from which it started, for if the compass point be set the 1200th inch out, the last space will come an inch out in a circle having 200 points of divisions. It is, therefore, almost impossible and quite impracticable to accurately mark or divide off a circle having many points of division in this manner, not only on account of the fineness of the adjustment of the compass points, but because the frequent trials will leave so many marks upon the circle that the true ones will not be distinguishable from the false. Furthermore, the compass points are apt to spring and fall into the false marks when those marks come close to the true ones.

Fig. 151

Fig. 151.

In Fig. 151 is shown a construction by means of which the compass points may be set more nearly than by dividing the circumference of the circle by the number of divisions it is required to be marked into and setting the compasses to the quotient, because such a calculation gives the length of the division measured around the arc of the circle, instead of the distance measured straight from point of division to point of division.

The construction of Fig. 151 is as follows: p p is a portion of the circle to be divided, and a b is a line at a tangent to the point c of the circle p p. The point d is set off distant from c, to an amount obtained by dividing the circumference of p p by the number of divisions it is to have. Take one-quarter of this distance c d, and mark it from c, giving the point e, set one point of the compass at e and the other at d, and draw the arc[I-57] d f, and the distance from f to c, as denoted by g, is the distance to which to set the compasses to divide the circle properly. The compasses being set to this distance g, we may rest one compass point at c, and mark the arc f h, and the distance between arc h and arc d, measured on the line a b, is the difference between the points c, f when measured around the circle p p, and straight across, as at g.

Fig. 152

Fig. 152.

A pair of compasses set even by this construction will not, however, be entirely accurate, because there will be some degree of error, even though it be in placing the compass points on the lines and on the points marked, hence it is necessary to step the compasses around the circle, and the best method of doing this is as follows: Commencing at a, Fig. 152, we mark off continuously one from the other, and taking care to be very exact to place the compass point exactly coincident with the line of the circle, the points b, c, d, &c., continuing until we have marked half as many divisions as the circle is to contain, and arriving at e, starting again at a, we mark off similar divisions (one half of the total number), f, g, h, arriving at i, and the centre k, between the two lines e, i, will be the true position of the point diametrally opposite to point a, whence we started. These points are all marked inside the circle to keep them distinct from those subsequently marked.

Fig. 153

Fig. 153.

Fig. 154

Fig. 154.

It will be, perhaps, observed by the reader that it would be more expeditious, and perhaps cause less variation, were we to set the compasses to the radius of the circle and mark off the point k, as shown in Fig. 153, commencing at the point a, and marking off on the one side the lines b, c, and d, and on the other side e, f, and g, the junction or centre, between g and d, at the circle being the true position of the point k. For circles struck upon flat surfaces, this plan may be advantageous; and in cases where there are not at hand compasses large enough, a pair of trammels may be used for the purpose; but our instructions are intended to apply also to marking off equidistant points on such circumferences as the faces of pulleys or on the outsides of small rings or cylinders, in which cases the use of compasses is impracticable. The experienced hand may, it is true, adjust the compasses as instructed, and mark off three or four of the marks b, c, &c., in Fig. 152, and then open out the compasses to the distance between the two extreme marks, and proceed as before to find the centre k, but as a rule, the time saved will scarcely repay the trouble; and all that can be done to save time in such cases is, if the holes come reasonably close together, to mark off, after the compasses are adjusted, three or four spaces, as shown in Fig. 154. Commencing at the point a, and marking off the points b, c, and d, we then set another pair of compasses to the distance between a and d, and then mark, from d on one side and from a on the other, the marks from f to l and from m to t, thus obtaining the point k. This method, however expeditious and correct for certain work, is not applicable to circumferential work of small diameter and in which the distance between two of the adjacent points is, at the most, 120 of the circumference of the circle; because the angle of the surface of the metal to the compass point causes the latter to spring wider open in consequence of the pressure necessary to cause the compass point to mark the metal. This will be readily perceived on reference to Fig. 155 in which a represents the stationary, and b the scribing or marking point of the compasses.

Fig. 155

Fig. 155.

The error in the set of the compasses as shown by the distance apart of the two marks e and i on the circle in Fig. 152 is too fine to render it practicable to remedy it by moving the compass legs, hence we effect the adjustment by oilstoning the points on the outside, throwing them closer together as the figure shows is necessary.

Fig. 156

Fig. 156.

Fig. 157

Fig. 157.

Having found the point k, we mark (on the outside of the circle, so as to keep the marks distinct from those first marked) the division b, c, d, Fig. 156, &c., up to g, the number of divisions between b and g being one quarter of those in the whole circle. Then, beginning at k, we mark off also one quarter of the number of divisions arriving at m in the figure and producing the point 3. By a similar operation on the other side of the circle, we get the true position of point No. 4. If, in obtaining points 3 and 4, the compasses are not found to be set dead true, the necessary adjustment must be made; and it will be seen that, so far, we have obtained four true positions, and the process of obtaining each of them has served as a justification of the distance of the compass points. From these four points we may proceed in like[I-58] manner to mark off the holes or points between them; and the whole will be as true as it is practicable to mark them off upon that size of circle. In cases, however, where mathematical precision is required upon flat and not circumferential surfaces, the marking off may be performed upon a circle of larger diameter, as shown in Fig. 157. If it is required to mark off the circle a, Fig. 157, into any even number of equidistant points, and if, in consequence of the closeness together of the points, it becomes difficult to mark them (as described) with the compasses, we mark a circle b b of larger diameter, and perform our marking upon it, carrying the marks across the smaller circle with a straightedge placed to intersect the centres of the circles and the points marked on each side of the diameter. Thus, in Fig. 157, the lines 1 and 2 on the smaller circle would be obtained from a line struck through 1 and 4 on the outer circle; and supposing the larger circle to be three times the size of the smaller, the deviation from truth in the latter will be only 13 of whatever it is in the former.

In this example we have supposed the number of divisions to be an even one, hence the point k, Fig. 152, falls diametrically opposite to a, whereas in an odd number of points of division this would not be the case, and we must proceed by either of the two following methods:—

Fig. 158

Fig. 158.

In Fig. 158 is shown a circle requiring to be divided by 17 equidistant points. Starting from point 1 we mark on the outside of the circumference points 2, 3, 4, &c., up to point 9. Starting again from point 1 we mark points 10, 11, &c., up to 17. If, then, we try the compasses to 17 and 9 we shall find they come too close together, hence we take another pair of compasses (so as not to disturb the set of our first pair) and find the centre between 9 and 17 as shown by the point a. We then correct the set of our first pair of compasses, as near as the judgment dictates, and from point a, we mark with the second compasses (set to one half the new space of the first compasses) the points b, c. With the first pair of compasses, starting from b, we mark d, e, &c., to g; and from i, we mark divisions h, i, &c., to k, and if the compasses were set true, k and g would meet at the circle. We may, however, mark a point midway between k and g, as at 5. Starting again from points c and i, we mark the other side of the circle in a similar manner, producing the lines p and q, midway between which (the compasses not being set quite correct as yet) is the true point for another division. After again correcting the compasses, we start from b and 5 respectively, and mark point 7, again correcting the compasses. Then from c and the point between p and q, we may mark an intermediate point, and so on until all the points of division are made. This method is correct enough for most practical purposes, but the method shown in Fig. 159 is more correct for an odd number of points of division. Suppose that we have commenced at the point marked i, we mark off half the required number of holes on one side and arrive at the point 2; and then, commencing at the point i again, we mark off the other half of the required number of holes, arriving at the point 3. We then apply our compasses to the distance between the points 2 and 3; and if that distance is not exactly the same to which the compasses are set, we make the necessary adjustment, and try again and again until correct adjustment is secured.

Fig. 159

Fig. 159.

It is highly necessary, in this case, to make the lines drawn at[I-59] each trial all on the same side of the circle and of equal length, but of a different length to those marked on previous trials. For example, left the lines a, b, c, d, in Fig. 159 represent those made on the first trial, and e, f, g, h, those made on the second trial; and when the adjustment is complete, let the last trial be made upon the outside or other side of the circle, as shown by the lines i, j, k, l. Having obtained the three true points, marked 1, 2, 3, we proceed to mark the intermediate divisions, as described for an even number of divisions, save that there will be a space, 2 and 3, opposite point 1, instead of a point, as in case of a circle having an even number of divisions.

The equal points of division thus obtained may be taken for the centres of the tooth at the pitch circle or for one side of the teeth, as the method to be pursued to mark the tooth curves may render most desirable. If, for example, a template be used to mark off the tooth curves, the marks may be used to best advantage as representing the side of a tooth, and from them the thickness of the tooth may be marked or not as the kind of template used may require. Thus, if the template shown in Fig. 21 be used, no other marks will be used, because the sides of a tooth on each side of a space may be marked at one setting of the template to the lines or marks of division. If, however, a template, such as shown in Fig. 81 be used, a second set of lines marked distant from the first to a radius equal to the thickness of a tooth becomes necessary so that the template may be set to each line marked. If the Willis odontograph or the Robinson template odontograph be used the second set of lines will also be necessary. In using the Walker scale a radial line, as g in Fig. 142, will require to be marked through the points of equal division, and the thickness of the tooth at the points on the pitch circle and at the root must be marked as was shown in Fig. 142.

But if the arcs for the tooth curves are to be marked by compasses, the location for the centres wherefrom to strike these arcs may be marked from the points of division as was shown in Fig. 130.

Fig. 160

Fig. 160.

To construct a pattern wherefrom to cast a bevel gear-wheel.—When a pair of bevel-wheels are in gear and upon their respective shafts all the teeth on each wheel incline, as has been shown, to a single point, hence the pattern maker draws upon a piece of board a sketch representing the conditions under which the wheels are to operate. A sketch of this kind is shown in Fig. 160, in which a, b, c, d, represent in section the body of a bevel pinion. f g is the point of a tooth on one side, and e the point of a tooth on the other side of the pinion, while h i are pitch lines for the two teeth. Thus, the cone surface, the points, the pitch lines and the bottom of the spaces, projected as denoted by the dotted lines, would all meet at x, which represents the point where the axes of the shafts would meet.

Fig. 161

Fig. 161.

In making wooden patterns wherefrom to cast the wheels, it is usual, therefore, to mark these lines on a drawing-board, so that they may be referred to by the workman in obtaining the degree of cone necessary for the body a b c d, to which the teeth are to be affixed. Suppose, then, that the diameter of the pinion is sufficiently small to permit the body a b c d to be formed of one piece instead of being put together in segments, the operation is as follows: The face d c is turned off on the lathe, and the piece is reversed on the lathe chuck, and the face a b is turned, leaving a slight recess at the centre to receive and hold the cone point true with the wheel. A bevel gauge is then set to the angle a b c, and the cone of the body is turned to coincide in angle with the gauge and to the required diameter, its surface being made true and straight so that the teeth may bed well. While turning the face d c in the lathe a fine line circle should be struck around the circumference of the cone and near d c, on which line the spacing for the teeth may be stepped off with the compasses. After this circle or line is divided off into as many equidistant points as there are to be teeth on the wheel, the points of division require to be drawn into lines, running across the cone surface of the wheel, and as the ordinary square is inapplicable for the purpose, a suitable square is improvised as follows: In Fig. 161 let the outline in full lines denote the body of a pinion ready to receive the teeth, and a b the circle referred to as necessary for the spacing or dividing with the compasses. On a b take any point, as c, as a centre, and with a pair of compasses mark equidistant on each side of it two lines, as d, d. From d, d as respective centres mark two lines, crossing each other as at f, and draw a line, joining the intersection of the lines at f with c, and the last line, so produced, will be in the place in which the teeth are to lie; hence the wheel will require as many of these lines as it is to contain teeth, and the sides of the teeth, being set to these lines all around the pinion, will be in their proper positions, with the pitch lines pointing to x, in Fig. 160.

Fig. 162

Fig. 162.

Fig. 163

Fig. 163.

Fig. 164

Fig. 164.

To avoid, however, the labor involved in producing these lines for each tooth, two other plans may be adopted. The first is to make a square, such as shown in Fig. 162, the face f f being fitted to the surface c, in Fig. 161, while the edges of its blade[I-60] coincide with the line referred to; hence the edge of the blade may be placed coincident successively with each point of division, as d d, and the lines for the place of the length of each tooth be drawn. The second plan is to divide off the line a b before removing the body of the pinion from the lathe, and produce, as described, a line for one tooth. A piece of wood may then be placed so that when it lies on the surface of the hand-rest its upper surface will coincide with the line as shown in Fig. 163, in which w is the piece of wood, and a, b, c, &c., the lines referred to. If the teeth are to be glued and bradded to the body, they are first cut out in blocks, left a little larger every way than they are to be when finished, and the surfaces which are to bed on the cone are hollowed to fit it. Then blocks are glued to the body, one and the same relative side of each tooth being set fair to the lines. When the glue is dry, the pinion is again turned on the lathe, the gauge for the cone of the teeth being set in this case to the lines e, f, g in Fig. 160. The pitch circles must then be struck at the ends of the teeth. The turned wheel is then ready to have the curves of the teeth marked. The wheel must now again be divided off on the pitch circle at the large end of the cone into as many equidistant points as there are to be teeth on the wheel, and from these points, and on the same relative side of them, mark off a second series of points, distant from the points of division to an amount equal to the thickness the teeth are required to be. From these points draw in the outline of the teeth (upon the ends of the blocks to form the teeth) at the large end of the cone. Then, by use of the square, shown in Fig. 162, transfer the points of the teeth to the small end of the cone, and trace the outline of the teeth at the small end, taking centres and distances proportionate to the reduced diameter of the pitch circle at the small end, as shown in Fig. 160, where at j are three teeth so marked for the large end, and at k three for the small end, p p representing the pitch circle, and r r a circle for the compass points. The teeth for bevel pinions are sometimes put on by dovetails, as shown in Fig. 164, a plan which possesses points of advantage and disadvantage. Wood shrinks more across the grain than lengthwise with it, hence when the grain of the teeth crosses that of the body with every expansion or contraction of the wood (which always accompanies changes in the humidity of the atmosphere) there will be a movement between the two, because of the unequal expansion and contraction, causing the teeth to loosen or to move. In the employment of dovetails, however, a freedom of movement lengthways of the tooth is provided to accommodate the movement, while the teeth are detained in their proper positions. Again, if in making the founders’ mould, one of the mould teeth should break or fall down when the pattern is withdrawn, a tooth may be removed from the pattern and used by the moulder to build up the damaged part of the mould again. And if the teeth of a bevel pinion are too much undercut on the flank curves to permit the whole pattern from being extracted from the mould without damaging it, dovetailed teeth may be drawn, leaving the body of the pattern to be extracted from the mould last. On the other hand, the dovetail is a costly construction if applied to large wheels. If the teeth are to be affixed by dovetails, the construction varies as follows: Cut out a wooden template of the dovetail, leaving it a little narrower than the thickness of the tooth at the root, and set the template on the cone at a distance from one of the lines a, b, c, Fig. 163, equal to the margin allowed between the edge of the dovetail and the side of the root of the tooth, and set it true by the employment of the square, shown in Fig. 162, and draw along the cone surface of the body lines representing the location of the dovetail grooves. The lines so drawn will give a taper toward x (Fig. 160), providing that, the template sides being parallel, each side is set to the square. While the body is in the lathe, a circle on each end may be struck for the depth of the dovetails, which should be cut out to gauge and to template, so that the teeth will interchange to any dovetail. The bottom of the dovetails need not be circular, but flat, which is easier to make. Dovetail pieces or strips are fitted to the grooves, being left to project slightly above the face of the cone or body. They are drawn in tight enough to enable them to keep their position while being turned in the lathe when the projecting points are turned down level with the cone of the body. The teeth may then be got out as described for glued teeth, and the dovetails added, each being marked to its place, and finally the teeth are cut to shape.

Fig. 165

Fig. 165.

In wheels too large to have their cones tested by a bevel gauge, a wooden gauge may be made by nailing two pieces of wood to stand at the required angle as shown in Fig. 165, which is extracted from The American Machinist, or the dead centre c and a straightedge may be used as follows. In the figure the other wheel of the pair is shown dotted in at b, and the dead centre is[I-61] set at the point where the axes of a and b would meet; hence if the largest diameter of the cone of a is turned to correct size, the cone will be correct when a straightedge applied as shown lies flat on the cone and meets the point of the dead centre e. The pinion b, however, is merely introduced to explain the principle, and obviously could not be so applied practically, the distance to set e, however, is the radius a.

Skew Bevel.[9]—When the axles of the shaft are inclined to each other instead of being in a straight line, and it is proposed to connect and communicate motion to the shafts by means of a single pair of bevel-gears, the teeth must be inclined to the base of the frustra to allow them to come into contact.

[9] From the “Engineer and Machinists’ Assistant.”

Fig. 166

Fig. 166.

To find the line of contact upon a given frustrum of the tangent-cone; let the Fig. 166 be the plane of the frustrum; a the centre. Set off a e equal to the shortest distance between the axes (called the eccentricity), and divide it in c, so that a c is to e c as the mean radius of the frustrum to the mean radius of that with which it is to work; draw c p perpendicular to a e, and meeting the circumference of the conical surface at m; perform a similar operation on the base of the frustrum by drawing a line parallel to c m and at the same distance a c from the centre, meeting the circumference in p.

The line p c is then plainly the line of direction of the teeth. We are also at liberty to employ the equally inclined line c q in the opposite direction, observing only that, in laying out the two wheels, the pair of directions be taken, of which the inclinations correspond.

Fig. 167

Fig. 167.

Fig. 167 renders this mode of laying off the outlines of the wheels at once obvious. In this figure the line a e corresponds to the line marked by the same letters in Fig. 166; and the division of it at c is determined in the manner directed. The line c m being thus found in direction, it is drawn indefinitely to d. Parallel to this line and from the point c draw e to e, and in this line take the centre of the second wheel. The line c m d gives the direction of the teeth; and if from the centre a with radius at c a circle be described, the direction of any tooth of the wheel will be a tangent to it, as at c, and similarly if a centre e be taken in the line e d, and with radius e d, c e a circle be drawn, the direction of the teeth of the second wheel will be tangents to this last, as at d.

Having thus found the direction of the teeth, these outlines may be formed as in the case of ordinary bevel-wheels and with equal exactness and facility, all that is necessary being to find the curves for the teeth as described for bevel-wheels, and follow precisely the same construction, except that the square, Fig. 162, marking the lines across the cones, requires to be set to the angle for the tooth instead of at a right angle, and this angle may be found by the construction shown in Fig. 167, it being there represented by line d c. It is obvious, however, that the bottoms of the blocks to form the teeth must be curved to bed on the cone along the line d c, Fig. 167, and this may best be done by bedding two teeth, testing them by trial of the actual surfaces.

Then two teeth may be set in as No. 1 and No. 6 in the box shown in Fig. 148, the intermediate ones being dressed down to them.

Fig. 168

Fig. 168.

Where a bevel-wheel pattern is too large to be constructed in one piece and requires to be built up in pieces, the construction is as in Fig. 168, in which on the left is shown the courses of segments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c., of which the rim is built up (as described for spur wheels), and on the right is shown the finished rim with a tooth, c, in position.

The tooth proper is of the length of face of the wheel as denoted by b′; now all the lines bounding the teeth must converge to the point x. Suppose, then, that the teeth are to be shaped for curve of face and flank in a box as described for spur-wheel teeth in Fig. 146, then in Fig. 168 let a, a represent the[I-62] bottom and b′ the top of the box, and c a tooth in the box, its ends filling the opening in the box at b′ then the curve on the sides of the box at b′ must be of the form shown at f, and the curve on the sides of the box (at the point b of its length) must be as shown at g, the teeth shown in profile at g and u representing the forms of the teeth at their ends, on the outside of the wheel rim at b′, and on the inside at b; having thus made a box of the correct form on its sides, the teeth may be placed in it and planed down to it, thus giving all the teeth the same curve.

The spacing for the teeth and their fixing may be done as described for the bevel pinion.

Fig. 169

Fig. 169.

To construct a pattern wherefrom to cast an endless screw, worm, or tangent screw, which is to have the worm or thread cut in a lathe.—Take two pieces, each to form one longitudinal half of the pattern; peg and screw them together at the ends, an excess of stuff being allowed at each end for the accommodation of two screws to hold the two halves together while turning them in the lathe, or dogs, if the latter are more convenient, as they might be in a large pattern. Turn the piece down to the size over the top of the thread, after which the core prints are turned. The body thus formed will be ready to have the worm or thread cut, and for this purpose the tools shown in Figs. 169 and 140 are necessary.

That shown in Fig. 169 should be flat on the face similar to a parting tool for cast iron, but should have a great deal more bottom rake, as strength is not so much an object, and the tool is more easily sharpened. It has also in addition two little projections a b like the point of a penknife, formed by filing away the steel in the centre; these points are to cut the fibres of the wood, the severed portion being scraped away by the flat part of the tool.

The degree of side rake given to the tool must be sufficient to let the tool sides well clear the thread or worm, and will therefore vary with the pitch of the worm.

Fig. 170

Fig. 170.

The width of the tool must be a shade narrower than the narrowest part of the space in the worm. Having suitably adjusted the change wheels of the lathe to cut the pitch required the parting tool is fed in until the extreme points reach the bottom of the spaces, and a square nosed parting tool without any points or spurs will finish the worm to the required depth. This will have left a square thread, and this we have now to cut to the required curves on the thread or worm sides, and as the cutting will be performed on the end grain of the wood, the top face of the tool must be made keen by piercing through the tool a slot a, Fig. 170, and filing up the bevel faces b, c and d, and then carefully oilstoning them. This tool should be made slightly narrower than the width of the worm space, so that it may not cut on both sides at once, as it would have too great a length of cutting edge.

Furthermore, if the pattern is very large, it will be necessary to have two tools for finishing, one to cut from the pitch line inwards and the other to complete the form from the pitch line outwards. It is advisable to use hard wood for the pattern.

Fig. 171

Fig. 171.

If it is decided to cut the thread by hand instead of with these lathe tools, then, the pattern being turned as before, separate the two halves by taking out the screws at the ends; select the half that has not the pegs, as being a little more convenient for tracing lines across. Set out the sections of the thread, a, b, c, and d, Fig. 171, similar to a rack; through the centres of a, b, c, and d, square lines across the piece; these lines, where they intersect the pitch line, will give the centres of teeth on that side: or if we draw lines, as e, f, through the centres of the spaces, they will pass through the centres of the teeth (so to speak) on the other side; in this position complete the outline on that side. It will be found, in drawing these outlines, that the centres of some of the arcs will lie outside the pattern. To obtain support for the compasses, we must fit over the pattern a piece of board such as shown by dotted lines at g h.

Fig. 172

Fig. 172.

Fig. 173

Fig. 173.

It now remains to draw in the top of the thread upon the curved surface of the half pattern; for this purpose take a piece of stiff card or other flexible material, wrap it around the pattern and fix it temporarily by tacks, we then trim off the edges true to the pattern, and mark upon the edges of the card the position of the tops of the thread upon each side; we remove the card and spread it out on a flat surface, join the points marked on the edges by lines as in Fig. 172, replace the card exactly as before upon the pattern, and with a fine scriber we prick through the lines. The cutting out is commenced by sawing, keeping, of course, well within the lines; and it is facilitated by attaching a stop to the saw so as to insure cutting at all parts nearly to the exact depth. This stop is a simple strip of wood and may be clamped to the saw, though it is much more convenient to have a couple of holes in the saw blade for the passage of screws. For finishing, a pair of templates, p and q, Fig. 173, right and left, will be found useful; and finally the work should be verified and slight imperfections corrected by the use of a form or template taking in three spaces, as shown at r in Fig. 173. In drawing the lines on the card, we must consider whether it is a right or left-handed worm that we desire. In the engraving the lines are those suitable for a right-handed thread. Having completed one half of the pattern, place the two halves together, and trace off the half that is uncut, using again the card template for drawing the lines on the curved surface. The cutting out will be the same as before.

Fig. 174

Fig. 174.

[I-63]As the teeth of cast wheels are, from their deviation from accuracy in the tooth curves and the concentricity of the teeth to the wheel centre, apt to create noise in running, it is not unusual to cast one or both wheels with mortises in the rim to receive wooden teeth. In this case the wheel is termed a mortise wheel, and the teeth are termed cogs. If only one of a pair of wheels is to be cogged, the largest of the pair is usually selected, because there are in that case more teeth to withstand the wear, it being obvious that the wear is greatest upon the wheel having the fewest teeth, and that the iron wheel or pinion can better withstand the wear than the mortise wheel. The woods most used for cogs are hickory, maple, hornbeam and locust. The blocks wherefrom the teeth are to be formed are usually cut out to nearly the required dimensions, and kept in stock, so as to be thoroughly well-seasoned when required for use, and, therefore less liable to come loose from shrinkage after being fitted to the mortise in the wheel. The length of the shanks is made sufficient to project through the wheel rim and receive a pin, as shown in Fig. 174, in which b is a blank tooth, and c a finished tooth inserted in the wheel, the pin referred to being at p. But, if a mortise should fall in an arm of the wheel, this pin-hole must pass through the rim, as shown in the mortise a. The wheel, however, should be designed so that the mortises will not terminate in the arms of the wheel.

Fig. 175

Fig. 175.

Another method of securing the teeth in the mortises is to dovetail them at the small end and drive wedges between them, as shown in Fig. 175, in which c c are two contiguous teeth, r the wheel rim and w w two of the wedges. On account of the dovetailing the wedges exert a pressure pressing the teeth into the mortises. This plan is preferable to that shown in the Fig. 174 inasmuch as from the small bearing area of the pins they become loose quicker, and furthermore there is more elasticity to take up the wear in the case of the wedges.

Fig. 176

Fig. 176.

Fig. 177

Fig. 177.

Fig. 178

Fig. 178.

The mortises are first dressed out to a uniform size and taper, using two templates to test them with, one of which is for the breadth and the other for the width of the mortise. The height above the wheel requires to be considerably more than that due to the depth of the teeth, so that the surface bruised by driving the cogs or when fitting them into the mortises may be cut off. To avoid this damage as much as possible, a broad-face hammer should be employed—a copper, lead, lignum vitæ, or a raw hide hammer being preferable, and the last the best. The teeth are got out in a box and two guides, such as shown in Figs. 176, 177, and 178, similar letters of reference denoting the same parts in all three illustrations.

In Fig. 176, x is a frame or box containing and holding the operative part of the tooth, and resting on two guides c d. The height of d from the saw table is sufficiently greater than that of c to give the shank g the correct taper, e f representing the circular saw. t is a plain piece of the full size of the box or frame, and serving simply to close up on that side the mortise in the frame. The grain of t should run at a right angle to the other piece of the frame so as to strengthen it. s is a binding screw to hold the cog on the frame, and h is a guide for the edge of the frame to slide against. It is obvious, now, that if the piece d be adjusted at a proper distance from the circular saw e f, and the edge of the frame be moved in contact with the guide h, one side of the tooth shank will be sawn. Then, by reversing the frame end for end, the other side of the shank may be sawn. Turning the frame to a right angle the edges of the cog shank can be sawn from the same box or frame, and pieces c, d, as shown in Fig. 177.

The frame is now stood on edge, as in Fig. 178, and the underneath surfaces sawed off to the depth the saw entered when the shank taper was sawn. This operation requires to be performed on all four sides of the tooth.

After this operation is performed on one cog, it should be tried in the wheel mortises, to test its correctness before cutting out the shanks on all the teeth.

The shanks, being correctly sawn, may then be fitted to the mortises, and let in within 18 of butting down on the face of the wheel, this amount being left for the final driving. The cogs should be numbered to their places, and two of the mortises must be numbered to show the direction in which the numbers proceed. To mark the shoulders (which are now square) to the curvature of the rim, a fork scriber should be used, and the shanks of the cogs should have marked on them a line coincident with the inner edge of the wheel rim. This line serves as a guide in marking the pin-holes and for cutting the shanks to length; but it is to be remembered that the shanks will pass farther through to the amount of the distance marked by the fork scriber. The holes for the pins which pass through the shanks should be made slightly less in their distances (measured from the nearest edge of the pin-hole) from the shoulders of the cogs than is the thickness of the rim of the wheel, so that when the cogs are driven fully home the pin-holes will appear not quite full circles on the inside of the wheel rim; hence, the pins will bind tightly against the inside of the wheel rim, and act somewhat as keys, locking and drawing the shanks to their seats in the mortises.

[I-64]In cases where quietness of running is of more consequence than the durability of the teeth, or where the wear is not great, both wheels may be cogged, but as a rule the larger wheel is cogged, the smaller being of metal. This is done because the teeth of the smaller wheel are the most subject to wear. The teeth of the cogged wheel are usually made the thickest, so as to somewhat equalise the strength of the teeth on the two wheels.

Since the power transmitted by a wheel in a given time is composed of the pressure or weight upon the wheel, and the space a point on the pitch circle moves through in the given time, it is obvious that in a train of wheels single geared, the velocities of all the wheels in the train being equal at the pitch circle, the teeth require to be of equal pitch and thickness throughout the train. But when the gearing is compounded the variation of velocity at the pitch circle, which is due to the compounding, has an important bearing upon the necessary strength of the teeth.

Suppose, for example, that a wheel receives a tooth pressure of 100 lbs. at the pitch circle, which travels at the velocity of 100 feet per minute, and is keyed to the same shaft with another wheel whose velocity is 50 feet per minute. Now, in the power transmitted by the two wheels the element of time is 50 for one wheel and 100 for the other, hence the latter (supposing both wheels to have an equal number of teeth in contact with their driver or follower as the case may be) will be twice as strong in proportion to the duty, and it appears that in compounded gearing the strength in proportion to the duty may be varied in proportion as the velocity is modified by compounding of the wheels. Thus, when the velocity at the pitch circle is increased its strength is increased, and per contra when its velocity is decreased its strength is decreased, when considered in proportion to the duty. When, however, the wheels are upon long shafts, or when they overhang the bearing of the shaft, the corner contact will from tension of the shaft, continue much longer than when the shaft is maintained rigid.

It is obvious that if a wheel transmits a certain amount of power, the pressure of tooth upon tooth will depend upon the number of teeth in contact, but since, in the case of very small wheels, that is to say, pinions of the smallest diameter of the given pitch that will transmit continuous motion, it occurs that only one tooth is in continuous contact, it is obvious that each single tooth must have sufficient strength to withstand the whole of the pressure when worn to the limits to which the teeth are supposed to wear. But when the pinion is so small that it has but one tooth in continuous contact, that contact takes place nearer the line of centres and to the root of the tooth, and therefore at a less leverage to the line of fracture, hence the ultimate strength of the tooth is proportionately increased. On the other hand, however, the whole stress of the wheel being concentrated on the arc of contact of one tooth only (instead of upon two or more teeth as in larger wheels), the wear is proportionately greater; hence, in a short time the teeth of the pinion are found to be thinner than those on the other wheel or wheels. The multiplicity of conditions under which small wheels may work with relation to the number of teeth in contact, the average leverage of the point of contact from the root of the tooth, the shape of the tooth, &c., renders it desirable in a general rule to suppose that the whole strain falls upon one tooth, so that the calculation shall give results to meet the requirements when a single tooth only is in continuous contact.

It follows, then, that the thickness of tooth arrived at by calculation should be that which will give to a tooth, when worn to the extreme thinness allowed, sufficient strength (with a proper margin of safety) to transmit the whole of the power transmitted by the wheel.

The margin (or factor) of safety, or in other words, the number of times the strength of the tooth should exceed the amount of power transmitted, varies (according to the conditions under which the wheels work) between 5 and 10.

The lesser factor may be used for slow speeds when the power is continuously and uniformly transmitted. The greater factor is necessary when the wheels are subjected to violent shocks and the direction of revolution requires to be reversed.

fig. 179

Fig. 179.

In pattern-cast teeth, contact between the teeth of one wheel and those of the other frequently occurs at one corner only, as shown in Fig. 179, and the line of fracture is in the direction denoted by the diagonal dotted lines. The causes of this corner contact have been already explained, but it may be added that as the wheels wear, the contact extends across the full breadths of the teeth, and the strength in proportion to the duty, therefore, steadily increases from the time the new wheels have action until the wear has caused contact fully across the breadth. Tredgold’s rule for finding the proper thickness of tooth for a given stress upon cast-iron teeth loaded at the corner as in Fig. 179 and supposed to have a velocity of three feet per second of time, is as follows:—

Rule.—Divide the stress in pounds at the pitch circle by 1500, and the square root of the quotient is the required thickness of tooth in inches or parts of an inch.

In the results obtained by the employment of this rule, an allowance of one-third the thickness for wear, and the margin for safety is included, so that the thickness of tooth arrived at is that to be given to the actual tooth. Further, the rule supposes the breadth of the tooth to be not less than twice the height of the same, any extra breadth not affecting the result (as already explained), when the pressure falls on a corner of the tooth.

In practical application, however, the diameter of the wheel at the pitch circle is generally, or at least often a fixed quantity, as well as the amount of stress, and it will happen as a rule that taking the stress as a fixed element and arriving at the thickness of the tooth by calculation, the required diameter of wheel, or what is the same thing, its circumference, will not be such as to contain the exact number of teeth of the thickness found by the calculation, and still give the desired amount of side clearance. It is desirable, therefore, to deal with the stress upon the tooth at the pitch circle, and the diameter, radius, or circumference of the pitch circle, and its velocity, and deduce therefrom the required thickness for the teeth, and conform the pitch to the requirements as to clearance from the tooth thickness thus obtained.

To deduce the thickness of the teeth from these elements we have Robertson Buchanan’s rule, which is as follows:—

Find the amount of horse-power employed to move the wheel, and divide such horse-power by the velocity in feet per second of the pitch line of the wheel. Extract the square root of the quotient, and three-fourths of this root will be the least thickness of the tooth. To the result thus obtained, there must be added the allowance for wear of the teeth and the width of the space including the clearance which will determine the number of teeth in the wheel.

In conforming strictly to this rule the difficulty is met with that it would give fractional pitches not usually employed and difficult to measure on an existing wheel. Cast wheels kept on hand or in stock by machinists have usually the following standard:—

Beginning with an inch pitch, the pitches increase by 18 inch up to 3-inch pitch, from 3 to 4-inch pitches the increase is by 14 inch, and from 4-inch pitch and upwards the increase is by 12 inch. Now, under the rule the pitches would, with the clearance made to bear a certain proportion to the pitch, be in odd fractions of an inch.

It appears then, that, if in a calculation to obtain the necessary thickness of tooth, the diameter of the pitch circle is not an element, the rule cannot be strictly adhered to unless the diameter of the pitch circle be varied to suit the calculated thickness of[I-65] tooth; or unless either the clearance, factor of safety, or amount of tooth thickness allowed for wear be varied to admit of the thickness of tooth arrived at by the calculation. But if the diameter of the pitch circle is one of the elements considered in arriving at the thickness of tooth requisite under given conditions, the pitch must, as a rule, either be in odd fractions, or else the allowance for wear, factor of safety, or amount of side clearance cannot bear a definite proportion to the pitch. But the allowance for clearance is in practice always a constant proportion of the pitch, and under these circumstances, all that can be done when the circumstances require a definite circumference of pitch circle, is to select such a pitch as will nearest meet the requirements of tooth thickness as found by calculation, while following the rule of making the clearance a constant proportion of the pitch. When following this plan gives a thinner tooth than the calculation calls for, the factor of safety and the allowance for wear are reduced. But this is of little consequence whenever more than one tooth on each wheel is in contact, because the rules provide for all the stress falling on one tooth. When, however, the number of teeth in the pinion is so small that one tooth only is in contact, it is better to select a pitch that will give a thicker rather than a thinner tooth than called for by the calculation, providing, of course, that the pitch be less than the arc of contact, so that the motion shall be continuous.

But when the pinions are shrouded, that is, have flanges at each end, the teeth are strengthened; and since the wear will continue greater than in wheels having more teeth in contact, the shrouding may be regarded as a provision against breakage in consequence of the reduction of tooth thickness resulting from wear.

In the following table is given the thickness of the tooth for a given stress at the pitch circle, calculated from Tredgold’s rule for teeth supposed to have contact when new at one corner only.

Stress in lbs. at
pitch circle.
Thickness of
tooth
in inches.
Actual pitches to
which wheels may be
made.
400 .52 1 18  to  1 14
800 .75 1 12 1 58
1,200 .90 1 78 2  
1,600 1.03 2   2 18
2,000 1.15 2 14 2 38
2,400 1.26 2 12 2 58
2,800 1.36 2 58 2 34
3,200 1.43 2 78 3  
3,600 1.56 3 18 3 14
4,000 1.63 3 14 3 38
4,400 1.70 3 38 3 12
4,800 1.78 3 12 3 58
5,200 1.86 3 58 3 34
5,600 1.93 3 34 4  
6,000 2.00 4   4 14

In wheels that have their teeth cut to form in a gear-cutting machine the thickness of tooth at any point in the depth is equal at any point across the breadth; hence, supposing the wheels to be properly keyed to their shafts so that the pitch line across the breadth of the wheel stands parallel to the axis of the shaft, the contact of tooth upon tooth occurs across the full breadth of the tooth.

As the practical result of these conditions we have three important advantages: first, that the stress being exerted along the full breadth of the tooth instead of on one corner only, the tooth is stronger (with a given breadth and thickness) in proportion to the duty; second, that with a given pitch, the thickness and therefore the margin for safety and allowance for wear are increased, because the tooth may be increased in thickness at the expense of the clearance, which need be merely sufficient to prevent contact on both sides of the spaces so as to prevent the teeth from locking in the spaces; and thirdly, because the teeth will not be subject to sudden impacts or shocks of tooth upon tooth by reason of back lash.

Fig. 180

Fig. 180.

Fig. 181

Fig. 181.

In determining the strength of cut gear-teeth we may suppose the weight to be disposed along the face at the extreme height of the tooth, in which case the theoretical shape of the tooth to possess equal strength at every point from the addendum circle to the root would be a parabola, as shown by the dotted lines in Fig. 180, which represents a tooth having radial flanks. In this case it is evident that the ultimate strength of the tooth is that due to the thickness at the root, because it is less than that at the pitch circle, and the strength, as a whole, is not greater than that at the weakest part. But since teeth with radial flanks are produced, as has been shown, with a generating circle equal in diameter to the radius of the pinion, and since with a generating circle bearing that ratio of diameter to diameter of pitch circle the acting part of the flank is limited, it is usual to fill in the corners with fillets or rounded corners, as shown in Fig. 129; hence, the weakest part of the tooth will be where the radial line of the flank joins the fillet and, therefore, nearer the pitch circle than is the root. But as only the smallest wheel of the set has radial flanks and the flanks thicken as the diameter of the wheels increase, it is usual to take the thickness of the tooth at the pitch circle as representing the weakest part of the tooth, and, therefore, that from which the strength of the tooth is to be computed. This, however, is not actually the case even in teeth which have considerable spread at the roots, as is shown in Fig. 181, in which the shape of the tooth to possess equal strength throughout its depth is denoted by the parabolic dotted lines.

Considering a tooth as simply a beam supporting the strain as a weight we may calculate its strength as follows:—

Multiply the breadth of the tooth by the square of its thickness, and the product by the strength of the material, per square inch of section, of which the teeth are composed, and divide this last product by the distance of the pitch line from the root, and the quotient will give a tooth thickness having a strength equal to the weight of the load, but having no margin for safety, and no allowance for wear; hence, the result thus obtained must be multiplied by the factor of safety (which for this class of tooth may be taken as 6), and must have an additional thickness added to allow for wear, so that the factor of safety will be constant notwithstanding the wear.

Another, and in some respects more convenient method, for obtaining the strength of a tooth, is to take the strength of a tooth having 1-inch pitch, and 1 inch of breadth, and multiply this quantity of strength by the pitch and the face of the tooth it is required to find the strength of, both teeth being of the same material.

Example.—The safe working pressure for a cast-iron tooth of[I-66] an inch pitch, and an inch broad will transmit, being taken as 400 lbs., what pressure will a tooth of 34-inch pitch and 3 inches broad transmit with safety?

Here 400 lbs. × 34 pitch × 3 breadth = 900 = safe working pressure of tooth 34-inch pitch and 3 inches broad.

Again, the safe working pressure of a cast-iron tooth, 1 inch in breadth and of 1-inch pitch, being considered as 400 lbs., what is the safe working pressure of a tooth of 1-inch pitch and 4-inch breadth?

Here 400 × 1 × 4 = 1600.

The philosophy of this is apparent when we consider that four wheels of 1-inch pitch and an inch face, placed together side by side, would constitute, if welded together, one wheel of an inch pitch and 4 inches face. (The term face is applied to the wheel, and the term breadth to the tooth, because such is the custom of the workshop, both terms, however, mean, in the case of spur-wheels, the dimension of the tooth in a direction parallel to the axis of the wheel shaft or wheel bore.)

The following table gives the safe working pressures for wheels having an inch pitch and an inch face when working at the given velocities, S.W.P. standing for “safe working pressure:”—

Velocity of
pitch circle
in feet
per second.
S.W.P.
for cast-iron
spur gears.
S.W.P.
for spur mor-
tise gears.
S.W.P.
for cast-iron
bevel gears.
S.W.P.
for bevel
mortise gears.
2 368 178 258 178
3 322 178 225 157
6 255 178 178 125
12 203 142 142 99
18 177 124 124 87
24 161 113 113 79
30 150 105 105 74
36 140 98 98 69
42 133 93 93 65
48 127 88 88 62

For velocities less than 2 feet per second, use the same value as for 2 feet per second.

The proportions, in terms of the pitch, upon which this table is based, are as follows:—

Thickness of  iron  teeth  . 395  of the pitch.
wooden . 595
Height of addendum . 28
Depth below pitch line . 32

The table is based upon 400 lbs. per inch of face for an inch pitch, as the safe working pressure of mortise wheel teeth or cogs; it may be noted that there is considerable difference of opinion. They are claimed by some to be in many cases practically stronger than teeth of cast iron. This may be, and probably is, the case when the conditions are such that the teeth being rigid and rigidly held (as in the case of cast-iron teeth), there is but one tooth on each wheel in contact. But when there is so nearly contact between two teeth on each wheel that but little elasticity in the teeth would cause a second pair of teeth to have contact, then the elasticity of the wood would cause this second contact. Added to this, however, we have the fact that under conditions where violent shock occurs the cog would have sufficient elasticity to give, or spring, and thus break the shock which cast iron would resist to the point of rupture. It is under these conditions, which mainly occur in high velocities with one of the wheels having cast teeth, that mortise wheels, or cogging, is employed, possessing the advantage that a broken or worn-out tooth, or teeth, may be readily replaced. It is usual, however, to assign to wooden teeth a value of strength more nearly equal to that of its strength in proportion to that of cast iron; hence, Thomas Box allows a wood tooth a value of about 310ths the strength of cast iron; a value as high as 710ths is, however, assigned by other authorities. But the strength of the tooth cannot exceed that at the top of the shank, where it fits into the mortise of the wheel, and on account of the leverage of the pressure the width of the mortise should exceed the thickness of the tooth.

In some practice, the mortise teeth, or cogs, are made thicker in proportion to the pitch than the teeth on the iron wheel; thus Professor Unwin, in his “Elements of Machine Design,” gives the following as “good proportions”:—

Thickness of  iron teeth  0.395  of the  pitch.
wood cogs  0.595

which makes the cogs 210ths inch thicker than the teeth.

The mortises in the wheel rim are made taper in both the breadth and the width, which enables the tooth shank to be more accurately fitted, and also of being driven more tightly home, than if parallel. The amount of this taper is a matter of judgment, but it may be observed that the greater the taper the more labor there is involved in fitting, and the more strain there is thrown upon the pins when locking the teeth with a given amount of strain. While the less the taper, the more care required to obtain an accurate fit. Taking these two elements into consideration, 18th inch of taper in a length of 4 inches may be given as a desirable proportion.

Fig. 182

Fig. 182.

As an evidence of the durability of wooden teeth, there appeared in Engineering of January 7th, 1879, the illustration shown in Fig. 182, which represents a cog from a wheel of 14 ft. 12 in. diameter, and having a 10-inch face, its pinion being 4 ft. in diameter. This cog had been running for 2612 years, day and night; not a cog in the wheel having been touched during that time. Its average revolutions were 38 per minute, the power developed by the engine being from 90 to 100 indicated horse-power. The teeth were composed of beech, and had been greased twice a week, with tallow and plumbago ore.

Since the width of the face of a wheel influences its wear (by providing a larger area of contact over which the pressure may be distributed, as well as increasing the strength), two methods of proportioning the breadth may be adopted. First, it may be made a certain proportion of the pitch; and secondly, it may be proportioned to the pressure transmitted and the number of revolutions. The desirability of the second is manifest when we consider that each tooth will pass through the arcs of contact (and thus be subjected to wear) once during each revolution; hence, by making the number of revolutions an element in the calculation to find the breadth, the latter is more in proportion to the wear than it would be if proportioned to the pitch.

It is obvious that the breadth should be sufficient to afford the required degree of strength with a suitable factor of safety, and allowance for wear of the smallest wheel in the pair or set, as the case may be.

According to Reuleaux, the face of a wheel should never be less than that obtained by multiplying the gross pressure, transmitted in lbs., by the revolutions per minute, and dividing the product by 28,000.

In the case of bevel-wheels the pitch increases, as the perimeter[I-67] of the wheel is approached, and the maximum pitch is usually taken as the designated pitch of the wheel. But the mean pitch is that which should be taken for the purposes of calculating the strength, it being in the middle of the tooth breadth. The mean pitch is also the diameter of the pitch circle, used for ascertaining the velocity of the wheel as an element in calculating the safe pressure, or the amount of power the wheel is capable of transmitting, and it is upon this basis that the values for bevel-wheels in the above table are computed.

In many cases it is required to find the amount of horse-power a wheel will transmit, or the proportions requisite for a wheel to transmit a given horse-power; and as an aid to the necessary calculations, the following table is given of the amount of horse-power that may be transmitted with safety, by the various wheels at the given velocities, with a wheel of an inch pitch and an inch face, from which that for other pitches and faces may be obtained by proportion.

TABLE SHOWING THE HORSE-POWER WHICH DIFFERENT
KINDS OF GEAR-WHEELS OF ONE INCH PITCH AND ONE
INCH FACE WILL SAFELY TRANSMIT AT VARIOUS
VELOCITIES OF PITCH CIRCLE.

Velocity of
Pitch Circle
in Feet per
Second.
Spur-Wheels.
H.P.
Spur Mortise
Wheels.
H.P.
Bevel-Wheels.
H.P.
Bevel Mortise
Wheels.
H.P.
2 1.3 38 .6 47 .9 38 .6 47
3 1.7 56 .9 71 1.2 27 .8 56
6 2.7 82 1.7 1.7 1.3 63
12 4.4 3 3.1   3.1   2.1 6
18 5.7 93 4.0 58 4.0 58 2.8 47
24 7.0 25 4.9 31 4.9 31 3.4 47
30 8.1 82 5.7 27 5.7 27 4.0 36
36 9.1 63 6.4 14 6.4 14 4.5 16
42 10.1 56 7.1 02 7.1 02 4.9 63
48 11.0 83 7.6 80 7.6 80 5.4 11

In this table, as in the preceding one, the safe working pressure for 1-inch pitch and 1-inch breadth of face is supposed to be 400 lbs.

In cast gearing, the mould for which is made by a gear moulding machine, the element of draft to permit the extraction of the pattern is reduced: hence, the pressure of tooth upon tooth may be supposed to be along the full breadth of the tooth instead of at one corner only, as in the case of pattern-moulded teeth. But from the inaccuracies which may occur from unequal contraction in the cooling of the casting, and from possible warping of the casting while cooling, which is sure to occur to some extent, however small the amount may be, it is not to be presumed that the contact of the teeth of one wheel will be in all the teeth as perfect across the full breadth as in the case of machine-cut teeth. Furthermore, the clearance allowed for machine-moulded teeth, while considerably less than that allowed for pattern-moulded teeth, is greater than that allowed for machine-cut teeth; hence, the strength of machine-moulded teeth in proportion to the pitch lies somewhere between that of pattern-moulded and machine-cut teeth—but exactly where, it would be difficult to determine in the absence of experiments made for the purpose of ascertaining.

It is not improbable, however, that the contact of tooth upon tooth extends in cast gears across at least two-thirds of the breadth of the tooth, in which case the rules for ascertaining the strength of cut teeth of equal thickness may be employed, substituting 23rds of the actual tooth breadth as the breadth for the purposes of the calculation.

If instead of supposing all the strain to fall upon one tooth and calculating the necessary strength of the teeth upon that basis (as is necessary in interchangeable gearing, because these conditions may exist in the case of the smallest pinion that can be used in pitch), the actual working condition of each separate application of gears be considered, it will appear that with a given diameter of pitch circle, all other things being equal, the arc of contact will remain constant whatever the pitch of the teeth, or in other words is independent of the pitch, and it follows that when the thickness of iron necessary to withstand (with the allowances for wear and factor of safety) the given stress under the given velocity has been determined, it may be disposed in a coarse pitch that will give one tooth always in contact, or a finer pitch that will give two or more teeth always in contact, the strength in proportion to the duty remaining the same in both cases.

In this case the expense of producing the wheel patterns or in trimming the teeth is to be considered, because if there are a train of wheels the finer pitch would obviously involve the construction and dressing to shape of a much greater number of teeth on each wheel in the train, thus increasing the labor. When, however, it is required to reduce the pinion to a minimum diameter, it is obvious that this may be accomplished by selecting the finer pitch, because the finer the pitch, the less the diameter of the wheel may be. Thus with a given diameter of pitch circle it is possible to select a pitch so fine that motion from one wheel may be communicated to another, whatever the diameter of the pitch circle may be, the limit being bounded by the practicability of casting or producing teeth of the necessary fineness of pitch. The durability of a wheel having a fine pitch is greater for two reasons: first, because the metal nearest the cast surface of cast iron is stronger than the internal metal, and the finer pitch would have more of this surface to withstand the wear; and second, because in a wheel of a given width there would be two points, or twice the area of metal, to withstand the abrasion, it being remembered that the point of contact is a line which partly rolls and partly slides along the depth of the tooth as the wheel rotates, and that with two teeth in contact on each wheel there are two of such lines. There is also less sliding or rubbing action of the teeth, but this is offset by the fact that there are more teeth in contact, and that there are therefore a greater number of teeth simultaneously rubbing or sliding one upon the other.

But when we deal with the number of teeth the circumstances are altered; thus with teeth of epicycloidal form it is manifestly impossible to communicate constant motion with a driving wheel having but one tooth, or to receive motion on a follower having but one tooth. The number of teeth must always be such that there is at all times a tooth of each wheel within the arc of action, or in contact, so that one pair of teeth may come into contact before the contact of the preceding teeth has ceased.

In the construction of wheels designed to transmit power as well as simple motion, as is the case with the wheels employed in machine work, however, it is not considered desirable to employ wheels containing a less number of teeth than 12. The diameter of the wheel bearing such a relation to the pitch that both wheels containing the same number of teeth (12), the motion will be communicated from one to the other continuously.

It is obvious that as the number of teeth in one of the wheels (of a pair in gear) is increased the number of teeth in the other may be (within certain limits) diminished, and still be capable of transmitting continuous motion. Thus a pinion containing, say 8 teeth, may be capable of receiving continuous motion from a rack in continuous motion, while it would not be capable of receiving continuous motion from a pinion having 4 teeth; and as the requirements of machine construction often call for the transmission of motion from one pinion to another of equal diameters, and as small as possible, 12 teeth are the smallest number it is considered desirable for a pinion to contain, except it be in the case of an internal wheel, in which the arc of contact is greater in proportion to the diameters than in spur-wheels, and continuous motion can therefore be transmitted either with coarser pitches or smaller diameters of pinion.

For convenience in calculating the pitch diameter at pitch circle, or pitch diameter as it is termed, and the number of teeth of wheels, the following rules and table extracted from the Cincinnati Artisan and arranged from a table by D. A. Clarke, are given. The first column gives the pitch, the following nine columns give the pitch diameters of wheels for each pitch from 1 tooth to 9. By multiplying these numbers by 10 we have the pitch diameters from 10 to 90 teeth, increasing by tens; by multiplying by 100 we likewise have the pitch diameters from 100 to 900, increasing by hundreds.

[I-68]

TABLE FOR DETERMINING THE RELATION BETWEEN
PITCH DIAMETER, PITCH, AND NUMBER OF TEETH
IN GEAR-WHEELS.

Pitch. Number of Teeth.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
1   .3183 .6366 .9549 1.2732 1.5915 1.9099 2.2282 2.5465 2.8648
1 18 .3581 .7162 1.0743 1.4324 1.7905 2.1486 2.5067 2.8648 3.2229
1 14 .3979 .7958 1.1937 1.5915 1.9894 2.3873 2.7852 3.1831 3.5810
1 38 .4377 .8753 1.3130 1.7507 2.1884 2.6260 3.0637 3.5014 3.9391
1 12 .4775 .9549 1.4324 1.9099 2.3873 2.8648 3.3422 3.8197 4.2971
                   
1 58 .5173 1.0345 1.5517 2.0690 2.5862 3.1035 3.6207 4.1380 4.6552
1 34 .5570 1.1141 1.6711 2.2282 2.7852 3.3422 3.8993 4.4563 5.0134
1 78 .5968 1.1937 1.7905 2.3873 2.9841 3.5810 4.1778 4.7746 5.3714
                   
2   .6366 1.2732 1.9099 2.5465 3.1831 3.8197 4.4563 5.0929 5.7296
2 18 .6764 1.3528 2.0292 2.7056 3.3820 4.0584 4.7348 5.4112 6.0877
2 14 .7162 1.4324 2.1486 2.8648 3.5810 4.2972 5.0134 5.7296 6.4457
2 38 .7560 1.5120 2.2679 3.0239 3.7799 4.5359 5.2919 6.0479 6.8038
                   
2 12 .7958 1.5915 2.3873 3.1831 3.9789 4.7746 5.5704 6.3662 7.1619
2 58 .8355 1.6711 2.5067 3.3422 4.1778 5.0133 5.8499 6.6845 7.5200
2 34 .8753 1.7507 2.6260 3.5014 4.3767 5.2521 6.1274 7.0028 7.8781
2 78 .9151 1.8303 2.7454 3.6605 4.5757 5.4908 6.4059 7.3211 8.2362
                   
3   .9549 1.9099 2.8648 3.8197 4.7746 5.7296 6.6845 7.6394 8.5943
3 14 1.0345 2.0690 3.1035 4.1380 5.1725 6.2070 7.2415 8.2760 9.3105
3 12 1.1141 2.2282 3.3422 4.4563 5.5704 6.6845 7.7986 8.9126 10.0268
3 34 1.1937 2.3873 3.5810 4.7746 5.9683 7.1619 8.3556 9.5493 10.7429
                   
4   1.2732 2.5465 3.8197 5.0929 6.3662 7.6394 8.9127 10.1839 11.4591
4 12 1.4324 2.8648 4.2972 5.7296 7.1619 8.5943 10.0267 11.4591 12.8915
5   1.5915 3.1831 4.7746 6.3662 7.9577 9.5493 11.1408 12.7324 14.3240
5 12 1.7507 3.5014 5.2521 7.0028 8.7535 10.5042 12.2549 14.0056 15.7563
6   1.9099 3.8196 5.7295 7.6394 9.5493 11.4591 13.3690 15.2788 17.1887

The following rules and examples show how the table is used:

Rule 1.—Given —— number of teeth and pitch; to find —— pitch diameter.

Select from table in columns opposite the given pitch—

First, the value corresponding to the number of units in the number of teeth.

Second, the value corresponding to the number of tens, and multiply this by 10.

Third, the value corresponding to the number of hundreds, and multiply this by 100. Add these together, and their sum is the pitch diameter required.

Example.—What is the pitch diameter of a wheel with 128 teeth, 112 inches pitch?

We find in line corresponding to 112 inch pitch—

Pitch  diameter for  8  teeth  3.81 97
20 9.54 9
100 47.75  
128 61.11 87
 
Or about 6118′′. Answer.

Rule 2.—Given —— pitch diameter and number of teeth; to find —— pitch.

First, ascertain by Rule 1 the pitch diameter for a wheel of 1-inch pitch, and the given number of teeth.

Second, divide given pitch diameter by the pitch diameter for 1-inch pitch.

The quotient is the pitch desired.

Example.—What is the pitch of a wheel with 148 teeth, the pitch diameter being 72′′?

First, pitch diameter for 148 teeth, 1-inch pitch, is—

  8  teeth  2.54 65  
  40 12.73 2  
  100 31.83    
  148 47.10 85  
 
Second,  72  = 1.53 inch equal to the pitch.
47.1

This is nearly 112-inch pitch, and if possible the diameter would be reduced or the number of teeth increased so as to make the wheel exactly 112-inch pitch.

Rule 3.—Given —— pitch and pitch diameter; to find —— number of teeth.

First, ascertain from table the pitch diameter for 1 tooth of the given pitch.

Second, divide the given pitch diameter by the value found in table.

The quotient is the number required.

Example.—What is the number of teeth in a wheel whose pitch diameter is 42 inches, and pitch is 212 inches?

First, the pitch diameter, 1 tooth, 212-inch pitch, is 0.7958 inches.

Second.  42  = 52.8. Answer.
0.7958

This gives a fractional number of teeth, which is impossible; so the pitch diameter will have to be increased to correspond to 53 teeth, or the pitch changed so as to have the number of teeth come an even number.

Whenever two parallel shafts are connected together by gearing, the distance between centres being a fixed quantity, and the speeds of the shafts being of a fixed ratio, then the pitch is generally the best proportion to be changed, and necessarily may not be of standard size. Suppose there are two shafts situated in this manner, so that the distance between their centres is 84 inches, and the speed of one is 212 times that of the other, what size wheels shall be used? In this case the pitch diameter and number of teeth of the wheel on the slow-running shaft have to be 212 times those of the wheel on the fast-running shaft; so that 84 inches must be divided into two parts, one of which is 212 times the other, and these quantities will be the pitch radii of the wheels; that is, 84 inches are to be divided into 312 equal parts, 1 of which is the radius of one wheel, and 212 of which the radius of the other, thus 84′′/312 = 24 inches. So that 24 inches is the pitch radius of pinion, pitch diameter = 48 inches; and 212 × 24 inches = 60 inches is the pitch radius of the wheel, pitch diameter = 120 inches. The pitch used depends upon the power to be transmitted; suppose that 258 inches had been decided as about the pitch to be used, it is found by Rule 3 that the number of teeth are respectively 143.6, and 57.4 for wheel and pinion. As this is impossible, some whole number of teeth, nearest these in value,[I-69] have to be taken, one of which is 212 times the other; thus 145 and 58 are the nearest, and the pitch for these values is found by Rule 2 to be 2.6 inches, being the best that can be done under the circumstances.

Fig. 183

Fig. 183.

Fig. 184

Fig. 184.

The forms of spur-gearing having their teeth at an angle to the axis, or formed in advancing steps shown in Figs. 183 and 184, were designed by Dr. Hooke, and “were intended,” says the inventor, “first to make a piece of wheel work so that both the wheel and pinion, though of never so small a size, shall have as great a number of teeth as shall be desired, and yet neither weaken the wheels nor make the teeth so small as not to be practicable by any ordinary workman. Next that the motion shall be so equally communicated from the wheel to the pinion that the work being well made there can be no inequality of force or motion communicated.

“Thirdly, that the point of touching and bearing shall be always in the line that joins the two centres together.

“Fourthly, that it shall have no manner of rubbing, nor be more difficult to make than common wheel work.”

Fig. 185

Fig. 185.

The objections to this form of wheel lies in the difficulty of making the pattern and of moulding it in the foundry, and as a result it is rarely employed at the present day. For racks, however, two or more separate racks are cast and bolted together to form the full width of rack as shown in Fig. 185. This arrangement permits of the adjustment of the width of step so as to take up the lost motion due to the wear of the tooth curves.

Another objection to the sloping of the teeth, as in Fig. 183, is that it induces an end pressure tending to force the wheels apart laterally, and this causes end wear on the journals and bearings.

Fig. 186

Fig. 186.

To obviate this difficulty the form of gear shown in Fig. 186 is employed, the angles of the teeth from each side of the wheel to its centre being made equal so as to equalize the lateral pressure. It is obvious that the stepped gear, Fig. 184, is simply equivalent to a number of thin wheels bolted together to form a thick one, but possessing the advantage that with a sufficient number of steps, as in the figure, there is always contact on the line of centres, and that the condition of constant contact at the line of centres will be approached in proportion to the number of steps in the wheel, providing that the steps progress in one continuous direction across the wheel as in Fig. 184. The action of the wheels will, in this event, be smoother, because there will be less pressure tending to force the wheels apart.

But in the form of gearing shown in Fig. 183, the contact of the teeth will bear every instant at a single point, which, as the wheels revolve, will pass from one end to the other of the tooth, a fresh contact always beginning on the first side immediately before the preceding contact has ceased on the opposite side. The contact, moreover, being always in the plane of the centres of the pair, the action is reduced to that of rolling, and as there is no sliding motion there is consequently no rubbing friction between the teeth.

Fig. 187

Fig. 187.

Fig. 188

Fig. 188.

A further modification of Dr. Hooke’s gearing has been somewhat extensively adopted, especially in cotton-spinning machines. This consists, when the direction of the motion is simply to be changed to an angle of 90°, in forming the teeth upon the periphery of the pair at an angle of 45° to the respective axes of the wheels, as in Figs. 187 and 188; it will then be perceived that if the sloped teeth be presented to each other in such a way as to have exactly the same horizontal angle, the wheels will gear together, and motion being communicated to one axis the same will be transmitted to the other at a right angle to it, as in a common bevel pair. Thus if the wheel a upon a horizontal shaft have the teeth formed upon its circumference at an angle of 45° to the plane of its axis it can gear with a similar wheel b upon a vertical axis. Let it be upon the driving shaft and the motion will be changed in direction as if a and b were a pair of bevel-wheels of the ordinary kind, and, as with bevels generally, the direction of motion will be changed through an equal angle to the sum of the angles which the teeth of the wheels of the pair form with their respective axes. The objection in respect of lateral or end pressure, however, applies to this form equally with that shown in Fig. 183, but in the case of a vertical shaft the end pressure may be (by sloping the teeth in the necessary direction) made to tend to lift the shaft and not force it down into the step bearing. This would act to keep the wheels in close contact by reason of the weight of the vertical shaft and at the same time reduce the friction between the end of that shaft and its step bearing. This renders this form of gearing preferable to skew bevels when employed upon vertical shafts.

It is obvious that gears, such as shown in Figs. 187 and 188 may be turned up in the lathe, because the teeth are simply portions of spirals wound about the circumference of the wheel. For a pair of wheels of equal diameter a cylindrical piece equal in length to the required breadth of the two wheels is turned up in the lathe, and the teeth may be cut in the same manner as cutting a thread in the lathe, that is to say, by traversing the tool the requisite distance per lathe revolution. In pitches above about 14 inch, it will be necessary to shape one side of the tooth at a time on account of the broadness of the cutting edges. After the spiral (for the teeth are really spirals) is finished the[I-70] piece may be cut in two in the lathe and each half will form a wheel.

To find the full diameter to which to turn a cylinder for a pair of these wheels we proceed as in the following example: Required to cut a spiral wheel 5 inches in diameter and to have 30 teeth. First find the diametral pitch, thus 30 (number of teeth) ÷ 5 (diameter of wheel at pitch circle) = 6; thus there are 6 teeth or 6 parts to every inch of the wheel’s diameter at the pitch circle; adding 2 of these parts to the diameter of the wheel, at the pitch circle we have 5 and 26 of another inch, or 526 inches, which is the full diameter of the wheel, or the diameter of the addendum, as it is termed.

Fig. 189

Fig. 189.

It is now necessary to find what change wheels to put on the lathe to cut the teeth out the proper angle. Suppose then the axes of the shafts are at a right angle one to the other, and that the teeth therefore require to be at an angle of 45° to the axes of the respective wheels, then we have the following considerations. In Fig. 189 let the line a represent the circumference of the wheel, and b a line of equal length but at a right angle to it, then the line c, joining a, b, is at an angle of 45°. It is obvious then that if the traverse of the lathe tool be equal at each lathe revolution to the circumference of the wheel at the pitch circle, the angle of the teeth will be 45° to the axis of the wheel.

Hence, the change wheels on the lathe must be such as will traverse the tool a distance equal to the circumference at pitch circle of the wheel, and the wheels may be found as for ordinary screw cutting.

If, however, the axes of the shafts are at any other angle we may find the distance the lathe tool must travel per lathe revolution to give teeth of the required angle (or in other words the pitch of the spiral) by direct proportion, thus: Let it be required to find the angle or pitch for wheels to connect shafts at an angle of 25°, the wheels to have 20 teeth, and to be of 10 diametral pitch.

Here, 20 ÷ 10 = 2 = diameter of wheel at the pitch circle. The circumference of 2 inches being 6.28 inches we have, as the degrees of angle of the axes of the shafts are to 45°, so is 6.28 inches (the circumference of the wheels, to the pitch sought).

Here, 6.28 inches × 45° ÷ 25° = 11.3 inches, which is the required pitch for the spiral.

Fig. 190

Fig. 190.

When the axes of the shafts are neither parallel nor meeting, motion from one shaft to another may be transmitted by means of a double gear. Thus (taking rolling cones of the diameters of the respective pitch circles as representing the wheels) in Fig. 190, let a be the shaft of gear h, and b b that of wheel e. Then a double gear-wheel having teeth on f, g may be placed as shown, and the face f will gear with e, while face g will gear with h, the cone surfaces meeting in a point as at c and d respectively, hence the velocity will be equal.

Fig. 191

Fig. 191.

When the axial line of the shafts for two gear-wheels are nearly in line one with the other, motion may be transmitted by gearing the wheels as in Fig. 191. This is a very strong method of gearing, because there are a large number of teeth in contact, hence the strain is distributed by a larger number of teeth and the wear is diminished.

Fig. 192

Fig. 192.

Fig. 192 (from Willis’s “Principles of Mechanism”) is another method of constructing the same combination, which admits of a steady support for the shafts at their point of intersection, a being a spherical bearing, and b, c being cupped to fit to a.

Rotary motion variable at different parts of a rotation may be obtained by means of gear-wheels varied in form from the true circle.

Fig. 193

Fig. 193.

The commonest form of gearing for this purpose is elliptical gearing, the principles governing the construction of which are thus given by Professor McCord. “It is as well to begin at the foundation by defining the ellipse as a closed plane-curve, generated by the motion of a point subject to the condition that the sum of its distances from two fixed points within shall be constant: Thus, in Fig. 193, a and b are the two fixed points, called the foci; l, e, f, g, p are points in the curve; and a f + f b = a e + e b. Also, a l + l b = a p + p b = a g + g b. From this it follows that a g = l o, o being the centre of the curve, and g the extremity of the minor axis, whence the foci may be found if the axes be assumed, or, if the foci and one axis be given, the other axis may be determined. It is also apparent that if about either focus, as b, we describe an arc with a radius greater than b p and less than b l, for instance b e, and about a another arc with radius a e = l p-b e, the intersection, e, of these arcs will be on the ellipse; and in this manner any desired number of points may be found, and the curve drawn by the aid of sweeps.

“Having completed this ellipse, prolong its major axis, and draw[I-71] a similar and equal one, with its foci, c, d, upon that prolongation, and tangent to the first one at p; then b d = l p. About b describe an arc with any radius, cutting the first ellipse at y and the line l at z; about d describe an arc with radius d z, cutting the second ellipse in x; draw a y, b y, c x, and d x. Then a y = d x, and b y = c x, and because the ellipses are alike, the arcs p y and p x are equal. If then b and d are taken as fixed centres, and the ellipses turn about them as shown by the arrows, x and y will come together at z on the line of centres; and the same is true of any points equally distant from p on the two curves. But this is the condition of rolling contact. We see, then, that in order that two ellipses may roll together, and serve as the pitch-lines of wheels, they must be equal and similar, the fixed centres must be at corresponding foci, and the distance between these centres must be equal to the major axis. Were they to be toothless wheels, if would evidently be essential that the outlines should be truly elliptical; but the changes of curvature in the ellipse are gradual, and circular arcs may be drawn so nearly coinciding with it, that when teeth are employed, the errors resulting from the substitution are quite inappreciable. Nevertheless, the rapidity of these changes varies so much in ellipses of different proportions, that we believe it to be practically better to draw the curve accurately first, and to find the radii of the approximating arcs by trial and error, than to trust to any definite rule for determining them; and for this reason we give a second and more convenient method of finding points, in connection with the ellipse whose centre is r, Fig. 193. About the centre describe two circles, as shown, whose diameters are the major and minor axes; draw any radius, as r t, cutting the first circle in t, and the second in s; through t draw a parallel to one axis, through s a parallel to the other, and the intersection, v, will lie on the curve. In the left hand ellipse, the line bisecting the angle a f b is normal to the curve at f, and the perpendicular to it is tangent at the same point, and bisects the angles adjacent to a f b, formed by prolonging a f, b f.

“To mark the pitch line we proceed as follows:—

Fig. 194

Fig. 194.

“In Fig. 194, a a and b b are centre lines passing through the major and minor axes of the ellipse, of which a is the axis or centre, b c is the major and a e half of the minor axis. Draw the rectangle b f g c, and then the diagonal line b e; at a right angle to b e draw line f h cutting b b at i. With radius a e and from a as a centre draw the dotted arc e j, giving the point j on the line b b. From centre k, which is on line b b, and central between b and j, draw the semicircle b m j, cutting a a at l. Draw the radius of the semicircle b m j cutting f g at n. With radius m n mark on a a, at and from a as a centre, the point o. With radius h o and from centre h draw the arc p o q. With radius a l and from b and c as centres draw arcs cutting p o q at the points p q. Draw the lines h p r and h q s, and also the lines p i t and q v w. From h as centre draw that part of the ellipse lying between r and s. With radius p r and from p as a centre draw that part of the ellipse lying between r and t. With radius q s and from q draw the ellipse from s to w. With radius i t and from i as a centre draw the ellipse from t to b. With radius v w and from v as a centre draw the ellipse from w to c, and one half the ellipse will be drawn. It will be seen that the whole construction has been performed to find the centres h p q i and v, and that while v and i may be used to carry the curve around the other side or half of the ellipse, new centres must be provided for h p and q; these new centres correspond in position to h p q.

“If it were possible to subdivide the ellipse into equal parts it would be unnecessary to resort to these processes of approximately representing the two curves by arcs of circles; but unless this be done, the spacing of the teeth can only be effected by the laborious process of stepping off the perimeter into such small subdivisions that the chords may be regarded as equal to the arcs, which after all is but an approximation; unless, indeed, we adopt the mechanical expedient of cutting out the ellipse in metal or other substance, measuring and subdividing it with a strip of paper or a steel tape, and wrapping back the divided measure in order to find the points of division on the curve.

Fig. 195

Fig. 195.

“But these circular arcs may be rectified and subdivided with[I-72] great facility and accuracy by a very simple process, which we take from Prof. Rankine’s “Machinery and Mill Work,” and is illustrated in Fig. 195. Let o b be tangent at o to the arc o d, of which c is the centre. Draw the chord d o, bisect it in e, and produce it to a, making o a = o e; with centre a and radius a d describe an arc cutting the tangent in b; then o b will be very nearly equal in length to the arc o d, which, however, should not exceed about 60°; if it be 60°, the error is theoretically about 1900 of the length of the arc, o b being so much too short; but this error varies with the fourth power of the angle subtended by the arc, so that for 30° it is reduced to 116 of that amount, that is, to 114400. Conversely, let o b be a tangent of given length; make o f = 14 o b; then with centre f and radius f b describe an arc cutting the circle o d g (tangent to o b at o) in the point d; then o d will be approximately equal to o b, the error being the same as in the other construction and following the same law.

Fig. 196

Fig. 196.

“The extreme simplicity of these two constructions and the facility with which they may be made with ordinary drawing instruments make them exceedingly convenient, and they should be more widely known than they are. Their application to the present problem is shown in Fig. 196, which represents a quadrant of an ellipse, the approximate arcs c d, d e, e f, f a having been determined by trial and error. In order to space this off, for the positions of the teeth, a tangent is drawn at d, upon which is constructed the rectification of d c, which is d g, and also that of d e in the opposite direction, that is, d h, by the process just explained. Then, drawing the tangent at f, we set off in the same manner f i = f e, and f k = f a, and then measuring h l = i k, we have finally g l, equal to the whole quadrant of the ellipse.

“Let it now be required to lay out 24 teeth upon this ellipse; that is, 6 in each quadrant; and for symmetry’s sake we will suppose that the centre of one tooth is to be at a, and that of another at c, Fig. 196. We therefore divide l g into six equal parts at the points 1, 2, 3, &c., which will be the centres of the teeth upon the rectified ellipse. It is practically necessary to make the spaces a little greater than the teeth; but if the greatest attainable exactness in the operation of the wheel is aimed at, it is important to observe that backlash, in elliptical gearing, has an effect quite different from that resulting in the case of circular wheels. When the pitch-curves are circles, they are always in contact; and we may, if we choose, make the tooth only half the breadth of the space, so long as its outline is correct. When the motion of the driver is reversed, the follower will stand still until the backlash is taken up, when the motion will go on with a perfectly constant velocity ratio as before. But in the ease of two elliptical wheels, if the follower stand still while the driver moves, which must happen when the motion is reversed if backlash exists, the pitch-curves are thrown out of contact, and, although the continuity of the motion will not be interrupted, the velocity ratio will be affected. If the motion is never to be reversed, the perfect law of the velocity ratio due to the elliptical pitch-curve may be preserved by reducing the thickness of the tooth, not equally on each side, as is done in circular wheels, but wholly on the side not in action. But if the machine must be capable of acting indifferently in both directions, the reduction must be made on both sides of the tooth: evidently the action will be slightly impaired, for which reason the backlash should be reduced to a minimum. Precisely what is the minimum is not so easy to say, as it evidently depends much upon the excellence of the tools and the skill of the workmen. In many treatises on constructive mechanism it is variously stated that the backlash should be from one-fifteenth to one-eleventh of the pitch, which would seem to be an ample allowance in reasonably good castings not intended to be finished, and quite excessive if the teeth are to be cut; nor is it very obvious that its amount should depend upon the pitch any more than upon the precession of the equinoxes. On paper, at any rate, we may reduce it to zero, and make the teeth and spaces equal in breadth, as shown in the figure, the teeth being indicated by the double lines. Those upon the portion l h are then laid off upon k i, after which these divisions are transferred to curves. And since under that condition the motion of this third line, relatively to each of the others, is the same as though it rolled along each of them separately while they remained fixed, the process of constructing the generated curves becomes comparatively simple. For the describing line, we naturally select a circle, which, in order to fulfil the condition, must be small enough to roll within the pitch ellipse; its diameter is determined by the consideration, that if it be equal to a p, the radius of the arc a f, the flanks of the teeth in that region will be radial. We have, therefore, chosen a circle whose diameter, a b, is three-fourths of a p, as shown, so that the teeth, even at the ends of the wheels, will be broader at the base than on the pitch line. This circle ought strictly to roll upon the true elliptical curve, and assuming as usual the tracing-point upon the circumference, the generated curves would vary slightly from true epicycloids, and no two of those used in the same quadrant of the ellipse would be exactly alike. Were it possible to divide the ellipse accurately, there would be no difficulty in laying out these curves; but having substituted the circular arcs, we must now roll the generating circle upon these as bases, thus forming true epicycloidal teeth, of which those lying upon the same approximating arc will be exactly alike.[I-73] Should the junction of two of these arcs fall within the breadth of a tooth, as at d, evidently both the face and the flank on one side of that tooth will be different from those on the other side; should the junction coincide with the edge of a tooth, which is very nearly the case at f, then the face on that side will be the epicycloid belonging to one of the arcs, its flank a hypocycloid belonging to the other; and it is possible that either the face or the flank on one side should be generated by the rolling of the describing circle partly on one arc, partly on the one adjacent, which, upon a large scale and where the best results are aimed at, may make a sensible change in the form of the curve.

Fig. 197

Fig. 197.

“The convenience of the constructions given in Fig. 194 is nowhere more apparent than in the drawing of the epicycloids, when, as in the case in hand, the base and generating circles may be of incommensurable diameters; for which reason we have, in Fig. 197, shown its application in connection with the most rapid and accurate mode yet known of describing those curves. Let c be the centre of the base circle; b that of the rolling one; a the point of contact. Divide the semi-circumference of b into six equal parts at 1, 2, 3, &c.; draw the common tangent at a, upon which rectify the arc a2 by process No. 1, then by process No. 2 set out an equal arc a2 on the base circle, and stepping it off three times to the right and left, bisect these spaces, thus making subdivisions on the base circle equal in length to those on the rolling one. Take in succession as radii the chords a1, a2, a3, &c., of the describing circle, and with centres 1, 2, 3, &c., on the base circle, strike arcs either externally or internally, as shown respectively on the right and left; the curve tangent to the external arcs is the epicycloid, that tangent to the internal ones the hypocycloid, forming the face and flank of a tooth for the base circle.

Fig. 198

Fig. 198.

“In the diagram, Fig. 196, we have shown a part of an ellipse whose length is 10 inches and breadth 6, the figure being half size. In order to give an idea of the actual appearance of the combination when complete, we show in Fig. 198 the pair in gear, on a scale of 3 inches to the foot. The excessive eccentricity was selected merely for the purpose of illustration. Fig. 198 will serve also to call attention to another serious circumstance, which is that although the ellipses are alike, the wheels are not; nor can they be made so if there be an even number of teeth, for the obvious reason that a tooth upon one wheel must fit into a space on the other; and since in the first wheel, Fig. 196, we chose to place a tooth at the extremity of each axis, we must in the second one place there a space instead; because at one time the major axes must coincide, at another the minor axis, as in Fig. 191. If then we use even numbers, the distribution and even the forms of the teeth are not the same in the two wheels of the pair. But this complication may be avoided by using an odd number of teeth, since, placing a tooth at one extremity of the major axis, a space will come at the other.

Fig. 199

Fig. 199.

“It is not, however, always necessary to cut teeth all round these wheels, as will be seen by an examination of Fig. 199, c and d being the fixed centres of the two ellipses in contact at p. Now p must be on the line c d, whence, considering the free foci, we see p b is equal to p c, and p a to p d; and the common tangent at p makes equal angles with c p and p a, as is also with p b and p d; therefore, c d being a straight line, a b is also a straight line and equal to c d. If then the wheels be overhung, that is, fixed on the ends of the shafts outside the bearings, leaving the outer faces free, the moving foci may be connected by a rigid link a b, as shown.

“This link will then communicate the same motion that would result from the use of the complete elliptical wheels, and we may therefore dispense with most of the teeth, retaining only those near the extremities of the major axes which are necessary in order to assist and control the motion of the link at and near the dead-points. The arc of the pitch-curves through which the teeth must extend will vary with their eccentricity: but in many cases it would not be greater than that which in the approximation may be struck about one centre, so that, in fact, it would not be necessary to go through the process of rectifying and subdividing the quarter of the ellipse at all, as in this case it can make no possible difference whether the spacing adopted for the teeth to be cut would “come out even” or not if carried around the curve. By this expedient, then, we may save not only the trouble of drawing, but a great deal of labor in making, the teeth round the whole ellipse. We might even omit the intermediate portions of the pitch ellipses themselves; but as they move in rolling contact their retention can do no harm, and in one part of the movement will be beneficial, as they will do part of the work; for if, when turning, as shown by the arrows, we consider the wheel whose axis is d as the driver, it will be noted that its radius of contact, c p, is on the increase; and so long as this is the case the other wheel will be compelled to move by contact of the pitch lines, although the link be omitted. And even if teeth be cut all round the wheels, this link is a comparatively inexpensive and a useful addition to the combination, especially if the eccentricity be considerable. Of course the wheels shown in Fig. 198 might also have been made alike, by placing a tooth at one end of the major axis and a space at the other, as above suggested. In regard to the variation in the velocity ratio, it will be seen, by reference to Fig. 199, that if d be the axis of the driver, the follower will in the position there shown move faster, the ratio of the angular velocities being pd/pb; if the driver turn uniformly the velocity of[I-74] the follower will diminish, until at the end of half a revolution, the velocity ratio will be pb/pd; in the other half of the revolution these changes will occur in a reverse order. But p d = l b; if then the centres b d are given in position, we know l p, the major axis; and in order to produce any assumed maximum or minimum velocity ratio, we have only to divide l p into segments whose ratio is equal to that assumed value, which will give the foci of the ellipse, whence the minor axis may be found and the curve described. For instance, in Fig. 198 the velocity ratio being nine to one at the maximum, the major axis is divided into two parts, of which one is nine times as long as the other; in Fig. 199 the ratio is as one to three, so that, the major axis being divided into four parts, the distance a c between the foci is equal to two of them, and the distance of either focus from the nearer extremity of the major axis equal to one, and from the more remote extremity equal to three of these parts.”

Fig. 200

Fig. 200.

Another example of obtaining a variable motion is given in Fig. 200. The only condition necessary to the construction of wheels of this class is that the sum of the radii of the pitch circles on the line of centres shall equal the distance between the axes of the two wheels. The pitch curves are to be considered the same as pitch circles, “so that,” says Willis, “if any given circle or curve be assumed as a describing (or generating) curve, and if it be made to roll on the inside of one of these pitch curves and on the outside of the corresponding portion of the other pitch curve, then the motion communicated by the pressure and sliding contact of one of the curved teeth so traced upon the other will be exactly the same as that effected by the rolling contact (by friction) of the original pitch curves.”

It is obvious that on b the corner sections are formed of simple segments of a circle of which the centre is the axis of the shaft, and that the sections between them are simply racks. The corners of a are segments of a circle of which the axis of a is the centre, and the sections between the corners curves meeting the pitch circles of the rack at every point as it passes the line of centres.

Fig. 201

Fig. 201.

Intermittent motion may also be obtained by means of a worm-wheel constructed as in Fig. 201, the worm having its teeth at a right angle to its axis for a distance around the circumference proportioned to the required duration of the period of rest; or the motion may be made variable by giving the worm teeth different degrees of inclination (to the axis), on different portions of the circumference.

In addition to the simple operation of two or more wheels transmitting motion by rotating about their fixed centres and in fixed positions, the following examples of wheel motion may be given.

Fig. 202

Fig. 202.

In Fig. 202 are two gear-wheels, a, which is fast upon its stationary shaft, and b, which is free to rotate upon its shaft, the link c affording journal bearing to the two shafts. Suppose that a has 40 teeth, while b has 20 teeth, and that the link c is rotated once around the axis of a, how many revolutions will b make? By reason of there being twice as many teeth in a as in b the latter will make two rotations, and in addition to this it will, by reason of its connection to the arm c, also make a revolution, these being two distinct motions, one a rotation of b about the axis of a, and the other two rotations of b upon its own axis.

Fig. 203

Fig. 203.

Fig. 204

Fig. 204.

A simple arrangement of gearing for reversing the direction of rotation of a shaft is shown in Fig. 203. i and f are fast and loose pulleys for the shaft d, a and c are gears free to rotate upon d, n is a clutch driven by d; hence if n be moved so as to engage with c the latter will act as a driver to rotate the shaft b, the[I-75] wheel upon b rotating a in an opposite direction to the rotation of d. But if n be moved to engage with a the latter becomes the driving wheel, and b will be caused to rotate in the opposite direction. Since, however, the engagement of the clutch n with the clutch on the nut of the gear-wheels is accompanied with a violent shock and with noise, a preferable arrangement is shown in Fig. 204, in which the gears are all fast to their shafts, and the driving shaft for c passes through the core or bore of that for a, which is a sleeve, so that when the driving belt acts upon pulley f the shaft b rotates in one direction, while when the belt acts upon e, b rotates in the opposite direction, i being a loose pulley.

If the speed of rotation of b require to be greater in one direction than in the other, then the bevel-wheel on b is made a double one, that is to say, it has two annular toothed surfaces on its radial face, one of larger diameter than the other; a gearing with one of these toothed surfaces, and c with the other. It is obvious that the pinions a c, being of equal diameters, that gearing with the surface or gear of largest diameter will give to b the slowest speed of rotation.

Fig. 205

Fig. 205.

Fig. 205 represents Watt’s sun-and-planet motion for converting reciprocating into rotary motion; b d is the working beam of the engine, whose centre of motion is at d. The gear a is so connected to the connecting rod that it cannot rotate, and is kept in gear with the wheel c on the fly-wheel shaft by means of the link shown. The wheel a being prevented from rotation on its axis causes rotary motion to the wheel c, which makes two revolutions for one orbit of a.

Fig. 206

Fig. 206.

An arrangement for the rapid increase of motion by means of gears is shown in Fig. 206, in which a is a stationary gear, b is free to rotate upon its shaft, and being pivoted upon the shaft of a, at d, is capable of rotation around a while remaining in gear with c. Suppose now that the wheel a were absent, then if b were rotated around c with d as a centre of motion, c and its shaft e would make a revolution even though b would have no rotation upon its axis. But a will cause b to rotate upon its axis and thus communicate a second degree of motion to c, with the result that one revolution of b causes two rotations of c.

Fig. 207

Fig. 207.

The relation of motion between b and c is in this case constant (2 to 1), but this relation may be made variable by a construction such as shown in Fig. 207, in which the wheel b is carried in a gear-wheel h, which rides upon the shaft d. Suppose now that h remains stationary while a revolves, then motion will be transmitted through b to c, and this motion will be constant and in proportion to the relative diameters of a and c. But suppose by means of an independent pinion the wheel h be rotated upon its axis, then increased motion will be imparted to c, and the amount of the increase will be determined by the speed of rotation of h, which may be made variable by means of cone pulleys or other suitable mechanical devices.

Fig. 208

Fig. 208.

Fig. 208 represents an arrangement of gearing used upon steam fire-engines and traction engines to enable them to turn easily in a short radius, as in turning corners in narrow streets. The object is to enable the driving wheel on either side of the engine to increase or diminish its rotation to suit the conditions caused by the leading or front pair of steering wheels.

In the figures a is a plate wheel having the lugs l, by means of which it may be rotated by a chain. a is a working fit on the shaft s, and carries three pinions e pivoted upon their axes p. f is a bevel-gear, a working fit on s, while c is a similar gear fast to s. The pinions b, d are to drive gears on the wheels of the engine, the wheels being a working fit on the axle. Let it now be noted that if s be rotated, c and f will rotate in opposite directions and a will remain stationary. But if a be rotated, then all the gears will rotate with it, but e will not rotate upon p unless there be an unequal resistance to the motion of pinions d and b. So soon, however, as there exists an inequality of resistance between d and b then pinions e operate. For example, let b have more resistance than d, and b will rotate more slowly, causing pinion e to rotate and move c faster than is due to the motion of the chain wheel a, thus causing the wheel on one side of the engine to retard and the other to increase its motion, and thus enable the engine to turn easily. From its action this arrangement is termed the equalizing gear.

[I-76]In Figs. 209 to 214 are shown what are known as mangle-wheels from their having been first used in clothes mangling machines.

Fig. 209

Fig. 209.

The mangle-wheel[10] in its simplest form is a revolving disc of metal with a centre of motion c (Fig. 209). Upon the face of the disc is fixed a projecting annulus a m, the outer and inner edges of which are cut into teeth. This annulus is interrupted at f, and the teeth are continued round the edges of the interrupted portion so as to form a continued series passing from the outer to the inner edge and back again.

[10] From Willis’s “Principles of Mechanism.”

A pinion b, whose teeth are of the same pitch as those of the wheel, is fixed to the end of an axis, and this axis is mounted so as to allow of a short travelling motion in the direction b c. This may be effected by supporting this end of it either in a swing-frame moving upon a centre as at d, or in a sliding piece, according to the nature of the train with which it is connected. A short pivot projects from the centre of the pinion, and this rests in and is guided by a groove b s f t b h k, which is cut in the surface of the disc, and made concentric to the pitch circles of the inner and outer rays of teeth, and at a normal distance from them equal to the pitch radius of the pinion.

Now when the pinion revolves it will, if it be on the outside, as in Fig. 209, act upon the spur teeth and turn the wheel in the opposite direction to its own, but when the interrupted portion f of the teeth is thus brought to the pinion the groove will guide the pinion while it passes from the outside to the inside, and thus bring its teeth into action with the annular or internal teeth. The wheel will then receive motion in the same direction as that of the pinion, and this will continue until the gap f is again brought to the pinion, when the latter will be carried outwards and the motion again be reversed. The velocity ratio in either direction will remain constant, but the ratio when the pinion is inside will differ slightly from the ratio when it is outside, because the pitch radius of the annular or internal teeth is necessarily somewhat less than that of the spur teeth. However, the change of direction is not instantaneous, for the form of the groove s f t, which connects the inner and outer grooves, is a semicircle, and when the axis of the pinion reaches s the velocity of the mangle-wheel begins to diminish gradually until it is brought to rest at f, and is again gradually set in motion from f to t, when the constant ratio begins; and this retardation will be increased by increasing the difference between the radius of the inner and outer pitch circles.

Fig. 210

Fig. 210.

The teeth of a mangle-wheel are, however, most commonly formed by pins projecting from the face of the disc as in Fig. 210. In this manner the pitch circles for the inner and outer wheels coincide, and therefore the velocity ratio is the same within and without, also the space through which the pinion moves in shifting is reduced.

Fig. 211

Fig. 211.

This space may be still further reduced by arranging the teeth as in Fig. 211, that is, by placing the spur-wheel within the annular or internal one; but at the same time the difference of the two velocity ratios is increased.

If it be required that the velocity ratio vary, then the pitch lines of the mangle-wheel must no longer be concentric.

Fig. 212

Fig. 212.

Thus in Fig. 212 the groove k l is directed to the centre of the mangle-wheel, and therefore the pinion will proceed during this portion of its path without giving any motion to the wheel, and in the other lines of teeth the pitch radius varies, hence the angular velocity ratio will vary.

In Figs. 209, 210, and 211 the curves of the teeth are readily obtained by employing the same describing circle for the whole of[I-77] them. But when the form Fig. 212 is adopted, the shape of the teeth requires some consideration.

Every tooth of such a mangle-wheel may be considered as formed of two ordinary teeth set back to back, the pitch line passing through the middle. The outer half, therefore, appropriated to the action of the pinion on the outside of the wheel, resembles that portion of an ordinary spur-wheel tooth that lies beyond its pitch line, and the inner half which receives the inside action of the pinion resembles the half of an annular wheel that lies within the pitch circle. But the consequence of this arrangement is, that in both positions the action of the driving teeth must be confined to the approach of its teeth to the line of centres, and consequently these teeth must be wholly within their pitch line.

To obtain the forms of the teeth, therefore, take any convenient describing circle, and employ it to describe the teeth of the pinion by rolling within its pitch circle, and to describe the teeth of the wheel by rolling within and without its pitch circle, and the pinion will then work truly with the teeth of the wheel in both positions. The tooth at each extremity of the series must be a circular one, whose centre lies on the pitch line and whose diameter is equal to half the pitch.

Fig. 213

Fig. 213.

If the reciprocating piece move in a straight line, as it very often does, then the mangle-wheel is transformed into a mangle-rack (Fig. 213) and its teeth may be simply made cylindrical pins, which those of the mangle-wheel do not admit of on correct principle. b b is the sliding piece, and a the driving pinion, whose axis must have the power of shifting from a to a through a space equal to its own diameter, to allow of the change from one side of the rack to the other at each extremity of the motion. The teeth of the mangle-rack may receive any of the forms which are given to common rack-teeth, if the arrangement be derived from either Fig. 210 or Fig. 211.

But the mangle-rack admits of an arrangement by which the shifting motion of the driving pinion, which is often inconvenient, may be dispensed with.

Fig. 214

Fig. 214.

b b Fig. 214, is the piece which receives the reciprocating motion, and which may be either guided between rollers, as shown, or in any other usual way; a the driving pinion, whose axis of motion is fixed; the mangle rack c c is formed upon a separate plate, and in this example has the teeth upon the inside of the projecting ridge which borders it, and the guide-groove formed within the ring of teeth, similar to Fig. 211.

This rack is connected with the piece b b in such a manner as to allow of a short transverse motion with respect to that piece, by which the pinion, when it arrives at either end of the course, is enabled by shifting the rack to follow the course of the guide-groove, and thus to reverse the motion by acting upon the opposite row of teeth.

The best mode of connecting the rack and its sliding piece is that represented in the figure, and is the same which is adopted in the well-known cylinder printing-engines of Mr. Cowper. Two guide-rods k c, k c are jointed at one end k k to the reciprocating piece b b, and at the other end c c to the shifting-rack; these rods are moreover connected by a rod m m which is jointed to each midway between their extremities, so that the angular motion of these guide-rods round their centres k k will be the same; and as the angular motion is small and the rods nearly parallel to the path of the slide, their extremities c c may be supposed to move at a right angle to that path, and consequently the rack which is jointed to those extremities will also move upon b b in a direction at a right angle to its path, which is the thing required, and admits of no other motion with respect to b b.

Fig. 215

Fig. 215.

To multiply plane motion the construction shown in Fig. 215 is frequently employed. a and b are two racks, and c is a wheel between them pivoted upon the rod r. A crank shaft or lever d is pivoted at e and also (at p) to r. If d be operated c traverses along a and also rotates upon its axis, thus giving to b a velocity equal to twice that of the lateral motion of c.

The diameter of the wheel is immaterial, for the motion of b will always be twice that of c.

Fig. 216

Fig. 216.

Friction gearing-wheels which communicate motion one to the other by simple contact of their surfaces are termed friction-wheels, or friction-gearing. Thus in Fig. 216 let a and b be two wheels that touch each other at c, each being suspended upon a central shaft; then if either be made to revolve, it will cause the other to revolve also, by the friction of the surfaces meeting at c. The degree of force which will be thus conveyed from one to the other will depend upon the character of the surface and the length of the line of contact at c.

These surfaces should be made as concentric to the axis of the wheel and as flat and smooth as possible in order to obtain a maximum power of transmission. Mr. E. S. Wicklin states that under these conditions and proper forms of construction as much as 300 horse-power may be (and is in some of the Western States) transmitted.

In practice, small wheels of this class are often covered with some softer material, as leather; sometimes one wheel only is so covered, and it is preferred that the covered wheel drive the iron one, because, if a slip takes place and the iron wheel was the driver, it would be apt to wear a concave spot in the wood covered one, and the friction between the two would be so greatly diminished that there would be difficulty in starting them when the damaged spot was on the line of centre.

If, however, the iron wheel ceased motion, the wooden one continuing to revolve, the damage would be spread over that part of the circumference of the wooden one which continued while the iron one was at rest, and if this occurred throughout a whole revolution of the wooden wheel its roundness would not be apt to be impaired, except in so far as differences in the hardness of the wood and similar causes might effect.

“To select the best material for driving pulleys in friction-gearing has required considerable experience; nor is it certain[I-78] that this object has yet been attained. Few, if any, well-arranged and careful experiments have been made with a view of determining the comparative value of different materials as a frictional medium for driving iron pulleys. The various theories and notions of builders have, however, caused the application to this use of several varieties of wood, and also of leather, india-rubber, and paper; and thus an opportunity has been given to judge of their different degrees of efficiency. The materials most easily obtained, and most used, are the different varieties of wood, and of these several have given good results.

“For driving light machinery, running at high speed, as in sash, door, and blind factories, basswood, the linden of the Southern and Middle States (Tilia Americana) has been found to possess good qualities, having considerable durability and being unsurpassed in the smoothness and softness of its movement. Cotton wood (Populus monilifera) has been tried for small machinery with results somewhat similar to those of basswood, but is found to be more affected by atmospheric changes. And even white pine makes a driving surface which is, considering the softness of the wood, of astonishing efficiency and durability. But for all heavy work, where from twenty to sixty horse-power is transmitted by a single contact, soft maple (Acer rubrum) has, at present, no rival. Driving pulleys of this wood, if correctly proportioned and well built, will run for years with no perceptible wear.

“For very small pulleys, leather is an excellent driver and is very durable; and rubber also possesses great adhesion as a driver; but a surface of soft rubber undoubtedly requires more power than one of a less elastic substance.

“Recently paper has been introduced as a driver for small machinery, and has been applied in some situations where the test was most severe; and the remarkable manner in which it has thus far withstood the severity of these tests appears to point to it as the most efficient material yet tried.

“The proportioning, however, of friction-pulleys to the work required and their substantial and accurate construction are matters of perhaps more importance than the selection of material.

“Friction-wheels must be most accurately and substantially made and kept in perfect line so that the contact between the surfaces may not be diminished. The bodies are usually of iron lagged or covered with wooden segments.

“All large drivers, say from four to ten feet diameter and from twelve to thirty inch face, should have rims of soft maple six or seven inches deep. These should be made up of plank, one and a half or two inches thick, cut into ‘cants,’ one-sixth, eighth, or tenth of the circle, so as to place the grain of the wood as nearly as practicable in the direction of the circumference. The cants should be closely fitted, and put together with white lead or glue, strongly nailed and bolted. The wooden rim, thus made up to within about three inches of the width required for the finished pulley, is mounted upon one or two heavy iron ‘spiders,’ with six or eight radial arms. If the pulley is above six feet in diameter, there should be eight arms, and two spiders when the width of face is more than eighteen inches.

“Upon the ends of the arms are flat ‘pads,’ which should be of just sufficient width to extend across the inner face of the wooden rim, as described; that is, three inches less than the width of the finished pulley. These pads are gained into the inner side of the rim; the gains being cut large enough to admit keys under and beside the pads. When the keys are well driven, strong ‘lag’ screws are put through the ends of the arm into the rim. This done, an additional ‘round’ is put upon each side of the rim to cover bolt heads and secure the keys from ever working out. The pulley is now put to its place on the shaft and keyed, the edges trued up, and the face turned off with the utmost exactness.

“For small drivers, the best construction is to make an iron pulley of about eight inches less diameter and three inches less face than the pulley required. Have four lugs, about an inch square, cast across the face of this pulley. Make a wooden rim, four inches deep, with face equal to that of the iron pulley, and the inside diameter equal to the outer diameter of the iron. Drive this rim snugly on over the rim of the iron pulley having cut gains to receive the lugs, together with a hard wood key beside each. Now add a round of cants upon each side, with their inner diameter less than the first, so as to cover the iron rim. If the pulley is designed for heavy work, the wood should be maple, and should be well fastened by lag screws put through the iron rim; but for light work, it may be of basswood or pine, and the lag screws omitted. But in all cases, the wood should be thoroughly seasoned.

“In the early use of friction-gearing, when it was used only as backing gear in saw-mills, and for hoisting in grist-mills, the pulleys were made so as to present the head of the wood to the surface; and we occasionally yet meet with an instance where they are so made. But such pulleys never run so smoothly nor drive so well as those made with the fibre more nearly in a line with the work.”[11]

[11] By E. S. Wicklin.

Fig. 217

Fig. 217.

The driving friction may be obtained from contact of the radial surfaces in two ways: thus, Fig. 217 represents three discs, a, b, and c; the edge of a being gripped by and between b and c, which must be held together by a spiral spring s or other equivalent device. These wheels may be made to give a variable speed of rotation by curving the surfaces of the pair b c as in the figure. By means of suitable lever-motion a may be made to advance towards or recede from the centre of b and c, giving to their shaft an increased or diminished speed of revolution.

Fig. 218

Fig. 218.

Fig. 219

Fig. 219.

A similar result may be obtained by the construction shown in Fig. 218, in which d and e are two discs fast upon their respective shafts, and c are discs of leather clamped in e. It is obvious that if d be the driver the speed of revolution of e will be diminished in proportion as it is moved nearer to the centre of d, and also that the direction of revolution of d remaining constant, that of e will be in one direction if on the side b of the centre of d, and in the other direction if it is on the side a of the centre of d, thus affording means of reversing the motion as well as of varying its speed. A similar arrangement is sometimes employed to enable the direction of rotation of the driver shaft to be reversed, or its motion to cease. Thus, in Fig. 219, r is a driving rope driving the discs a, b, and c, d, e, f, g are discs of yellow pine clamped between the flanges h i; when these five discs are forced (by lifting shaft h), against the face of a motion occurs in one direction, while if forced against b the direction of motion of h is reversed.

Fig. 220

Fig. 220.

Fig. 221

Fig. 221.

For many purposes, such as hoisting, for example, where considerable power requires to be transmitted, the form of friction wheels shown in Fig. 220 is employed, the object being to increase the line of contact between wheels of a given width of[I-79] face. In this case the strain due to the length of the line of contact partly counteracts itself, thus relieving to that extent the journals from friction. Thus in Fig. 221 is shown a single wedge and groove of a pair of wheels. The surface pressure on each side will be at a right angle to the face, or in the direction described by the arrows a and b. The surface contact acts to thrust the bearings of the two shafts apart. The effective length of surface acting to thrust the bearings apart being denoted by the dotted line c. The relative efficiency of this class of wheel, however, is not to be measured by the length of the line c, as compared to that of the two contacting sides of the groove, because it is increased from the wedge shape of the groove, and furthermore, no matter how solid the wheels may be, there will be some elasticity which will operate to increase the driving power due to the contact. It is to preserve the wedge principle that the wedges are made flat at the top, so that they shall not bottom in the grooves even after considerable wear has taken place. The object of employing this class of gear is to avoid noise and jar and to insure a uniform motion. The motion at the line of contact of such wheels is not a rolling, but, in part, a sliding one, which may readily be perceived from a consideration of the following. The circumference of the top of each wedge is greater than that of the bottom, and, in the case of the groove, the circumference of the top is greater than that of the bottom; and since the top or largest circumference of one contacts with the smallest circumference of the other, it follows that the difference between the two represents the amount of sliding motion that occurs in each revolution. Suppose, for example, we take two of such wheels 10 inches in diameter, having wedges and grooves 14 inch high and deep respectively; then the top of the groove will travel 31.416 inches in a revolution, and it will contact with the bottom of the wedge which travels (on account of its lesser diameter) 29.845 inches per revolution.

Fig. 222

Fig. 222.

Fig. 222 shows the construction for a pair of bevel wheels on the same principle.

Fig. 223

Fig. 223.

Fig. 224

Fig. 224.

A form of friction-gearing in which the journals are relieved of the strain due to the pressure of contact, and in which slip is impossible, is shown in Fig. 223. It consists of projections on one wheel and corresponding depressions or cavities on the other. These projections and cavities are at opposite angles on each half of each wheel, so as to avoid the end pressure on the journals which would otherwise ensue. Their shapes may be formed at will, providing that the tops of the projections are narrower than their bases, which is necessary to enable the projections to enter and leave the cavities. In this class of positive gear great truth or exactness is possible, because both the projections and cavities may be turned in a lathe. Fig. 224 represents a similar kind of[I-80] gear with the projections running lengthways of the cylinder approaching more nearly in its action to toothed gearing, and in this case the curves for the teeth and groves should be formed by the rules already laid down for toothed gearing. The action of this latter class may be made very smooth, because a continuous contact on the line of centres may be maintained by reason of the longitudinal curve of the teeth.

Fig. 225

Fig. 225.

Cams may be employed to impart either a uniform, an irregular, or an intermittent motion, the principles involved in their construction being as follows:—Let it be required to construct a cam that being revolved at a uniform velocity shall impart a uniform reciprocating motion. First draw an inner circle o, Fig. 225, whose radius must equal the radius of the shaft that is to drive it, plus the depth of the cam at its shallowest part, plus the radius of the roller the cam is to actuate. Then from the same centre draw an outer circle s, the radius between these two circles being equal to the amount the cam is to move the roller. Draw a line o p, and divide it into any convenient numbers of divisions (five being shown in the figure), and through these points draw circles. Divide the outer circle s into twice as many equal divisions as the line o p is divided into (as from 1 to 10 in the figure), and where these lines pass through the circles will be points through which the pitch line of the cam may be drawn.

Thus where circle 1 meets line 1, or at point a, is one point in the pitch line of the cam; where circle 2 meets line 2, or at b, is another point in the pitch line of the cam, and so on until we reach the point e, where circle 5 meets line 5. From this point we simply repeat the process, the point e where line 6 cuts circle 4, being a point on the pitch line, and so on throughout the whole 10 divisions, and through the points so obtained we draw the pitch line.

Fig. 226

Fig. 226.

Fig. 227

Fig. 227.

Fig. 228

Fig. 228.

Fig. 229

Fig. 229.

Fig. 230

Fig. 230.

Fig. 231

Fig. 231.

If we were to cut out a cam to the outline thus obtained, and revolve it at a uniform velocity, it would move a point held against its perimeter at a uniform velocity throughout the whole of the cam revolution. But such a point would rapidly become worn away and dulled, which would, as the point broadened, vary the motion imparted to it, as will be seen presently. To avoid this wear a roller is used in place of a point, and the diameter of the roller affects the action of the cam, causing it to accelerate the cam action at one and retard it at another part of the cam revolution, hence the pitch line obtained by the process in Fig. 225 represents the path of the centre of the roller, and from this pitch line we may mark out the actual cam by the construction shown in Fig. 226. A pair of compasses are set to the radius of the roller r, and from points (such as at a, b, e, f), as the pitch line, arcs of circles are struck, and a line drawn to just meet the crowns of these arcs will give the outline of the actual cam. The motion of the roller, however, in approaching and receding from the cam centre c, must be in a straight line g g that passes through the centre c of the cam. Suppose, for example, that instead of the roller lifting and falling in the line g g its arm is horizontal, as in Fig. 227, and that this arm being pivoted the roller moves in an arc of a circle as d d, and the motion imparted to the arm will no longer be uniform. Furthermore, different diameters of roller require different forms of cam to accomplish the same motion, or, in other words, with a given cam the action will vary with different diameters of roller. Suppose, for example, that in Fig. 228 we have a cam that is to operate a roller along the line a a, and that b represents a large[I-81] and c a small roller, and with the cam in the position shown in the figure, c will have contact with the cam edge at point d, while b will have contact at the point e, and it follows that on account of the enlarged diameter of roller b over roller c, its action is at this point quicker under a given amount of cam motion, which has occurred because the point of contact has advanced upon the roller surface—rolling along it, as it were. In Fig. 229 we find that as the cam moves forward this action continues on both the large and the small roller, its effect being greater upon the large than upon the small one, and as this rolling motion of the point of contact evidently occurs easily, a quick roller motion is obtained without shock or vibration. Continuing the cam motion, we find in Fig. 230 that the point of contact is receding toward the line of motion on the large roller and advancing upon the small one, while in Fig. 231 the two have contact at about the same point, the forward motion being about completed.

Fig. 232

Fig. 232.

Fig. 233

Fig. 233.

To compare the motions of the respective rollers along the line of motion a a we proceed as in Fig. 232, in which the two dots m and n are the same distance apart as are the centres of the two rollers b and c when in the positions they occupy in Fig. 228; hence a pair of compasses set to the radius from the axis of the cam to that of roller b will, if rested at n, strike the arc marked 1 above the line of motion a a, while a pair of compasses set to the radius from the axis of the cam to that of roller c in Fig. 228 will, if rested at m in Fig. 232, mark the arc 1 below the line of motion a a. Continuing this process, we set the compasses to the radius from the axis of the cam to that of roller b in Fig. 229, and mark this radius at arc 2 above the line a a in Fig. 232; hence the distance apart of these two arcs is the amount the roller travelled along the line a a while the cam moved from its position in Fig. 228 to its position in Fig. 229. Next we set the compasses from the axis of the cam to that of the large roller in Fig. 230, and then mark arc 3 above the line in Fig. 232, and repeat the process for Fig. 233, thus using the centre n for all the positions of the large roller and marking its motion above the line a a. To get the motion of the small roller c, we set the compasses to the radius from the axis of the cam to the small roller in Fig. 228, and then resting one point of these compasses on centre m in Fig. 232, we mark arc 1 below the line a a. Turning to Fig. 229 we set the compasses from the cam axis to the centre of roller c, and from centre n in Fig. 232 mark arc 2 below line a. From Figs. 230 and 231 proceed in the same way to get lines 3 and 4 below line a in Fig. 232, and we may at once compare the two motions. Thus we find that while the cam moved from the position in Fig. 228 to that in Fig. 229, the large roller moved twice as far as the small one, while at 230 the motions were rapidly equalizing again, the equalization being completed at 231.

Fig. 234

Fig. 234.

Fig. 235

Fig. 235.

Fig. 236

Fig. 236.

Fig. 237

Fig. 237.

We may now consider the return motion, and in Fig. 233 we find that the order of things is reversed, for the small roller has contact at o, while the large one has contact at p; hence the small one leads and gives the most rapid motion, which it continues to do, as is shown in Figs. 234, 235, and 236, and we may plot out the two motions as in Fig. 237—that for the large roller being above and that for the small one below the line a a. First we set a pair of compasses to the radius from the axis of the large and small roller when in the position shown in Fig. 231 (which corresponds to the same radius in Fig. 228), and mark two centres, m and n, as we did in Fig. 232. Of these n is the centre for plotting the motion of the large roller and m the centre for[I-82] plotting the motion of the small one. We set a pair of compasses to the radius from the axis of the cam and that of the large roller in Fig. 231, and then resting the compasses at n we mark arc 5 above the line a a, Fig. 237. The compasses are then set from the cam to the roller axis in Fig. 233, and arc 6 is marked above line a a. From Figs. 234, 235, and 236 we get the radii to mark arcs 7, 8, 9 above a a, and the motion of the large roller is plotted. We proceed in the same way for the small one, but use the centre m, Fig. 237, to mark the arcs 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 below the line a a, and find that the small roller has moved quickest throughout. It appears, then, that the larger the roller the quicker the forward motion and the slower the return one, which is advantageous, because the object is to move the roller out quickly and close it slowly, so that under a quick speed the cam shall not run away from the roller as it is apt to do in the absence of a return or backing cam, which consists of a separate cam for moving the roller on its return stroke, thus dispensing with the use of springs or weights to keep the roller upon the cam and making the motion positive.

Fig. 238

Fig. 238.

The return or backing cam obviously depends for its shape upon the forward cam, and the latter having been determined, the requisite form for the return cam may be found as follows. In Fig. 238 let a represent the forward cam fastened in any suitable or convenient way to a disc of paper, or, what is better, sheet zinc, b. The cam is pivoted by a pin passing through it and the zinc, and driven into the drawing-board. A frame f is made to carry two rollers r and r′, whose width apart exactly equals the extreme length of the forward cam. The faces d d of the frame f are in a line with a line passing through the centres of the rolls r r′, and the cam is also pivoted on this line, so that when the four pins p are driven into the drawing-board, the frame f will be guided by them to move in a line that crosses the centre of the cam a. Suppose then that, the pieces occupying the position shown in the engraving, we slide f so that roller r touches the edge of cam a, and we may then take a needle and mark an arc or line around the edge of r′. We then revolve cam a a trifle, and, being fast to b, the two will move together, and with r against a we mark a second arc, coincident with the edge of roller r′. By continuing this process we mark the numerous short arcs shown upon b, and the crowns of these arcs give us the outline of the return cam. It is obvious that, while the edge of the cam a will not let roller r (and therefore frame f) move to the right, roller r′ being against the edge of the backing or return cam as marked upon b, prevents the frame f from moving to the left; hence neither roll can leave its cam.

Fig. 239

Fig. 239.

We have in this example supposed that the frame carrying the rollers is guided to move in a straight line, and it remains to give an example in which the rollers are carried on a pivoted shaft or rocking arm. In Fig. 239 we have the same cam a with a sheet of paper b fastened to it, the rollers r r′ being carried in a rock shaft pivoted at x. It is essential in this case that the rollers r and r′ and the centre upon which the cam revolves shall all three be in the arc of a circle whose centre is the axis of x, as is denoted by the arc d. The cam a is fastened to the piece of stiff paper or of sheet zinc b, and the two are pivoted by a pin passing[I-83] through the axis e of the cam and into the drawing-board, while the lever is pivoted at x by a pin passing into the drawing-board. The backing or return cam is obviously marked out the same way as was described with reference to Fig. 238.

Fig. 240

Fig. 240.

Fig. 241

Fig. 241.

In Fig. 240 we have as an example the construction of a cam to operate the slide valve of an engine which is to have the steam supply to the cylinder cut off at one-half the piston stroke, and that will admit the live steam as quickly as a valve having steam lap equal to, say, three-fourths the width of the port. In Fig. 240 let the line a represent a piston stroke of 24 inches, the outer circle b the path of the outer edge of the cam, and the inner circle c the inner edge of the cam, the radius between these circles representing the full width of the steam port. Now, in a valve having lap equal to three-fourths the width of the steam port, and travel enough to open both ports fully, the piston of a 24-inch-stroke engine will have moved about 2 inches before the steam port is fully opened, and to construct a cam that will effect the same movement we mark a dot d, distant from the end e of piston stroke 226 of the length of the line a, and by erecting the line f we get at point g, the point at which the cam must attain its greatest throw. It is obvious, therefore, that as the roller is at r the valve will be in mid-position, as shown at the bottom of the figure, and that when point g of the cam arrives at e the edge p of the valve will be moved fair with edge s of the steam port t, which will therefore be full open. To cut off at half stroke the valve must again be closed by the time point n of the cam meets the roller r; hence we may mark point n. We may then mark in the cam curve from n to m, making it as short as it will work properly without causing the roller to fail to follow the curve or strike a blow when reaching the circle c. To accomplish this end in a single cam, it is essential to make the curve as gradual as possible from point m to o, so as to start the roller motion easily. But once having fairly started, its motion may be rapidly accelerated, the descent from o to q being rapid. To prevent the roller from meeting circle c with a blow, the curve from q to n is again made gradual, so as to ease and retard the roller motion. The same remarks apply to the curve from r to g, the object being to cause the roller to begin and end its passage along the cam curve as slowly as the length of cam edge occupied by the curve will permit. There is one objection to starting the curve slowly at g, which is that the port s will be opened correspondingly slowly for the live steam. This, however, may be overcome by giving the valve an increased travel, as shown in Fig. 241, which will simply cause the valve edge to travel to a corresponding amount over the inside edge of the port. The increased travel is shown by the circles y and z, and it is seen that the cam curve from w to r is more gradual than in Fig. 240, while the roller r will be moved much more quickly in the position shown in Fig. 241 than it will in that shown in Fig. 240, both positions being that when the piston is at the end of the stroke and the port about to open. While that part of the cam curve from g to m in Fig. 241 is moving past the roller r, the valve will be moving over the bridge, the steam port remaining wide open, and therefore not affecting the steam distribution. After point m, Fig. 241, has passed the roller, we have from m to t to start the roller gradually, so that when it has arrived at t and the port begins to close for the cut-off it may move rapidly, and continue to do so until the point n reaches the roller and the cut-off has occurred, after which it does not matter how slowly the valve moves; hence we may make the curve from n to the circle y as gradual as we like.

Fig. 242

Fig. 242.

Fig. 242 represents a cam for a valve having the amount of lap represented by the distance between circles c and y, the cam occupying the position it would do with the piston at one end of the stroke, as at e. Obviously, a full port is obtained when point g reaches the roller, and as point n is distant from e three-quarters of the diameter of the outer circle, the cut-off occurs at three-quarter stroke, and we have from n to y to make the curve as gradual as we like, and from w to r in moving the valve to open the port. We cannot, however, give more gradual curves at g and at m without retarding the roller motion, and therefore opening and closing the port slower, and it would simply be a matter of increase of speed to cause the roller to fail to follow[I-84] the cam surface at these two points unless a return cam be employed.

We have in these engine cams considered the steam supply and point of cut-off only, and it is obvious that a second and separate cam would be required to operate the exhaust valves.

Fig. 243

Fig. 243.

Fig. 244

Fig. 244.

Fig. 245

Fig. 245.

Fig. 243 represents a groove-cam, and it is to be observed that the roller cannot be maintained in a close fit in the groove, because the friction on its two sides endeavours to drive it in opposite directions at the same time, causing an abrasion that soon widens the groove and reduces the roller diameter; furthermore, when the grooves are made of equal width all the way down (and these cams are often made in this way) the roller cannot have a rolling action only, but must have some sliding motion. Thus, referring to Fig. 243, the amount of sliding motion will be equal to the differences in the circumferences of the outer circle a and the inner one b. To obviate this the groove and roller must be made of such a taper that the axis of the cam and of the roller will meet on the line of the cam axes and in the middle of the width, as is shown in Fig. 244; but even in this case the cam will grind away the roller to some extent, on account of rubbing its sides in opposite directions. To obviate this, Mr. James Brady, of Brooklyn, N. Y., has patented the use of two rollers, as in Fig. 245, one acting against one side and the other against the other side of the groove, by which means lost motion and rapid wear are successfully avoided.

In making a cam of this form, the body of the cam is covered by a sleeve. The groove is cut through the sleeve and into the body, and is made wider than the diameter of the roller. When the rollers are in place on the spindle or journal, the sleeve is pushed forward, or rather endways, and fastened by a set-screw. This gives the desired bearing on both sides of the groove, while each roller touches one side only of the groove. The edges of the sleeve are then faced off even with the cam body, the whole appearing as in the figure.

VOL. I. FORMS OF SCREW THREADS. PLATE II.
THE V-THREAD. THE UNITED STATES STANDARD THREAD.
Fig. 246 Fig. 247
Fig. 246. Fig. 247.
 
THE WHITWORTH, OR ENGLISH STANDARD THREAD. THE SQUARE THREAD.
Fig. 248 Fig. 249
Fig. 248. Fig. 249.
 
THE PITCH OF A THREAD. A DOUBLE THREAD.
Fig. 250 Fig. 251
Fig. 250. Fig. 251.
 
THE RATCHET THREAD. A “DRUNKEN” THREAD.
Fig. 252 Fig. 253
Fig. 252. Fig. 253.
 
RIGHT AND LEFT HAND THREAD.
Fig. 254
Fig. 254.

[I-85]

Chapter IV.—SCREW THREAD.

Screw threads are employed for two principal purposes—for holding or securing, and for transmitting motion. There are in use, in ordinary machine shop practice, four forms of screw thread. There is, first, the sharp V-thread shown in Fig. 246; second, the United States standard thread, the Sellers thread, or the Franklin Institute thread, as it is sometimes called—all three designations signifying the same form of thread. This thread was originally proposed by William Sellers, and was afterward recommended by the Franklin Institute. It was finally adopted as a standard by the United States Navy Department. This form of thread is shown in Fig. 247. The third form is the Whitworth or English standard thread, shown in Fig. 248. It is sometimes termed the round top and bottom thread. The fourth form is the square thread shown in Fig. 249, which is used for coarse pitches, and usually for the transmission of motion.

The sharp V-thread, Fig. 246, has its sides at an angle of 60° one to the other, as shown; or, in other words, each side of the thread is at an angle of 60° to the axial line of the bolt. The United States Standard, Fig. 247, is formed by dividing the depth of the sharp V-thread into 8 equal divisions and taking off one of the divisions at the top and filling in another at the bottom, so as to leave a flat place at the top and bottom. The Whitworth thread, Fig. 248, has its sides at an angle of 55° to each other, or to the axial line of the bolt. In this the depth of the thread is divided into 6 equal parts, and the sides of the thread are joined by arcs of circles that cut off one of these parts at the top and another at the bottom of the thread. The centres from which these arcs are struck are located on the second lines of division, as denoted in the figure by the dots. Screw threads are designated by their pitch or the distance between the threads. In Fig. 250 the pitch is 14 inch, but it is usual to take the number of threads in an inch of length; hence the pitch in Fig. 250 would generally be termed a pitch of 4, or 4 to the inch. The number of threads per inch of length does not, however, govern the true pitch of the thread, unless it be a “single” thread.

A single thread is composed of one spiral projection, whose advance upon the bolt is equal in each revolution to the apparent pitch. In Fig. 251 is shown a double thread, which consists of two threads. In the figure, a denotes one spiral or thread, and b the other, the latter being carried as far as c only for the sake of illustration. The true pitch is in this case twice that of the apparent pitch, being, as is always the case, the number of revolutions the thread makes around the bolt (which gives the pitch per inch), or the distance along the bolt length that the nut or thread advances during one rotation. Threads may be made double, treble, quadruple and so on, the object being to increase the motion without the use of a coarser pitch single thread, whose increased depth would weaken the body of the bolt.

The “ratchet” thread shown in Fig. 252 is sometimes used upon bolts for ironwork, the object being to have the sides a a of the thread at a right angle to the axis of the bolt, and therefore in the direct line of the strain. Modifications of this form of thread are used in coarse pitches for screws that are to thread direct into woodwork.

A waved or drunken thread is one in which the path around the bolt is waved, as in Fig. 253, and not a continuous straight spiral, as it should be. All threads may be either left hand or right, according to their direction of inclination upon the bolt; thus, Fig. 254 is a cylinder having a right-hand thread at a and a left-hand one at b. When both ends of a piece have either right or left-hand threads, if the piece be rotated and the nuts be prevented from rotating, they will move in the same direction, and, if the pitches of the threads are alike, at the same rate of motion; but if one thread be a right and the other a left one, then, under the above conditions, the nuts will advance toward or recede from each other according to the direction of rotation of the male thread.

Fig. 255

Fig. 255.

In Fig. 255 is represented a form of thread designed to enable the nut to fit the bolt, and the thread sides to have a bearing one upon the other, notwithstanding that the diameter of the nut and bolt may differ. The thread in the nut is what may be termed a reversed ratchet thread, and that in the bolt an undercut ratchet thread, the amount of undercut being about 2°. Where this form of thread is used, the diameter of the bolt may vary as much as 132d of an inch in a bolt 34 inch in diameter, and yet the nut will screw home and be a tight fit. The difference in the thread fit that ordinarily arises from differences in the standards of measurement from wear of the threading tools, does not in this form affect the fit of the nut to the bolt. In screwing the nut on, the threads conform one to the other, giving a bearing area extending over the full sides of the thread. The undercutting on the leading face of the bolt thread gives room for the metal to conform itself to the nut thread, which it does very completely. The result is that the nut may be passed up and down the bolt several times and still remain too tight a fit to be worked by hand. Experiment has demonstrated that it may be run up and down the bolt dozens of times without becoming as loose as an ordinary bolt and nut. On account of this capacity of the peculiar form of thread employed, to adapt itself, the threads may be made a tight fit when the threading tools are new. The extra tightness that arises from the wear of these tools is accommodated in the undercutting, which gives room for the thread to adjust itself to the opposite part or nut.

Fig. 256

Fig. 256.

In a second form of self-locking thread, the thread on the bolt is made of the usual V-shape United States standard. The thread in the nut, however, is formed as illustrated in Fig. 256, which is a section of a 34-inch bolt, greatly enlarged for the sake of clearness of illustration. The leading threads are of the same angle as the thread on the bolt, but their diameters are 34 and 116th inch, which allows the nut to pass easily upon the bolt. The angle of the next thread following is 56°, the succeeding one 52°, and so on, each thread having 4° less angle than the one preceding, while the pitch remains the same throughout. As a result, the rear threads are deeper than the leading ones. As the nut is screwed home, the bolt thread is forced out or up, and fills the rear threads to a degree depending upon the diameter of the bolt thread. For example, if the bolt is 34 inch, its leading or end thread will simply change its angle from that of 60° to that of 44°, or if the bolt thread is 34 and 164th inch in diameter, its leading thread will change from an angle of 60° to one of 44°. It will almost completely fill the loose thread in the nut. The areas of spaces between the nut threads are very nearly equal, although[I-86] slightly greater at the back end of the nut, so that if the front end will enter at all, the nut will screw home, while the thread fit will be tight, even under a considerable variation in the bolt itself. From this description, it is evident that the employment of nuts threaded in this manner is only necessary in order to give to ordinary bolts all the advantages of tightness due to this form of thread.

The term “diameter” of a thread is understood to mean its diameter at the top of the thread and measured at a right angle to the axis of the bolt. When the diameter of the bottom or root of the thread is referred to it is usually specified as diameter at the bottom or at the root of the thread.

The depth of a thread is the vertical height of the thread upon the bolt, measured at a right angle to the bolt axis and not along the side of the thread.

A true thread is one that winds around the bolt in a continuous and even spiral and is not waved or drunken as is the thread in Fig. 253. An outside or male thread is one upon an external surface as upon a bolt; an internal or female thread is one produced in a bore or hole as in a nut.

The Whitworth or English standard thread, shown in Fig. 248, is that employed in Great Britain and her colonies, and to a small extent in the United States. The V-thread fig. 246 is that in most common use in the United States, but it is being displaced by the United States standard thread. The reasons for the adoption of the latter by the Franklin Institute are set forth in the report of a committee appointed by that Institute to consider the matter. From that report the following extracts are made.

“That in the course of their investigations they have become more deeply impressed with the necessity of some acknowledged standard, the varieties of threads in use being much greater than they had supposed possible; in fact, the difficulty of obtaining the exact pitch of a thread not a multiple or sub-multiple of the inch measure is sometimes a matter of extreme embarrassment.

“Such a state of things must evidently be prejudicial to the best interests of the whole country; a great and unnecessary waste is its certain consequence, for not only must the various parts of new machinery be adjusted to each other, in place of being interchangeable, but no adequate provision can be made for repairs, and a costly variety of screwing apparatus becomes a necessity. It may reasonably be hoped that should a uniformity of practice result from the efforts and investigations now undertaken, the advantages flowing from it will be so manifest, as to induce reform in other particulars of scarcely less importance.

“Your committee have held numerous meetings for the purpose of considering the various conditions required in any system which they could recommend for adoption. Strength, durability, with reference to wear from constant use, and ease of construction, would seem to be the principal requisites in any general system; for although in many cases, as, for instance, when a square thread is used, the strength of the thread and bolt are both sacrificed for the sake of securing some other advantage, yet all such have been considered as special cases, not affecting the general inquiry. With this in view, your committee decided that threads having their sides at an angle to each other must necessarily more nearly fulfil the first condition than any other form; but what this angle should be must be governed by a variety of considerations, for it is clear that if the two sides start from the same point at the top, the greater the angle contained between them, the greater will be the strength of the bolt; on the other hand, the greater this angle, supposing the apex of the thread to be over the centre of its base, the greater will be the tendency to burst the nut, and the greater the friction between the nut and the bolt, so that if carried to excess the bolt would be broken by torsional strain rather than by a strain in the direction of its length. If, however, we should make one side of the thread perpendicular to the axis of the bolt, and the other at an angle to the first, we should obtain the greatest amount of strength, together with the least frictional resistance; but we should have a thread only suitable for supporting strains in one direction, and constant care would be requisite to cut the thread in the nut in the proper direction to correspond with the bolt; we have consequently classed this form as exceptional, and decided that the two sides should be at an angle to each other and form equal angles with the base.

“The general form of the thread having been determined upon the above considerations, the angle which the sides should bear to each other has been fixed at 60°, not only because this seems to fulfil the conditions of least frictional resistance combined with the greatest strength, but because it is an angle more readily obtained than any other, and it is also in more general use. As this form is in common use almost to the exclusion of any other, your committee have carefully weighed its advantages and disadvantages before deciding to recommend any modification of it. It cannot be doubted that the sharp thread offers us the simplest form, and that its general adoption would require no special tools for its construction, but its liability to accident, always great, becomes a serious matter upon large bolts, whilst the small amount of strength at the sharp top is a strong inducement to sacrifice some of it for the sake of better protection to the remainder; when this conclusion is reached, it is at once evident a corresponding space may be filled up in the bottom of the thread, and thus give an increased strength to the bolt, which may compensate for the reduction in strength and wearing surface upon the thread. It is also clear that such a modification, by avoiding the fine points and angles in the tools of construction, will increase their durability; all of which being admitted, the question comes up, what form shall be given to the top and bottom of the thread? for it is evident one should be the converse of the other. It being admitted that the sharp thread can be made interchangeable more readily than any other, it is clear that this advantage would not be impaired if we should stop cutting out the space before we had made the thread full or sharp; but to give the same shape at the bottom of the threads would require that a similar quantity should be taken off the point of the cutting tool, thus necessitating the use of some instrument capable of measuring the required amount, but when this is done the thread having a flat top and bottom can be quite as readily formed as if it was sharp. A very slight examination sufficed to satisfy us that in point of construction the rounded top and bottom presents much greater difficulties—in fact, all taps and screws that are chased or cut in a lathe require to be finished or rounded by a second process. As the radius of the curve to form this must vary for every thread, it will be impossible to make one gauge to answer for all sizes, and very difficult, in fact impossible, without special tools, to shape it correctly for one.

“Your committee are of opinion that the introduction of a uniform system would be greatly facilitated by the adoption of such a form of thread as would enable any intelligent mechanic to construct it without any special tools, or if any are necessary, that they shall be as few and as simple as possible, so that although the round top and bottom presents some advantages when it is perfectly made, as increased strength to the thread and the best form to the cutting tools, yet we have considered that these are more than compensated by ease of construction,[I-87] the certainty of fit, and increased wearing surface offered by the flat top and bottom, and therefore recommend its adoption. The amount of flat to be taken off should be as small as possible, and only sufficient to protect the thread; for this purpose one-eighth of the pitch would seem to be ample, and this will leave three-fourths of the pitch for bearing surface. The considerations governing the pitch are so various that their discussion has consumed much time.

“As in every instance the threads now in use are stronger than their bolts, it became a question whether a finer scale would not be an advantage. It is possible that if the use of the screw thread was confined to wrought iron or brass, such a conclusion might have been reached, but as cast iron enters so largely into all engineering work, it was believed finer threads than those in general use might not be found an improvement; particularly when it was considered that so far as the vertical height of thread and strength of bolt are concerned, the adoption of a flat top and bottom thread was equivalent to decreasing the pitch of a sharp thread 25 per cent., or what is the same thing, increasing the number of threads per inch 33 per cent. If finer threads were adopted they would require also greater exactitude than at present exists in the machinery of construction, to avoid the liability of overriding, and the wearing surface would be diminished; moreover, we are of opinion that the average practice of the mechanical world would probably be found better adapted to the general want than any proportions founded upon theory alone.”


The principal requirements for a screw thread are as follows: 1. That it shall possess a strength that, in the length or depth of a nut, shall be equal to the strength of the weakest part of the bolt, which is at the bottom of the bolt thread. 2. That the tools required to produce it shall be easily made, and shall not alter their form by reason of wear. 3. That these tools shall (in the case of lathe work) be easily sharpened, and set to correct position in the lathe. 4. That a minimum of measuring and gauging shall be required to test the diameter and form of the thread. 5. That the angles of the sides shall be as acute as is consistent with the required strength. 6. That it shall not be unduly liable to become loose in cases where the nut may require to be fastened and loosened occasionally.

Referring to the first, by the term “the strength of a screw thread,” is not meant the strength of one thread, but of so many threads as are contained in the nut. This obviously depends upon the depth or thickness of the nut-piece. The standard thickness of nut, both in the United States and Whitworth systems, as well as in general practice, or where the common V-thread is used, is made equal to the diameter of the top of the thread. Therefore, by the term “strength of thread” is meant the combined strength of as many threads as are contained in a nut of the above named depth. It is obvious, then, when it is advantageous to increase the strength of a thread, that it may be done by increasing the depth of the nut, or in other words, by increasing the number of threads used in computing its strength. This is undesirable by reason of increasing the cost and labor of producing the nuts, especially as the threading tools used for nuts are the weakest, and are especially liable to breakage, even with the present depth of nuts.

It has been found from experiments that have been made that our present threads are stronger than their bolts, which is desirable, inasmuch as it gives a margin for wear on the sides of the threads. But for threads whose nuts are to remain permanently fastened and are not subject to wear, it is questionable whether it were not better for the bolts to be stronger than the threads. Suppose, for instance, that a thread strips, and the bolt will remain in place because the nut will not come off the bolt readily. Hence the pieces held by the bolt become loosened, but not disconnected. If, on the other hand, the bolt breaks, it is very liable to fall out, leaving the piece or pieces, as the case may be, to fall apart, or at least become disconnected, so far as the bolt is concerned. But since threads are used under conditions where the threads are liable to wear, and since it is undesirable to have more than one standard thread, it is better to have the threads, when new, stronger than the bolts.

Fig. 257

Fig. 257.

Fig. 258

Fig. 258.

Fig. 259

Fig. 259.

Referring to the second requirement, screw threads or the tools that produce them are originated in the lathe, and the difficulty with making a round top and bottom thread lies in shaping the corner to cut the top of the thread. This is shown in Fig. 257, where a Whitworth thread and a single-toothed thread-cutting tool are represented. The rounded point a of the tool will not be difficult to produce, but the hollow at b would require special tools to cut it. This is, in fact, the plan pursued under the Whitworth system, in which a hob or chaser-cutting tool is used to produce all the thread-cutting tools. A chaser is simply a toothed tool such as is shown in Fig. 258. Now, it would manifestly be impracticable to produce a chaser having all the curves, a and b, at the top and at the bottom of the teeth alike, by the grinding operations usually employed in the workshop, and hence the employment of the hob. Fig. 259 represents a hob, which is a threaded piece of steel with a number of grooves such as shown at a, a, a, which divide the thread into teeth, the edges of which will cut a chaser, of a form corresponding to that of the thread upon the hob. The chaser is employed to produce taps and secondary hobs to be used for cutting the threads in dies, &c., so that the original hob is the source from which all the thread-cutting tools are derived.

Fig. 260

Fig. 260.

For the United States standard or the common V-thread, however, no standard hob is necessary, because a single-pointed tool can be ground with the ordinary grinding appliances of the workshop. Thus, for the United States standard, a flat-pointed tool, Fig. 260, and for the common V-thread, a sharp-pointed tool, Fig. 260, may be used. So far as the correctness of angle of pitch and of thread depth are concerned, the United States standard and the common V-thread can both be produced, under skilful operation, more correctly than is possible with the Whitworth thread, for the following reasons:—

To enable a hob to cut, it must be hardened, and in the hardening process the pitch of the thread alters, becoming, as a[I-88] general rule (although not always) finer. This alteration of pitch is not only irregular in different threads, but also in different parts of the same thread. Now, whatever error the hob thread receives from hardening it transfers to the chaser it cuts. But the chaser also alters its form in hardening, the pitch, as a general rule, becoming coarser. It may happen that the error induced in the hob hardening is corrected by that induced by hardening the chaser, but such is not necessarily the case.

Fig. 261

Fig. 261.

The single-pointed tool for the United States standard or for the common V-thread is accurately ground to form after the hardening, and hence need contain no error. On the other hand, however, the rounded top and bottom thread preserves its form and diameter upon the thread-cutting tools better than is the case with threads having sharp corners, for the reason that a rounded point will not wear away so quickly as a sharp point. To fully perceive the importance of this, it is necessary to consider the action of a tool in cutting a thread. In Fig. 261 there is shown a chaser, a, applied to a partly-formed thread, and it will be observed that the projecting ends or points of the teeth are in continuous action, cutting a groove deeper and deeper until a full thread is developed, at which time the bottoms of the chaser teeth will meet the perimeter of the work, but will perform no cutting duty upon it. As a result, the chaser points wear off, which they will do more quickly if they are pointed, and less quickly if they are rounded. This causes the thread cut to be of increased and improper diameter at the root.

Fig. 262

Fig. 262.

The same defect occurs on the tools for cutting internal threads, or threads in holes or bores. In Fig. 262, for example, is shown a tool cutting an internal thread, which tool may be taken to represent one tooth of a tap. Here again the projecting point of the tool is in continuous cutting action, while this, being a single-toothed tool, has no bottom corners to suffer from wear. As a result of the wear upon the tools for cutting internal threads, the thread grooves, when cut to their full widths, will be too shallow in depth, or, more correctly speaking, the full diameter of the thread will be too small to an amount corresponding to twice the amount of wear that the tool point has suffered. In single-pointed tools, such as are used upon lathe work, this has but little significance, because it is the work of but a minute or two to grind up the tool to a full point again, but in taps and solid dies, or in chasers in heads (as in some bolt-cutting machines) it is highly important, because it impairs the fit of the threads, and it is difficult to bring the tools to shape after they are once worn.

Fig. 263

Fig. 263.

The internal threads for the nuts of bolts are produced by a tap formed as at t in Fig. 263. It consists of a piece of steel having an external thread and longitudinal flutes or grooves which cut the thread into teeth. The end of the thread is tapered off as shown, to enable the end of the tap to enter the hole, and as it is rotated and the nut n held stationary, the teeth cut grooves as the tap winds through, thus forming the thread.

Fig. 264

Fig. 264.

The threads upon bolts are usually produced either by a head containing chasers or by a solid die such as shown at a in Fig. 264, b representing a bolt being threaded. The bore of a is threaded and fluted to provide cutting teeth, and the threads are chamfered off at the mouth to assist the cutting by spreading it over several teeth, which enables the bolt to enter the die more easily.

We may now consider the effect of continued use and its consequent wear upon the threads or teeth of a tap and die or chaser.

Fig. 265

Fi.g 265.

The wear of the corners at the tops of the thread (as at a b in Fig. 265) of a tap is greater than the wear at the bottom corners at e f, because the tops perform more cutting duty.

First, the top has a larger circle of rotation than has the bottom, and, therefore, its cutting speed is greater, to an amount equal to the difference between the circumferences of the thread at the top and at the bottom. Secondly, the tops of the teeth of[I-89] tap perform nearly all the cutting duty, because the thread in the nut is formed by the tops and sides of the tap, which on entering cut a groove which they gradually deepen, until a full thread is formed, while the bottoms of the teeth (supposing the tapping hole to be of proper diameter and not too small) simply meet the bore of the tapping hole as the thread is finished. If, as in the case of hot punched nuts, the nut bore contains scale, this scale is about removed by the time the bottoms of the top teeth come into action, hence the teeth bottoms are less affected by the hardness of the scale.

Fig. 266

Fig. 266.

In the case of the teeth on dies and chasers, the wear at the corners c d, in Fig. 266, is the greatest. Now, the tops of the teeth on the tap (a b, in Fig. 265) cut the bottom or full diameter of the thread in the nut, while the tops of the teeth (c d, in Fig. 266) in the die cut the bottom of the thread on the bolt; hence the rounded corners cut on the work by the tops of the teeth in the one case, meet the more square corners left by the tops of the teeth in the other, and providing that under these circumstances the thread in the nut were of equal diameter to that on the bolt the latter would not enter the former.

Fig. 267

Fig. 267.

If the bolt were made of a diameter to enable the nut to wind a close fit upon the bolt, the corners only of the threads would fit, as shown in Fig. 267, which represents at n a thread in a portion of a nut and at s a portion of a thread upon a tap or bolt, the two threads being magnified and shown slightly apart for clearness of illustration. The corners a, b of the nut are then cut by the corners a b of the tap in Fig. 265, and the corners c, c, d correspond to those cut by the corners c, d of the die teeth in Fig. 266; corners e, f, Fig. 267, are cut by corners c, d, in Fig. 266, and corners g, h are cut by corners g, h in Fig. 266, and it is obvious that the roundness of the corners a, b, c, and d in Fig. 267 will not permit the tops of the thread on the bolt to meet the bottoms of the thread in the nut, but that the threads will bear at the corners only.

So far, however, we have only considered the wear tending to round off the sharp corners of the teeth, which wear is greater in proportion as the corners are sharp, and less as they are rounded or flattened, and we have to consider the wear as affecting the diameters of the male and female thread at their tops and bottoms respectively.

Now, since the tops of the tap teeth wear the most, the diameter of the thread decreases in depth, while, since the tops of the die teeth wear most, the depth of the thread in the die also decreases. The tops of the tap teeth cut the bottom of the thread in the nut and the tops of the die teeth cut the bottoms of the thread upon the bolt.

Fig. 268

Fig. 268.

Let it be supposed then that the points of the teeth of a tap have worn off to a depth of the 12000th part of an inch, which they will by the time they become sufficiently dulled to require resharpening, and that the teeth of a die have become reduced by wear by the same amount, and the result will be the production of threads such as shown in Fig. 268, in which the diameter of the bolt is supposed to be an inch, and the proper thread depth 110th inch. Now, the diameter at the root of the thread on the bolt will be .802 inch in consequence of the wear, but the smallest diameter of the nut thread is .800 inch, and hence too small to admit the male or bolt thread. Again, the full diameter of the bolt thread is 1 inch, whereas the full diameter of the nut thread is but .998 inch, or, again, too small to admit the bolt thread. As a result, it is found in practice that any standard form of thread that makes no allowance for wear, cannot be rigidly adhered to, or if it is adhered to, the tap must be made when new above the standard diameter, causing the thread to be an easy fit, which fit will become closer as the thread-cutting tools wear, until finally it becomes too tight altogether. The fit, however, becomes too tight at the top and bottom, where it is not required, instead of at the sides, where it should occur. When this is the case, the nuts will soon wear loose because of their small amount of bearing area.

Fig. 269

Fig. 269.

Fig. 270

Fig. 270.

Fig. 271

Fig. 271.

It may be pointed out, however, that from the form in which the chasers or solid dies for bolt machines, and also that in which taps are made, the finishing points of the teeth are greatly relieved of cutting duty, as is shown in Figs. 269 and 270. In the die the first two or three threads are chamfered off, while in the tap the thread is tapered off for a length usually equal to about two or three times the diameter for taps to be used by hand, and six or seven times the diameter for taps to be used in a machine. The wear of the die is, therefore, more than that of the tap, because the amount of cutting duty to produce a given[I-90] length of thread is obviously the same, whether the thread be an internal or an external one, and the die has less cutting edges to perform this duty than the tap has. The main part of the cutting is, it is true, in both cases borne by the beveled surfaces at the top of the chamfered teeth of the cutting tools, but the fact remains that the depth of the thread is finished by the extreme tops of the teeth, and these, therefore, must in time suffer from the consequent wear, while the bottoms of the teeth perform no cutting duty, providing that the hole in the one case and the bolt in the other are of just sufficient diameter to permit of a full thread being formed, as should be the case. In threads cut by chasers the same thing occurs; thus in Fig. 271 is shown at a a chaser having full teeth, as it must have when a full thread is to pass up to a shoulder, as up to the head of a bolt. Here the first tooth takes the whole depth of the cut, but if from wear this point becomes rounded, the next tooth may remedy the defect. When, however, a chaser is to be used upon a thread that terminates in a stem of smaller diameter, as c in Fig. 271, then the chaser may have its teeth bevelled off, as is shown on b.

Fig. 272

Fig. 272.

The evils thus pointed out as attending the wear of screw-cutting tools for bolts and nuts, may be overcome by a slight variation in the form of the thread. Thus in Fig. 272, at a is shown a form of thread for the tools to cut internal threads, and at b a form of thread for dies to cut external threads. The sides of the thread are in both cases at the same angle, as say, 60°. The depth of the thread, supposing the angle of the sides to meet in a point, is divided off into 11, or any number of equal divisions. For a tap one of these divisions is taken off, forming a flat top, while at the bottom two of these divisions are taken off, or if desirable, 112 divisions may be taken off, since the exact amount is not of primary importance. On the external thread cutting tool b, as say a solid die, two divisions are taken off at the largest diameter, and one at the smallest diameter, or, if any other proportion be selected for the tap, the same proportion may be selected for the die, so long as the least is taken off the largest diameter of the tap thread, and of the smallest diameter of the die thread.

The diameter of the tap may still be standard to ring or collar gauge, as in the Franklin Institute thread, the angle at the sides being simply carried in a less distance. In the die the largest diameter of the thread has a flat equal to that on the bottom of the tap, while the smallest diameter has a flat equal to that on the tops of the tap teeth, the width or thickness of the threads remaining the same as in the Franklin Institute thread at each corresponding diameter in its depth.

Fig. 273

Fig. 273.

The effect is to give to the threads on the work a certain amount of clearance at the top and bottom of the thread, leaving the angles just the same as before, and insuring that the contact shall be at the sides, as shown in Fig. 273.

This form of thread retains the valuable features of the Franklin Institute that it can be originated by any one, and that it can be formed with a single-toothed or single-pointed tool. Furthermore, the wear of the threading tools will not impair the diametral fit of the work, while the permissible limit of error in diameter will be increased.

By this means great accuracy in the diameters of the threads is rendered unnecessary, and the wear of the screw-cutting tools at their corners is rendered harmless, nor can any confusion occur, because the tools for external threads cannot be employed upon internal ones. The sides only of the thread will fit, and the whole contact and pressure of the fit will be on those sides only.

This is an important advantage, because if the tops of the thread are from the wear of the dies and taps of too large or small diameter, respectively, the threads cannot fit on the sides. Thus, suppose a bolt thread to be loose at the sides, but to be 11000 of an inch larger in diameter than the nut thread, then it cannot be screwed home until that amount has been worn or forced off the thread diameter, or has been bruised down by contact with the nut thread, and it would apparently be a tight fit at the[I-91] sides. Suppose a thread to have been cut in the lathe to the correct diameter at the bottom of the thread, the sides of the thread being at the correct angle, but let the diameter at the top of the thread (a Franklin Institute thread is here referred to), be 11000 too large, then the nut cannot be forced on until that 11000 is removed by some means or other, unless the nut thread be deepened to correspond.

Now take this last bolt and turn the 11000 inch off, and it will fit, turn off another 11000 or 164 inch, and it will still fit, and the fit will remain so nearly the same with the 164 inch off that the difference can scarcely be found. Furthermore, with a nut of a fit requiring a given amount of force to screw it upon the bolt, the area of contact will be much greater when that contact is on the sides than when it is upon the tops and bottoms of the thread, while the contact will be in a direction better to serve as an abutment to the thrust or strain.

In very fine pitches of thread such as are used in the manufacture of watches, this plan of easing or keeping free the extremities of the thread is found to be essential, and there appears every probability that its adoption would obviate the necessity of using check nuts.

It has been observed that the threads upon tools alter in pitch from the hardening operation, and this is an objection to the employment of chasers cut from hobs.

Suppose, for instance, that a nut is produced having a thread of true and uniform pitch, then after hardening, the pitch may be no longer correct. The chasers cut from the hob will contain the error of pitch existing in the hob, and upon being hardened may have added to it errors of its own. If this chaser be used to produce a new hob, the latter will contain the errors in the chaser added to whatever error it may itself obtain in the hardening. The errors may not, it is true, all exist in one direction, and those of one hardening may affect or correct those caused by another hardening, but this is not necessarily the case, and it is therefore preferable to employ a form of thread that can be cut by a tool ground to correct shape after having been hardened, as is the case with the V-thread and the United States standard.

Fig. 274

Fig. 274.

Fig. 275

Fig. 275.

Fig. 276

Fig. 276.

It is obvious that in originating either the sharp V or the United States standard thread, the first requisite is to obtain a correct angle of 60°, which has been done in a very ingenious manner by Mr. J. H. Heyer for the Pratt and Whitney Company, the method being as follows. Fig. 274 is a face and an end view of an equilateral triangle employed as a guide in making standard triangles, and constructed as follows:—Three bars, a, a, a, of steel were made parallel and of exactly equal dimensions. Holes x were then pierced central in the width of each bar and the same distance apart in each bar; the method of insuring accuracy in this respect being shown in Figs. 275 and 276, in which s represents the live spindle of a lathe with its face-plate on and a plug, c, fitted into the live centre hole. The end of this plug is turned cylindrically true, and upon it is closely fitted a bush, the plug obviously holding the bush true by its hole. A rectangular piece e is provided with a slot closely fitting to the bush.

The rectangular piece e is then bolted to the lathe face-plate[I-92] and pierced with a hole, which from this method of chucking will be exactly central to its slot, and at a right angle to its base. The bush is now dispensed with and the piece e is chucked with its base against the face-plate and the hole pierced as above, closely fitting to the pin on the end of the plug c, which, therefore, holds e true.

The bars a are then chucked one at a time in the piece e (the outer end resting upon a parallel piece f), and a hole is pierced near one end, this hole being from this method of chucking exactly central to the width of the bar a, and at a right angle to its face.

The parallel piece f is then provided with a pin closely fitting the hole thus pierced in the bar. The bars were turned end for end with the hole enveloping the pin in f (the latter being firmly fixed to the face-plate), and the other end laid in the slot in e, while the second hole was pierced. The holes (x, Fig. 274) must be, from this method of chucking, exactly an equal distance apart on each bar. The bars were then let together at their ends, each being cut half-way through and closely fitting pins inserted in the holes x, thus producing an equilateral triangle entirely by machine work, and therefore as correct as it can possibly be made, and this triangle is kept as a standard gauge whereby others for shop use may be made by the following process:—

Into the interior walls of this triangle there is fitted a cylindrical bush b, it being obvious that this bush is held axially true or central to the triangle, and it is secured in place by screws y, y, y, passing through its flange and into bars a.

Fig. 277

Fig. 277.

Fig. 278

Fig. 278.

At one end of the bush b, is a cylindrical part d, whose diameter is 2 inches or equal to the length of one side of an equilateral triangle circumscribed about a circle whose diameter is 1.1547 inches, as shown in Fig. 278 and through this bush b passes a pin p, having a nut n. A small triangle is then roughed out, and its bore fitting to the stem of pin p, and by means of nut n, the small triangle is gripped between the under face of d and the head of p. The large triangle is then held to an angle-plate upon a machine while resting upon the machine-table, and the uppermost edge of the small triangle is dressed down level with the cylindrical stem d, which thus serves as a gauge to determine how much to take off each edge of the small triangle to bring it to correct dimensions.

The truth of the angles of the small triangle depends, of course, also upon the large one; thus with face h resting upon the machine-table, face g is cut down level with stem d; with face f upon the table, face e is cut down level with d; and with face l upon the table, face k is dressed down level with d. And we have a true equilateral triangle produced by a very ingenious system of chuckings, each of which may be known to be true.

The next operation is to cut upon the small triangle the flat representing the top and bottom of the United States standard thread, which is done by cutting off one-eighth part of its vertical height, and it then becomes a test piece or standard gauge of the form of thread. The next step is to provide a micrometer by means of which tools for various pitches may be tested both for angle and for width of flat, and this is accomplished as follows:—

In Fig. 278 f is a jaw fixed by a set screw to the bar of the micrometer, and e is a sliding jaw; these two jaws being fitted to the edges of the triangle or test piece t in the figure which[I-93] has been made as already described. To the sliding jaw e is attached the micrometer screw c, which has a pitch of 40 threads per inch; the drum a upon the screw has its circumference divided into 250 equidistant divisions, hence if the drum be moved through a space equal to one of these divisions the sliding jaw e will be moved the 1250th part of 140th of an inch, or in other words the 110,000th of an inch. To properly adjust the position of the zero piece or pointer, the test piece t is placed in the position shown in Fig. 278, and when the jaws were so adjusted that light was excluded from the three edges of the test piece, the pointer r, Fig. 277, was set opposite to the zero mark on the drum and fastened.

To set the instrument for any required pitch of thread of the United States standard form the micrometer is used to move the sliding jaw e away from the fixed jaw f to an amount equal to the width of flat upon the top and bottom, of the required thread, while for the sharp V-thread the jaws are simply closed. The gauge being set the tool is ground to the gauge.

VOL. I. MEASURING AND GAUGING SCREW THREADS. PLATE III.
Fig. 279 Fig. 280 Fig. 281
Fig. 279. Fig. 280. Fig. 281.
 
Fig. 282 Fig. 285 Fig. 286
Fig. 282. Fig. 285. Fig. 286.
 
Fig. 283
Fig. 283.
 
Fig. 284 Fig. 287
Fig. 284. Fig. 287.

Referring to the third requirement, that the tools shall in the case of lathe work be easily sharpened and set to correct position in the lathe, it will be treated in connection with cutting screws in the lathe. Referring to the fourth requirement, that a minimum of measuring and gauging shall be required to test the diameter and form of thread, it is to be observed that in a Whitworth thread the angle and depth of the thread is determined by the chaser, which may be constantly ground to resharpen without altering the angles or depth of the thread, hence in cutting the tooth the full diameter of the thread is all that needs to be gauged or measured. In cutting a sharp V-thread, however, the thread top is apt to project (from the action of the single-pointed tool) slightly above the natural diameter of the work, producing a feather edge which it becomes necessary to file off to gauge the full diameter of the thread. In originating a sharp V-thread it is necessary first to grind the tool to correct angle; second, to set it at the correct height in the latter, and with the tool angles at the proper angle with the work (as is explained with reference to thread cutting in the lathe) and to gauge the thread to the proper diameter. In the absence of a standard cylindrical gauge or piece to measure from, a sheet metal gauge, such as in Fig. 279, may be applied to the thread; such gauges are, however, difficult to correctly produce.

So far as the diameter of a thread is concerned it may be measured by calipers applied between the threads as in Figs. 280 and 281, a plan that is commonly practised in the workshop when there is at hand a standard thread or gauge known to be of proper diameter; and this method of measuring may be used upon any form of thread, but if it is required to test the form of the thread, as may occur when its form depends upon the workman’s accuracy in producing the single-pointed threading tools, then, in the case of the United States standard thread, the top, the bottom, and the angle must be tested. The top of the thread may (for all threads) be readily measured, but the bottom is quite difficult to measure unless there is some standard to refer it to, to obtain its proper diameter, because the gauge or calipers applied to the bottom of the thread do not stand at a right angle to the axis of the bolt on which the thread is cut, but at an angle equal to the pitch of the thread, as shown in Fig. 282.

Now, the same pitch of thread is necessarily used in mechanical manipulation upon work of widely varying diameters, and as the angle of the calipers upon the same pitch of thread would vary (decreasing as the diameter of the thread increases), the diameter measured at the bottom of the thread would bear a constantly varying proportion to the diameter measured across the tops of the thread at a right angle to the axial line of the work. Thus in Fig. 282, a a is the axial line of two threaded pieces, b, c. d, d represents a gauge applied to b, its width covering the tops of two threads and measuring the diameter at a right angle to a a, as denoted by the dotted line e. The dotted line f represents the measurement at the bottom of the thread standing at an angle to e equal to half the pitch. The dotted line g is the measurement of c at the bottom of the thread.

Now suppose the diameter of b to be 112 inches at the top of the thread, and 118 inches at the bottom, while c is 118 inches on the top and 34 at the bottom of the thread, the pitches of the two threads being 14 inch; then the angle of f to e will be 18 inch (half the pitch) in its length of 118 inches. The angle of g to e will be 18 inch (half the pitch) in 34 (the diameter at the bottom or root of the thread).

It is obvious, then, that it is impracticable to gauge threads from their diameters at the bottom, or root.

On account of the minute exactitude necessary to produce with lathe tools threads of the sharp V and United States standard forms, the Pratt and Whitney Company manufacture thread-cutting tools which are made under a special system insuring accuracy, and provide standard gauges whereby the finished threads may be tested, and since these tools are more directly connected with the subject of lathe tools than with that of screw thread, they are illustrated in connection with such tools. It is upon the sides of threads that the contact should exist to make a fit, and the best method of testing the fit of a male and female thread is to try them together, winding them back and forth until the bright marks of contact show. Giving the male thread a faint tint of paint made of Venetian red mixed with lubricating oil, will cause the bearing of the threads to show very plainly.

Figs. 283 and 284 represent standard reference gauges for the United States standard thread. Fig. 283 is the plug or male gauge. The top of the thread has, it will be observed, the standard flat, while the bottom of the thread is sharp. In the collar, or female gauge, or the template, as it may be termed, a side and a top view of which are shown in Fig. 284, and a sectional end view in Fig. 285, the flat is made on the smallest diameter of the thread, while the largest diameter is left sharp; hence, if we put the two together they will appear as in Fig. 286, there being clearance at both the tops and bottoms of the threads. This enables the diameters of the threads to be in both cases tested by standard cylindrical gauges, while it facilitates the making of the screw gauges. The male or plug gauge is made with a plain part, a, whose diameter is the standard size for the[I-94] bottoms of the threads measured at a right angle to the axis of the gauge and taking the flats into account. The female gauge or template is constructed as follows:—A rectangular piece of steel is pierced with a plain hole at b, and a standard thread hole at a, and is split through at c. At d is a pin to prevent the two jaws from springing, this being an important element of the construction. e is a screw threaded through one jaw and abutting against the face of the other, while at f is another screw passing through one jaw and threaded into the other, and it is evident that while by operating these two screws the size of the gauge bore a may be adjusted, yet the screws will not move and destroy the adjustment, because the pressure of one acts as a lock to the other. It is obvious that in adjusting the female gauge to size, the thread of the male gauge may be used as a standard to set it by.

To produce sheet metal templates such as was shown in Fig. 279, the following method may be employed, it being assumed that we have a threading tool correctly formed.

Fig. 288

Fig. 288.

Fig. 289

Fig. 289.

Fig. 290

Fig. 290.

Fig. 291

Fig. 291.

Suppose it is required to make a gauge for a pitch of 6 per inch, then a piece of iron of any diameter may be put in the lathe and turned up to the required diameter for the top of the thread. The end of this piece should be turned up to the proper diameter for the bottom of the thread, as at g, in Fig. 287. Now, it will be seen that the angle of the thread to the axis a of the iron is that of line c to line a, and if we require to find the angle the thread passes through in once winding around the bolt, we proceed as in Fig. 288, in which d represents the circumference of the thread measured at a right angle to the bolt axis, as denoted by the line b in Fig. 287. f, Fig. 288 (at a right angle to d), is the pitch of the thread, and line c therefore represents the angle of the thread to the bolt axis, and corresponds to line c in Fig. 287. We now take a piece of iron whose length when turned true will equal its finished and threaded circumference, and after truing it up and leaving it a little above its required finished diameter, we put a pointed tool in the slide-rest and mark a line a a in Fig. 289, which will represent its axis. At one end of this line we mark off below a a the pitch of the thread, and then draw the line h j, its end h falling below a to an amount equal to the pitch of the thread to be cut. The piece is then put in a milling machine and a groove is cut along h j, this groove being to receive a tightly-fitting piece of sheet metal of which a thread gauge is to be made. This piece of sheet metal must be firmly secured in the groove by set-screws. The piece of iron is then again put in the lathe and its diameter finished to that of the required diameter of thread. Its two ends are then turned down to the required diameter for the bottom of the thread, leaving in the middle a section on which a full thread can be cut, as in Fig. 290, in which f f represents the sheet metal for the gauge. After the thread is cut, as in Fig. 290, we take out the gauge and it will appear as in Fig. 291, and all that is necessary is to file off the two outside teeth if only one tooth is wanted.

The philosophy of this process is that we have set the gauge at an angle of 90°, or a right angle to the thread, as is shown in Fig. 289, the line c representing the angle of the thread to the axis a a, and therefore corresponding to the line c in Fig. 287. A gauge made in this way will serve as a test of its own correctness for the following reasons: Taking the middle tooth in Fig. 291, it is clear that one of its sides was cut by one angle and the other by the other angle of the tool that cut it, and as a correctly formed thread is of exactly the same shape as the space between two threads, it follows that if the gauge be applied to any part of the thread that was cut in forming it, and if it fits properly when tried, and then turned end for end and tried again, it is proof that the gauge and the thread are both correct. Suppose, for example, that the tool was correct in its shape, but was not set with its two angles equal to the line of lathe centres, and in that case the two sides of the thread will not be alike and the gauge will not reverse end for end and in both cases fit to the thread. Or suppose the flat on the tool point was too narrow, and the flat at the bottom of the thread will not be like that at the top, and the gauge will show it.

Referring to the fifth requirement, that the angles of the sides of the threads shall be as acute as is consistent with the required strength, it is obvious that the more acute the angles of the sides of the thread one to the other the finer the pitch and the weaker the thread, but on the other hand, the more acute the angle the better the sides of the thread will conform one to the other. The importance of this arises from the fact that on account of the alteration of pitch, already explained, as accompanying the hardening of screw-cutting tools, the sides of threads cut even by unworn tools rarely have full contact, and a nut that is a tight fit on its first passage down its bolt may generally be caused to become quite easy by running it up and down the bolt a few times. Nuts that require a severe wrench force to wind them on the bolt, may, even though they be as large as a two-inch bolt, often be made to pass easily by hand, if while upon the bolt they are hammered on their sides with a hand hammer. The action is in both cases to cause the sides of the thread to conform one to the other, which they will the more readily do in proportion as their sides are more acute. Furthermore, the more acute the angles the less the importance of gauging the threads to precise diameter, especially if the tops and bottoms of the male and female thread are clear of one another, as in Fig. 273.

Referring to the sixth requirement, that the nut shall not be unduly liable to become loose of itself in cases where it may require to be fastened and loosened occasionally, it may be observed, that in such cases the threads are apt from the wear to become a loose fit, and the nuts, if under jar or vibration, are apt to turn back of themselves upon the bolt. This is best obviated by insuring a full bearing upon the whole area of the sides of the thread, and by the employment of as fine pitches as is consistent with sufficient strength, since the finer the pitch the nearer the thread stands at right angle to the bolt axis, and the less the tendency to unscrew from the pressure on the nut face.

The pitches, diameters, and widths of flat of the United States[I-95] standard thread are as per the following table:—

UNITED STATES STANDARD SCREW THREADS.

Diameter of
Screw.
Threads
per inch.
Diameter at
root of Thread.
Width of Flat.
  14 20   .1850 .0063
  516 18   .2403 .0069
  38 16   .2938 .0078
  716 14   .3447 .0089
  12 13   .4001 .0096
  916 12   .4542 .0104
  58 11   .5069 .0114
  34 10   .6201 .0125
  78 9   .7307 .0139
       
1   8   .8376 .0156
1 18 7   .9394 .0179
1 14 7   1.0644 .0179
1 38 6   1.1585 .0208
1 12 6   1.2835 .0208
1 58 5 12 1.3888 .0227
1 34 5   1.4902 .0250
1 78 5   1.6152 .0250
2   4 12 1.7113 .0278

The standard pitches for the sharp V-thread are as follows:—

SIZE OF BOLT.

14 516 38 716 12 58 34 78 1 118 114 138 112 158 134 178 2
Number of Threads to Inch.
20 18 16 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 412 412

The following table gives the threads per inch, pitches and diameters at root of thread of the Whitworth thread. The table being arranged from the diameter of the screw as a basis.

Diameter of
Screw.
Threads per
Inch.
Pitch. Diameter at
Root or Bottom
of Thread.
    Inch. Inch.
  18 40   .025   .092 9
  316 24   .041   .134 1
  14 20   .050   .185 9
  516 18   .056   .241 3
  38 16   .063   .294 9
  716 14   .071   .346  
  12 12   .083   .393 2
  916 12   .083   .455 7
  58 11   .091   .508 5
  1116 11   .095   .571  
  34 10   .100   .621 9
  1316 10   .100   .684 4
  78 9   .111   .732 7
  1516 9   .111   .795 2
1   8   .125   .839 9
1 18 7   .143   .942  
1 14 7   .143   1.067  
1 38 6   .167   1.161 5
1 12 6   .167   1.286 5
1 58 5   .200   1.368 8
1 34 5   .200   1.493 8
1 78 4 12 .222   1.590 4
2   4 12 .222   1.715 4
2 18 4 12 .222   1.840 4
2 14 4   .250   1.929 8
2 38 4   .250   2.054 8
2 12 4   .250   2.179 8
2 58 4   .250   2.304 8
2 34 3 12 .286   2.384  
2 78 3 12 .286   2.509  
3   3 12 .286   2.634  
3 14 3 14 .308   2.884  
3 12 3 14 .308   3.106  
3 34 3   .333   3.356  
4   3   .333   3.574  
4 14 2 78 .348   3.824  
4 12 2 78 .348   4.055  
4 34 2 34 .364   4.305  
5   2 34 .364   4.534  
5 14 2 58 .381   4.764  
5 12 2 58 .381   5.014  
5 34 2 12 .400   5.238  
6   2 12 .400   5.488  

The standard degree of taper, both for the taps and the dies, is 116 inch per inch, or 34 inch per foot, for all sizes up to 10-inch bore.

The sockets or couplings, however, are ordinarily tapped parallel and stretched to fit the pipe taper when forced on the pipe. For bores of pipe over 10 inches diameter the taper is reduced to 38 inch per foot. The pipes or casings for oil wells are given a taper of 38 inch per foot, and their couplings are tapped taper from both ends. There is, however, just enough difference made between the taper of the socket and that of the pipe to give the pipe threads a bearing at the pipe end first when tried with red marking, the threads increasing their bearing as the pieces are screwed together.

The United States standard thread for steam, gas and water pipe is given below, which is taken from the Report of the Committee on Standard Pipe and Pipe Threads of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, submitted at the 8th Annual Meeting held in New York, November-December, 1886.

Fig. 291a

Fig. 291a.

“A longitudinal section of the tapering tube end, with the screw-thread as actually formed, is shown full size in Fig. 291a for a nominal 212 inch tube, that is, a tube of about 212 inches internal diameter, and 278 inches actual external diameter.

“The thread employed has an angle of 60°; it is slightly rounded off both at the top and at the bottom, so that the height or depth of the thread, instead of being exactly equal to the pitch, is only four fifths of the pitch, or equal to 0.8 × 1/n if n be the number of threads per inch. For the length of tube end throughout which the screw thread continues perfect, the empirical formula used is (0.8D + 4.8) × 1/n, where D is the actual external diameter of the tube throughout its parallel length, and is expressed in inches. Further back, beyond the perfect threads, come two having the same taper at the bottom, but imperfect at the top. The remaining imperfect portion of the screw thread, furthest back from the extremity of the tube, is not essential in any way to this system of joint; and its imperfection is simply incidental to the process of cutting the thread at a single operation.”

The standard thicknesses of the pipes and pitches of thread are as follows:—

STANDARD DIMENSIONS OF WROUGHT IRON
WELDED TUBES.

DIAMETER OF TUBE. THICKNESS OF
METAL.
SCREWED ENDS.
Nominal
Inside.
Actual
Inside.
Actual
Outside.
Number
of Threads
per Inch.
Length of
Perfect
Screw.
Inches. Inches. Inches. Inch. No. Inch.
  18 0.270 0.405 0.068 27   0.19
  14 0.364 0.540 0.088 18   0.29
  38 0.494 0.675 0.091 18   0.30
  12 0.623 0.840 0.109 14   0.39
  34 0.824 1.050 0.113 14   0.40
1   1.048 1.315 0.134 11 12 0.51
1 14 1.380 1.660 0.140 11 12 0.54
1 12 1.610 1.900 0.145 11 12 0.55
2   2.067 2.375 0.154 11 12 0.58
2 12 2.468 2.875 0.204 8   0.89
3   3.067 3.500 0.217 8   0.95
3 12 3.548 4.000 0.226 8   1.00
4   4.026 4.500 0.237 8   1.05
4 12 4.508 5.000 0.246 8   1.10
5   5.045 5.563 0.259 8   1.16
6   6.065 6.625 0.280 8   1.26
7   7.023 7.625 0.301 8   1.36
8   8.982 8.625 0.322 8   1.46
9   9.000 9.688 0.344 8   1.57
10   10.019 10.750 0.366 8   1.68

The taper of the threads is 116 inch in diameter for each inch of length or 34 inch per foot.

[I-96]

WHITWORTH’S SCREW THREADS FOR GAS, WATER, AND HYDRAULIC IRON PIPING.

Note.—The Internal and External diameters of Pipes, as given below, are those adopted by the firm of Messrs. James Russell & Sons, in Pipes of their manufacture.

Gas and Water Piping. Hydraulic Piping.
Internal
Diameter
of
Pipe.
External
Diameter
of
Pipe.
No. of
Threads
per Inch.
Internal
Diamter
of
Pipe.
External
Diameter
of
Pipe.
Pressure in
lbs. per
Square
Inch.
No. of
Threads
per Inch.
Internal
Diamter
of
Pipe.
External
Diameter
of
Pipe.
Pressure in
lbs. per
Square
Inch.
No. of
Threads
per Inch.
                     
  18 .385   28   14 -     58 4,000   - 14 1 14 -   1 34 4,000   - 11
  14 .520   19   34 6,000 1 78 6,000
  38 .665   19   78 8,000 2   8,000
  12 .822   14 1   10,000 2 18 10,000
  34 1.034   14   38 -     34 4,000   - 14 1 38 -   1 78 4,000   - 11
1   1.302   - 11   78 6,000 2   6,000
1 18 1.492 1   8,000 2 18 8,000
1 14 1.650 1 18 10,000 2 14 10,000
1 38 1.745   12 -   1   4,000   - 14 1 12 -   2   4,000   - 11
1 12 1.882 1 18 6,000 2 18 6,000
1 58 2.021 1 14 8,000   - 11 2 14 8,000
1 34 2.047 1 38 10,000 2 38 10,000
1 78 2.245   58 -   1 18 4,000   14 2 12 10,000
2   2.347 1 14 6,000   - 11 1 58 -   2 18 4,000   - 11
2 18 2.467 1 38 8,000 2 14 6,000
2 14 2.587 1 12 10,000 2 38 8,000
2 38 2.794   34 -   1 14 4,000   - 11 2 12 10,000
2 12 3.001 1 38 6,000 1 34 -   2 14 3,000   - 11
2 58 3.124 1 12 8,000 2 38 4,000
2 34 3.247 1 58 10,000 2 12 6,000
2 78 3.367   78 -   1 38 4,000   - 11 2 58 8,000
3   3.485 1 12 6,000 2 34 10,000
3 14 3.698 1 58 8,000 1 78 -   2 38 3,000   - 11
3 12 3.912 1 34 10,000 2 12 4,000
3 34 4.125 1   -   1 12 4,000   - 11 2 58 6,000
4   4.339 1 58 6,000 2 34 8,000
        1 34 8,000 2 78 10,000
        1 78 10,000 2   -   2 12 3,000   - 11
        1 18 -   1 58 4,000   - 11 2 58 4,000
        1 34 6,000 2 34 6,000
        1 78 8,000 2 78 8,000
        2   10,000 3   10,000
                     

The English pipe thread is a sharp V-thread having its sides at an angle of 60°, and therefore corresponds to the American pipe thread except that the pitches are different.

The standard screw thread of The Royal Microscopical Society of London, England, is employed for microscope objectives, and the nose pieces of the microscope into which these objectives screw.

The thread is a Whitworth one, the original standard threading tools now in the cabinet of the society having been made especially for the society by Sir Joseph Whitworth. The pitch of the thread is 36 per inch. The cylinder, or male gauge, is .7626 inch in diameter.

The following table gives the Whitworth standard of thread pitches and diameters for watch and mathematical instrument makers.

WHITWORTH’S STANDARD GAUGES FOR WATCH AND
INSTRUMENT MAKERS, WITH SCREW THREADS FOR
THE VARIOUS SIZES, 1881.

No. of each
size in thou-
sandths of
an inch.
Size in
decimals of
an inch.
Number of
Threads per
inch.
No. of each
size in thou-
sandths of
an inch.
Size in
decimals of
an inch.
Number of
Threads per
inch.
10 .010 400 34 .034 150
11 .011 36 .036
12 .012 350 38 .038 120
13 .013 40 .040
14 .014 300 45 .045
15 .015 50 .050 100
16 .016 55 .055
17 .017 250 60 .060
18 .018 65 .065 80
19 .019 70 .070
20 .020 210 75 .075
22 .022 80 .080 60
24 .024 85 .085
26 .026 180 90 .090
28 .028 95 .095
30 .030 100 .100 50
32 .032 150      

For the pitches of the threads of lag screws there is no standard, but the following pitches are largely used.

Diameter
of Screw.
Threads
per Inch.
Diameter
of Screw.
Threads
per Inch.
Inch.   Inch.  
14 10 58 5
516 9 1116 5
38 8 34 5
716 7 78 4
12 6 1 4
916 6    

Screw-Cutting Hand Tools.

For cutting external or male threads by hand three classes of tools are employed.

Fig. 292

Fig. 292.

The first is the screw plate shown in Fig. 292. It consists of a hardened steel plate containing holes of varying diameters and threaded with screw threads of different pitches. These holes are provided with two diametrically opposite notches or slots so as to form cutting edges.

This tool is placed upon the end of the work and slowly rotated while under a hand pressure tending to force it upon the work, the teeth cutting grooves to form the thread and advancing along the bolt at a rate determined by the pitch of the thread.

The screw plate is suitable for the softer metals and upon[I-97] diameters of 18 inch and less, in which the cutting duty is light; hence the holes do not so rapidly wear larger.

Fig. 293

Fig. 293.

The second class consists of a stock and dies such as shown in Fig. 293. For each stock there are provided a set of dies having different diameters and pitches of thread.

In this class of tool the dies are opened out and placed upon the bolt. The set screw is tightened up, forcing the dies to their cut, and the stock is slowly rotated and a traverse taken down the work.

In some cases the dies are then again forced to the work by the set screw, and a cut taken by winding the stocks up the bolt, the operation being continued until the thread is fully developed and cut to the required diameter. In other cases the cut is carried down the bolt, only the dies being wound back to the top of the bolt after each cut is carried down. The difference between these two operations will be shown presently.

The thread in dies which take successive cuts to form a thread may be left full clear through the die, and will thus cut a full thread close up to the head collar or shoulder of the work. It is usual, however, to chamfer off the half threads at the ends of the dies, because if left of their full height they are apt to break off when in use. It is sometimes the practice, however, to chamfer off the first two threads on one side of the dies, leaving the teeth on the other side full, and to use the chamfered as the leading side in all cases in which the thread on the work does not require to be cut up to a shoulder, but turning the dies over with the full threaded teeth as the leading ones when the thread does require to be carried up to a head or shoulder on the work.

Fig. 294

Fig. 294

Fig. 295

Fig. 295

To facilitate the insertion and extraction of the dies in and from their places in the stock, the Morse Twist Drill Co. employ the following construction. In Figs. 294 and 295 the pieces a, a′ which hold the dies are pivoted in the stock at b, so as to swing outward as in Fig. 295, and receive the dies which are slotted to fit them. These pieces are then swung into position in the stock. The lower die is provided with a hole to fit the pin c, hence when that die is placed home c acts as a detaining piece locking the pieces a, a′ through the medium of the bottom die.

Fig. 296

Fig. 296

In other dies of this class the two side pieces or levers which hold the dies are pivoted at the corner of the angle, as in Fig. 296. In the bottom of the stock is a sliding piece beveled at its top and meeting the bottom face of the levers; hence, by pressing this piece inwards the side pieces recede into a slot provided in the stock, and leave the opening free for the dies to pass into their places, when the pin is released and a spring brings the side pieces back. Now, since the bottom die rests upon the bottom angle of the side pieces the pressure of the set screw closes the side pieces to the dies holding them firmly.

Fig. 297

Fig. 297.

Fig. 298

Fig. 298.

Fig. 299

Fig. 299.

In Fig. 297 is shown Whitworth’s stocks and dies, the cap that holds the guide die a and the two chasers b, c in their seats or recesses in the stock being removed to expose the interior parts. The ends of the chasers b, c are beveled and abut against correspondingly beveled recesses in the key d, so that by operating the nut e on the end of the key the dies are caused to move longitudinally. The principles of action are more clearly shown in Fig. 298. The two cutting chasers b and c move in lines that would meet at d, and therefore at a point behind the centre or axis of the bolt being threaded; this has the effect of[I-98] preserving their clearance. It is obvious, for example, that when these chasers cut a thread on the work it will move over toward guide a on account of the thread on the work sinking into the threads on a, and this motion would prevent the chasers b, c from cutting if they moved in a line pointing to the centre of the work. This is more clearly shown in Fig. 299, in which the guide die a and one of the cutting dies or chasers b is shown removed from the stock, while the bolt to be threaded is shown in two positions—one when the first cut is taken, and the other when the thread is finished. For the first cut the centre of the work is at e, for the last one it is at g, and this movement would, were the line of motion as denoted by the dotted lines, prevent the chaser from cutting, because, while the line of chaser motion would remain at j, pointing to the centre of work for the first cut, it would require a line at k to point to that centre for the last one; hence, when considered with relation to the work, the line of chaser motion has been moved forward, presenting the cutting edges at an angle that would prevent their cutting. By having their motion as shown in Fig. 299, however, the clearance of the chasers is preserved.

Fig. 300

Fig. 300.

Fig. 301

Fig. 301.

Referring now to the die a, it acts as a guide rather than as a cutting chaser, because it has virtually no clearance and cannot cut so freely as b and c; hence it offers a resistance to the moving of the bolt, or of the dies upon the bolt, in a lateral direction when the chaser teeth meet either a projection or a depression upon the work. The guide principle is, however, much more fully carried out in a design by Bodmer, which is shown in Fig. 300. Here there is but one cutting chaser c, the bush g being a guide let into a recess in the stock and secured thereon by a pin p. The chaser is set in a stock, d also let into a recess in the stock, and this recess, being circular, permits of stock d swinging. At s are two set-screws, which are employed to limit the amount of motion permitted to d. the handle e screws through d, and acts upon the edge of chaser c to put on the cut. The action of the tool is shown in Fig. 301, where it is shown upon a piece of work. Pulling the handle e causes d to swing in the stock, thus giving the chaser clearance, as shown. When the cut is carried down, a new cut may be put on by means of e, and on winding the stock in the opposite direction, d will swing in its seat, and cant or tilt the chaser in the opposite direction, giving it the necessary clearance to enable it to cut on the upward or back traverse. Another point of advantage is that the cutting edges are not rubbed by the work during the back stroke, and their sharpness is, therefore, greatly preserved. A die of this kind will produce work almost as true as the lathe, and, in the case of long, slender work, more true than the lathe; but it is obvious that, on account of the friction caused by the pressure of the work to the guide g, the tool will require more power to operate than the ordinary stock and die or the solid die.

Fig. 302

Fig. 302.

Fig. 303

Fig. 303.

In adjustable dies which require to take more than one cut along the bolt to produce a fully developed thread, there is always a certain amount of friction between the sides of the thread in the die and the grooves being cut, because the angle of the thread at the top of a thread is less than the angle at the bottom. Thus in Fig. 302 the pitch at the top of thread (at a, b) is the same as at the bottom (c, d). Now suppose that in Fig. 303 a b represents[I-99] the axial line of a bolt, and c d a line at a right angle to a b. The radius e f being equal to the circumference of the top of the thread, the pitch being represented by b; then k represents the angle of the top of the thread to the axial line a b. Now suppose that the radius e g represents the circumference at the bottom of the thread and to the pitch; then l is the angle of the bottom of the thread to the axial line of the work, and the difference in angle between k and l is the difference in angle between the top and bottom of the thread in the dies and the thread to be cut on the work.

Now the tops of the teeth on the die stand at the greatest angle l, in Fig. 303, when taking the first cut on the bolt, but the grooves they cut will be on the full diameter of the bolt, and will, therefore, stand at the angle k, hence the lengths of the teeth do not lie in the same planes as the grooves which they cut.

In cutting V-threads, however, the angle of the die threads gradually right themselves with the plane of the grooves attaining their nearest coincidence when closed to finish the thread.

Since, however, the full width of groove is in a square thread cut at the first cut taken by the dies, it is obvious that a square thread cannot be cut by this class of die, because the sides of the grooves would be cut away each time the dies were closed to take another cut.

Dies of this class require to have the threaded hole made of a larger diameter than is the diameter of the bolt they are intended to thread, the reason being as follows:—

Fig. 304

Fig. 304.

Suppose the threaded hole in the dies to be cut by a hob or master tap of the same diameter as the thread to be cut by the dies; when the dies are opened out and placed upon the work as in Fig. 304, the edges a, b will meet the work, and there will be nothing to steady the dies, which will, therefore, wobble and start a drunken thread, that is to say, a thread such as was shown in Fig. 253.

Fig. 305

Fig. 305.

Instances have been known in the use of dies made in this manner, wherein the workman using a right-hand single-threaded pair of dies has cut a right or left-hand double or treble thread; the teeth of the dies acting as chasers well canted over, as shown in Fig. 305. It is necessary to this operation, however, that the diameter of the work be larger than the size of hob the dies were threaded with.

Fig. 306

Fig. 306.

In Fig. 306 is shown a single right-hand and a treble left-hand thread cut by the author with the same pair of dies.

All that is necessary to perform this operation is to rotate the dies from left to right to produce a right-hand thread, and from right to left for a left-hand thread, exerting a pressure to cause the dies to advance more rapidly along the bolt than is due to the pitch of the thread. A double thread is produced when the dies traverse along the work twice as fast as is due to the pitch of the thread in the dies, and so on.

Fig. 307

Fig. 307.

It is obvious, also, that a piece of a cylindrical thread may be used to cut a left-hand external thread. Thus in Fig. 307 is shown a square piece of metal having a notch cut in on one side of it and a piece of an external thread (as a tap inserted) in the notch. By forcing a piece of cylindrical work through the hole while rotating it, the piece of tap would cut upon the work a thread of the pitch of the tap, but a left-handed thread, which occurs because, as shown by the dotted lines of the figure, the thread on one side of a bolt slopes in opposite directions to its direction on the other, and in the above operation the thread on one side is taken to cut the thread on the other.

These methods of cutting left-hand threads with right-handed ones are mentioned simply as curiosities of thread cutting, and not as being of any practical value.

Fig. 308

Fig. 308.

Fig. 309

Fig. 309.

To proceed, then: to avoid these difficulties it is usual to thread the dies with a hob or master tap of a diameter equal to twice the depth of the thread, larger than the size of bolt the dies are to thread. In this case the dies fit to the bolt at the first cut, as shown in Fig. 308, c, d being the cutting edges. The relation of the circle of the thread in the dies to that of the work during the final cut is shown in Fig. 309.

There is yet another objection to tapping the dies with a hob of the diameter of the bolt to be threaded, in that the teeth fit perfectly to the thread of the bolt when the latter is threaded to the proper diameter, producing a great deal of friction, and being[I-100] difficult to make cut, especially when the cutting edges have become slightly dulled from use.

Referring now to taking a cut up the bolt or work as well as down, it will be noted that supposing the dies to have a right-hand thread, and to be rotating from left to right, they will be passing down the bolt and the edges c, d (Fig. 308) will be the cutting ones. But when the dies are rotated from right to left to bring them to the end of the bolt again, c, d will be rubbed by the thread, which tends to abrade them and thus destroy their sharpness.

Fig. 310

Fig. 310.

In some cases two or more pairs of dies are fitted to the same stock, as shown in Fig. 310, but this is objectionable, because it is always desirable to have the hole in the dies central to the length of the stock, so that when placed to the work the stock shall be balanced, which will render it easier to start the thread true with the axial line of the bolt.

From what has been said with reference to Fig. 303, it is obvious that a square thread cannot be cut by a die that opens and closes to take successive cuts along the work, but such threads may be cut upon work that is of sufficient strength to withstand the twisting pressure of the dies, by making a solid die, and tapering off the threads for some distance at the mouth of the die, so as to enable the die to take its bite or grip upon the work, and start itself. It is necessary, however, to give to the die as many flutes (and therefore cutting edges), as possible, or else to make flutes wide and the teeth as short as will leave them sufficiently strong, both these means serving to avoid friction.

Fig. 311

Fig. 311.

Fig. 312

Fig. 312.

The teeth for adjustable dies, such as shown in Fig. 293, are cut as follows:—There is inserted between the two dies a piece of metal, separating them when set together to a distance equal to twice the depth of the thread, added to the distance the faces of the dies are to be apart when the dies are set to cut to this designated or proper diameter. The tapping hole is then drilled (with the pieces in place) to the diameter of the bolt the die is for. The form of hob used by the Morse Twist Drill & Machine Company, to cut the thread, is shown in Fig. 311. The unthreaded part at the entering end is made to a diameter equal to that of the work the dies are to be used in; the thread at the entering end is made sunk in one half the height of the full thread, and is flattened off one half the height of a full thread, so that the top of the thread is even with the diameter of the unthreaded part at the entering end. The thread then runs a straight taper up the hob until a distance equal to the diameter of the nut is reached, and the length of hob equal to its diameter is made a full and parallel thread for finishing the die teeth with. The thread on the taper part has more taper at the root of the thread than it has at the top of the same, and the diameter of the full and parallel part at the shank end of the thread is made of a diameter equal to twice the height or depth of a full thread, larger than the diameter at the entering end of the hob. The hob thus becomes a taper and relieved tap cutting a full thread at one passage through the dies. If the hob is made parallel and a full thread from end to end, as in Fig. 312, the dies must traverse up and down the hob, or the hob through the dies to form a full thread.

The third class of stock and die is intended to cut a full thread at one passage along the work, while at the same time provision is made, whereby, to take up the wear due to the abrasion of the cutting edges, which wear would cause the diameter of thread cut to be above the standard.

Fig. 313

Fig. 313.

In Fig. 313 is shown the Grant adjustable die made by the Pratt & Whitney Company. It consists of four chasers or toothed cutting tools, inserted in radial recesses or slots in an iron disc or collet encircled by an iron ring. Each chaser is beveled at its end to fit a corresponding bevel in the ring, and is grooved on one of its side faces to receive the hardened point of a screw that is inserted in the collet to hold the chaser in its adjusted position. Four screws extend up through the central flange or body of the collet, two of which serve to draw down the ring, and by reason of the taper on the ring move the chasers equally towards the centre and reduce the cutting diameter of the die, while the other two hold the ring in the desired position, or force it upward to enlarge the cutting diameter of the die. The range of adjustment permitted by this arrangement is 132 inch. The dies may be taken out and ground up to sharpen.

The object of cutting grooves in the sides of the chasers is that the fine burrs formed by the ends of the set screws do not prevent the chasers from moving easily in the collet during the process of adjustment; the groove also acts as a shoulder for the screw end to press the chaser down to its seat. These chasers are marked to their respective places in the collet, and are so made that if one chaser should break, a new one can be supplied to fit to its place, the teeth of the new one falling exactly in line with the teeth on the other three, whereas under ordinary conditions if one chaser breaks, a full set of four new ones must be obtained.

In this die, as in all others which cut a full thread at one passage along the work, the front teeth of the chasers are beveled off as shown in the cut; this is necessary to enable the dies to take hold of or “bite” the work, the chamfer giving a relief to the cutting edge, while at the same time forming to a certain extent a wedge facilitating the entrance of the work into the die.

Fig. 314

Fig. 314.

Fig. 315

Fig. 315.

Fig. 314 represents J. J. Grant’s patent die, termed by its makers (Wiley and Russel) the “lightening die.” In this, as in other similar stocks, several collets with dies of various pitches and diameters of thread, fit to one stock. The nut of the stock is split on one side, and is provided with lugs on that side to receive a screw, which operates to open and enlarge the bore to[I-101] release a collet, or close thereon and grip it, as may be required when inserting or extracting the same. The dies are formed as shown in Fig. 315, in which a, a are the dies, and b the collet. To open the dies within the collet, the screws e are loosened and the screws d are tightened, while to close the dies d, d are loosened and e are tightened; thus the adjustment to size is effected by these four screws, while the screws d also serve to hold the dies to the collet b. The collets are provided with a collar having a bore f, through which the work passes, so that the dies may be guided true when starting upon the work; but if it is required to cut a thread close up to a head or shoulder, the stock is turned upside down, not only to have the collet out of the way of the head or shoulder, but also because the thread of the dies on the collet side are chamfered off (as is necessary in all solid dies, or dies which cut a full thread at one traverse down the work) so as to enable them to grip or bite the work, and start the thread upon it as before stated.

Fig. 316

Fig. 316.

In Fig. 316 is shown Stetson’s die, which cuts a full thread at one passage, is adjustable to take up its wear, and has a guide to steady it upon the work and assist it in cutting a true thread. The guide piece consists of a hub (through which the work passes) having a flange fitting into the dies and being secured thereto by the two screws shown. The holes in the flanges are slotted to permit of the dies being closed (to take up wear) by means of the small screws shown at the end of the die, which screws pass through one die in a plain hole and screw into the other.

Fig. 317

Fig. 317.

In Fig. 317 is shown Everett’s stocks and dies. In this tool the dies are set up by a cam lever, the dies being set to standard size when the lever arm stands parallel with the arm of the stock. By turning the straight side of the cam lever opposite to the dies, the latter may be instantly removed and another size of die inserted. The dies may be used to cut on their passage up and down the bolt or by operating the cam. When the dies are at the end of a cut the dies may be opened, lifted to the top of the work and another cut taken, thus saving the time necessary to wind the stock back. When the final cut is taken the dies may be opened and lifted off the work.

The hardening process usually increases the thickness of these dies, making the pitch of the thread coarser. The amount of expansion due to hardening is variable, but increases with the thickness of the die. The hob as a rule shortens during the tempering, but the amount being variable, no rule for its quantity can be given.[12]

[12] See also page 108.

Fig. 318

Fig. 318.

Stocks and dies for pipe work are made in the form shown in Fig. 318, in which b is the stock having the detachable handles (for ease of conveyance) a, h, the latter being shown detached. The solid screw-cutting dies c are placed in the square recess at b, and are secured in b by the cap d, which swings over (upon its pivoted end as a centre) and is locked by the thumbscrew e. To guide the stocks and cause them to cut a true thread, the bushes f are provided. These fit into the lower end of b and are locked in position by four set screws g. The bores of the bushes f are made an easy fit to the outside of the pipe to be threaded, there being a separate bush for each size of pipe.

Fig. 319

Fig. 319.

The dies employed in stocks for threading steam and gas pipes by hand are sometimes solid, as in Fig. 318 at c, and at others adjustable. In Fig. 319 is shown Stetson’s adjustable pipe die containing four chasers or toothed thread-cutting tools. These are set to cut the required diameter by means of a small screw in each corner of the die, while they are locked in their adjusted position by four screws on the face.

Fig. 320 Fig. 321 Fig. 322

Fig. 320. Fig. 321. Fig. 322.

The tap is a tool employed to cut screw threads in internal surfaces, as holes or bores. A set of taps for hand use usually consist of three: the taper tap, Fig. 320; plug tap, Fig. 321; and bottoming tap, Fig. 322. (In England these taps are termed respectively the taper, second, and plug tap.) The taper tap is[I-102] the first to be inserted, and (when the hole to be threaded passes entirely through the work) rotated until it passes through the work, thus cutting a thread parallel in diameter through the full length of the hole. If, however, the hole does not pass through the work, the taper tap leaves a taper-threaded hole containing more or less of a fully developed thread according to the distance the tap has entered.

To further complete the thread the plug tap is inserted, it being parallel from four or five threads from the entering end of the tap to the other end. If the work will admit it, this tap is also passed through, which not only saves time in many cases, by avoiding the necessity to wind the tap back, but preserves the cutting edge which suffers abrasion from being wound back. To cut a full thread as near as possible to the bottom of a hole the bottoming tap is used, but when the circumstances will admit, it is best to drill the hole rather deeper than is actually necessary, to avoid the trouble incident to tapping a hole clear to the bottom.

On wrought iron and steel, which are fibrous and tough, the tap, when used by hand, will not (if the hole be deeper than the diameter of the tap) readily operate by a continuous rotary motion, but requires to be rotated about half a revolution back occasionally, which gives opportunity for the oil to penetrate to the cutting edges of the tap, frees the tap and considerably facilitates the tapping operation, especially if the hole be a deep one.

Fig. 323

Fig. 323.

When the tap is intended to pass entirely through the work with a continuous rotary motion, as is the case, for example, in tapping nuts in a tapping machine, it is made of similar form to the taper hand tap, but longer, as shown in Fig. 323, the thread being full and parallel at the shank end for a distance at least equal to the full diameter of the tap measured across the tops of the thread.

If the thread of a tap be in diametral section a full circle, the sides of the thread rub against the grooves cut by the teeth, producing a friction which augments as the sharp edge of the teeth become dulled from use, but the tap cuts a thread of great diametral accuracy.

Fig. 324

Fig. 324.

To reduce this friction to a minimum as much as is consistent with maintaining the standard size of the tapped hole, taps are sometimes given clearance in the thread, that is to say, the back of each tooth recedes from a true circle, as shown in Fig. 324, in which a a represents a washer, and b a tap in the same, the back of the teeth receding at c, d, e, from the true circle of the bore of a a, the tap cutting when revolved in the direction of the arrow. The objection to this is that when the tap is revolved backwards, as it must be to extract it unless the hole passes clear through the work, the cuttings lodge between the teeth and the thread in the work, rendering the extraction of the tap difficult, unless, indeed, the clearance be small enough in amount to clear the sides of the thread in the work sufficiently to avoid friction without leaving room for the cuttings to enter. If an excess of clearance be allowed upon taps that require to be used by hand, the tap will thread the hole taper, the diameter being largest at the top of the hole. This occurs because the tap is not so well steadied by its thread, which fails to act as a guide, and it is impossible to revolve the tap steadily by hand. Taps that are revolved by machine tools may be given clearance because both the taps and the work are detained in line, hence the tap cannot wobble.

Fig. 325

Fig. 325.

In some cases clearance is given by filing or cutting off the tops of the threads along the middle of the teeth, as shown in Fig. 325 at a, b, c, which considerably reduces the friction. If clearance were given to a tap after this manner but extended to the sides and to the bottom of the thread, it would produce the best of results (for all taps that do not pass entirely through the hole), reducing the friction and leaving no room for the cuttings to jam in the threads when the tap is being backed out. The threads of Sir Joseph Whitworth’s taper hand taps are made parallel, measured at the bottom of the thread, and parallel at the tops of the thread for a distance equal to the diameter of the tap at the shank end; thence, to the entering end of the tap, the tops of the thread are turned off a straight taper, the amount of taper being slightly more than twice the depth of the thread: hence, the thread is just turned out at the entering end of the tap, and that end is the exact proper size for the tapping hole.

Fig. 326

Fig. 326.

Fig. 327

Fig. 327.

Fig. 328

Fig. 328.

This enables the tap to enter the tapping hole for a distance enveloping one or perhaps two of the tap threads, leaving the extreme end of the tap with the thread just turned out. In the practice of some tap makers the diameter of the thread at the[I-103] top is made the same as in the Whitworth system, but there is more depth at the root of the thread and near the entering end of the tap, hence the bottoms of the thread at that end perform no cutting duty. This is done to enable the tap to take hold of, and start a thread in, the work more readily, which it does for the following reasons. In Fig. 326 is a piece of work with a tap a, having a tapered thread, and a tap b, in which the taper is given by turning off the thread. In the case of a the teeth points cut a groove that is gradually widened and deepened as the tap enters, until a full thread is finally produced. In the case of b the teeth cut at first a wide groove, leaving a small projection, that is a part of the actual finished thread, and the groove gets narrower as the tap enters; so that in the one case no part of the thread is finished until the tap has entered to its full diameter, while in the other the thread is finished as it is produced. On entering, therefore, more cutting duty is performed by b than by a, because a greater length of cutting edge is in operation and more metal is being removed, and as a result b requires more power to start it, so that in practice it is necessary to exert a pressure upon it, tending to force it into the hole while rotating it. The cutting duty on b decreases as the tap enters, because it gets less width and area of groove to cut, while the cutting duty on a increases as the tap enters, because it gets a greater width and area of groove to cut. In the latter case the maximum of pressure falls on the tap when it has entered the hole deepest, and hence can be operated steadiest, which, independent of its entering easiest, is an advantage. When, however, the bottom of a thread is taper (as must be the case to enable it to cut as at a), the cutting edge of each tooth does not cut a groove sufficiently large in diameter to permit the tooth itself to pass through. In Fig. 327, for example, is shown a tap which is taper and has a full thread from end to end (as is necessary for pipe tapping). Its diameter increases as the thread proceeds from the end towards the line a b. Now take the tooth o p, which stands lengthwise, in the plane c d. Its cutting edge is at p, but the diameter of the tap at p is less than it is at o, while o has to pass through the groove that p cuts. To obviate this difficulty the tap is given clearance, as shown in Fig. 324, the amount being slightly more than the difference in the diameter of the tap at o and at p in that figure. It follows, therefore, that a tap having taper from end to end and a full thread also, as shown in the lower tap in Fig. 328, is wrong in principle, and from the unsteady manner in which it operates is undesirable, even though its thread be given clearance.

In some cases the thread is made parallel at the tops and turned taper for a distance of 13 or 12 the length of the tap, the root of the thread at the taper part being deepened and the tops being given a slight clearance. This answers very well for shallow holes, because the taper tap cuts more thread on entering a given depth so that the second tap can follow more easily, but the tap will not operate so steadily as when the taper part is longer.

It is on account of the tops of the teeth performing the main part of the cutting that a tap taper may be sharpened by simply grinding the teeth tops. In the Pratt and Whitney taps, the hand taper tap is made parallel at the shank end for a distance equal in length to the diameter of the tap.

The entering end of the taper tap is made straight or parallel for a distance equal in length to one half the diameter of the tap, the diameter at this end being the exact proper size of tapping hole. The parallel part serves as a guide, causing the tap to enter and keep axially true with the hole to be tapped. The plug and bottoming taps are made parallel in the thread, the former being tapered slightly at and for two or three threads from the entering, as shown in Fig. 328. The threads are made parallel at the roots.

The Pratt and Whitney taper taps for use in machines are of the following form:—

The entering end of the tap is equal in diameter to the diameter of the tapping hole into which the tap will enter for a distance of two or three threads. The thread at the shank end is parallel both at the top and at the root for a distance equal, in length, to twice the diameter of the tap. The top of the thread has a straight taper running from the parallel part at the shank to the point or entering end, while the roots of the thread are made along this taper twice the taper that there is at the top of the thread, which is done to make the tap enter and take hold of the nut more easily.

Fig. 329

Fig. 329.

Fig. 330

Fig. 330.

A form of tap that cuts very freely on account of the absence of friction on the sides of the thread is shown in Fig. 329. The thread is cut in parallel steps, increasing in size towards the shank, the last step (from d to e in the figure) being the full size. The end of the tap at a being the proper size for the tapping hole, and the flutes not being carried through a, insures that the tap shall not be used in holes too small for the size of the tap, and thus is prevented a great deal of tap breakage. The bottom of the thread of the first parallel step (from a to b) is below the diameter of a, so as to relieve the sides of the thread of[I-104] friction and cause the tap to enter easily. The first tooth of each step does all the cutting, thus acting as a turning tool, while the step within the work holds the tooth to its cut, as shown in Fig. 330, in which n represents a nut and t the tap, both in section. The step c holds the tap to its work, and it is obvious that, as the tooth b enters, it will cut the thread to its own diameter, the rest of the teeth on that step merely following frictionless until the front tooth on the next step takes hold. Thus, to sharpen the tap equal to new, all that is required is to grind away the front tooth on each step, and it becomes practicable to sharpen the tap a dozen times without softening it at all. As a sample of duty, it may be mentioned that, at the Harris-Corliss Works, a tap of this class, 278 inches diameter, with a 4 pitch, and 10 inches long, will tap a hole 5 inches deep, passing the tap continuously through without any backing motion, two men performing the duty with a wrench 4 feet long over all, the work being of cast iron.

Another form of free cutting tap especially applicable to taps of large diameter has been designed by Professor Sweet. Its principles may be explained as follows:—

Fig. 331

Fig. 331.

Fig. 332

Fig. 332.

In the ordinary tap, with the taper four or five diameters in length, there are far more cutting-edges than are necessary to do the work; and if the taper is made shorter, the difficulty of too little room for chips presents itself. The evil results arising from the extra cutting edges are that, if all cut, then it is cutting the metal uselessly fine—consuming power for nothing; or if some of the cutting edges fail to cut, they burnish down the metal, not only wasting power, but making it all the harder for the following cutters. One plan to avoid this is to file away a portion of the cutting edges; but the method adopted in the Cornell University tap is still better. Assume that it is desired to make three following cutters, to remove the stock down to the dotted line in Fig. 331. Instead of each cutter taking off a layer one-third the thickness and the full width, the first cutter is cut away on each side to about one-third its full width, so that it cuts out the centre to its full depth, as shown in Fig. 331, the next cutter cutting out the metal at a, and so on. This is accomplished by filing, or in any other way cutting away the sides of one row of the teeth all the way up; next cutting away the upper sides of the next row and the lower sides of the third, leaving the fourth row (if it be a four-fluted tap) as it is left by the lathe, to insure a uniform pitch and a smooth thread.

Figs. 333, 334 and 335 represent an adjustable tap designed by C. R. French, of Providence, R. I., to thread holes accurate in diameter.

Fig. 333

Fig. 333.

Fig. 334

Fig. 334.

The plug tap, Fig. 333, has at its end a taper screw, and the tap is split up as far as the flutes extend, a second screw binds the two sides of the tap together, hence by means of the two screws the size of the tap may be regulated at will. In the third or bottoming tap, Fig. 334, the split extends farther up the shank, and four adjusting screws are used as shown, hence the parallelism of the tap is maintained.

Fig. 335

Fig. 335.

In the machine tap, Fig. 335, there are six adjusting screws, two of those acting to close the tap being at the extreme ends so as to strengthen it as much as possible.

In determining the number, the width, the depth, and the form of flutes for a tap, we have the following considerations. In a tap to be used in a machine and to pass entirely through the work, as in the case of tapping nuts, the flute need not be deep, because the taper part of the tap being long the cutting teeth extend farther along the tap; hence, each tooth takes a less amount of cut, producing less cuttings, and therefore less flute is required to hold them. In taps of this class, the thread being given clearance, the length of the teeth may be a maximum, because they are relieved of friction; on the other hand, however, the shallower and narrower the flute the stronger the tap, so long as there is room for the cuttings so that they shall not become wedged in the flutes. Taps for general use by hand are frequently used to tap holes that do not pass entirely through the work; hence, the taper tap must have a short length of taper so that the second tap may be enabled to carry a full thread as near as possible to the bottom of the hole without carrying so heavy a cut as to render it liable to breakage, and the second or plug tap must in turn have so short a length of its end tapered that it will not throw too much duty upon the bottoming tap. Now, according as the length of the taper on the taper tap is reduced, the duty of the teeth is increased, and more room is necessary in the flute to[I-105] receive the cuttings, and supposing the tap to be rotated continuously to its duty the flute must possess space enough to contain all the cuttings produced by the teeth, but on account of the cuttings filling the flutes and preventing the oil fed to the tap from flowing down the flute to the teeth it is found necessary in hand taps (when they cannot pass through the work, or when the depth of the hole is equal to more than about the tap diameter), to withdraw the tap and remove the cuttings. On account of the tap not being accurately guided in hand-tapping it produces a hole that is largest at its mouth, and it is found undesirable on this account to give any clearance to hand taps, because such clearance gives more liberty to the tap to wobble in the hole and to enlarge its diameter at the mouth. It is obvious also, that the less of the tap circumference removed to form the flutes the longer the tap-teeth and the more steadily the tap may be operated. On the other hand, however, the longer the teeth the greater the amount of friction between them and the thread in the hole and the more work there is involved in the tapping, because the tap must occasionally be rotated back a little to ease its cut, which it is found to do.

Fig. 336

Fig. 336.

Fig. 337

Fig. 337.

Fig. 338

Fig. 338.

Fig. 339

Fig. 339.

Fig. 340

Fig. 340.

Fig. 341

Fig. 341.

Fig. 336 represents a form of flute recommended by Brown and Sharp. The teeth are short, thus avoiding friction, and the flutes are shallow, which leaves the tap strong. The inclination of the cutting edges, as a b (the cutting direction of rotation being denoted by the arrow), is shown by the dotted lines, being in a direction to curve the chip or cutting somewhat upward and not throw them down upon the bottom of the flute. A more common form, and one that perhaps represents average American practice, is shown in Fig. 337, the cutting edges forming a radial line as denoted by the dotted line. The flute is deeper, giving more room for the chips, which is an advantage when the tap is required to cut a thread continuously without being moved back at all, but the tap is weaker on account of the increased flute depth, the teeth are longer and produce more friction, and the flutes are deeper than necessary for a tap having a long taper or that requires to be removed to clear out the cuttings. Fig. 338 shows the form of flute in the Pratt and Whitney Company’s hand taps, the cutting edges forming radial lines and the bottoms of the flutes being more rounded than is usual. It may here be remarked that if the flutes have comparatively sharp corners, as at c in Fig. 339, the tap will be liable to crack in the hardening process. The form of flute employed in the Whitworth tap is shown in Fig. 340; here there being but three flutes the teeth are comparatively long, and on this account there is increased friction. But, on the other hand, such a tap produces, when used by hand, more accurate work, the threaded hole being more parallel and of a diameter more nearly equal to that of the tap, it being observed that even though a hand tap have no clearance it will usually tap a hole somewhat larger than itself so that it will unwind easily. If a hand tap is given clearance not only will it cut a hole widest at the mouth, but it will cut a thread larger than itself in an increased degree, and, furthermore, when the tap requires to be wound back to extract it the fine cuttings will become locked in the threads and the points of the tap teeth are liable to become broken off. To ease the friction of long teeth, therefore, it is preferable to do so either as in Fig. 325 at a, b, c, or as in Fig. 341. In Fig. 325 the tops of the teeth are shown filed away, leaving each end full, so that the cuttings cannot get in, no matter in which direction the tap is rotated; but the clearance is not so complete as in Fig. 341, in which the teeth are supposed to be eased away within the area enclosed by dotted lines, which gives clearance to the bottom as well as to the tops and sides of the thread and leaves the ends of each tooth a full thread.

Concerning the number of flutes in taps, it is to be observed that the duty the tap is to be put to, has much influence in this respect. In hand tapping the object is to tap as parallel and straight as possible with the least expenditure of power. Now, the greater the number of flutes the less the tap is guided, because more of the circumferential guiding surface is cut away. But on the other hand, the less the number of flutes, and therefore the less the number of cutting edges, the more power it takes to operate the tap on account of the greater amount of friction between the tap and the walls of the hole. In hand tapping on what may be termed frame work (as distinguished from such loose work as nuts, &c.), the object is to tap the holes as parallel as possible with the least expenditure of power while avoiding having to remove the tap from the hole to clear it of the cuttings. Obviously the more flutes and cutting edges there are the more room there is for the cuttings and the less frequent the tap requires to be cleaned. If the tapping hole is round and straight the tapping may be made true and parallel if due care is taken, whatever the number of flutes, but less care will be required in proportion as there are less flutes, while, as before noted, more power and more frequent tap removals will be necessary. But if the hole is not round, other considerations intervene.

Fig. 342

Fig. 342.

Fig. 343

Fig. 343.

Fig. 344

Fig. 344.

Fig. 345

Fig. 345.

Thus in Fig. 342 we have a three-flute tap in a hole out of round at a, and it is obvious that when a cutting edge meets the recess at a, all three teeth will cease to cut; hence there will be no inducement for the tap to move over toward a. But in the case of the four-flute tap in Fig. 343, when the teeth come to a there will be a strain tending to force the teeth over toward the depression a. How much a given tap would actually move over would, of course, depend upon the amount of clearance; but whether the tap has clearance or not, the three-flute tap will not move over, while with four flutes the tap would certainly do so. Again, with an equal width of flute there is more of the circumference[I-106] tending to guide and steady the three-flute than the four-flute tap. If the hole has a projection instead of a depression, as at b, Figs. 344 and 345, then the advantage still remains with the three-flute tap, because in the case of the three flutes, any lateral movement of the tap will be resisted at the two points c and d, neither of which are directly opposite to the location of the projection b; hence, if the projection caused the tap to move laterally, say, 1100th inch, the effect at c and d would be very small, whereas in the four-flute, Fig. 345, the effect at e would be equal to the full amount of lateral motion of the tap.

Fig. 346

Fig. 346.

Fig. 347

Fig. 347.

Fig. 348

Fig. 348.

In hand taps the position of the square at the head of the tap with relation to the cutting-edges is of consequence; thus, in Fig. 346, there being a cutting-edge a opposite to the handle, any undue pressure on that end of the handle would cause a to cut too freely and the tap to enlarge the hole; whereas in Fig. 347 this tendency would be greatly removed, because the cutting-edges are not in line with the handle. In a three-flute tap it makes but little difference what are the relative positions of the square to the flutes, as will be seen in Fig. 348, where one handle of the wrench comes in the most favorable and the other in the most unfavorable position. Taps for use by hand and not intended to pass through the work are sometimes made with the shank and the square end which receive the wrench of enlarged diameter. This is done to avoid the twisting of the shank which sometimes occurs when the tap is employed in deep holes, giving it much strain, and also to avoid as much as possible the wearing and twisting of the square which occurs, because in the course of time the square holes in solid wrenches enlarge from wear, and the larger the square the less the wear under a given amount of strain.

Fig. 349

Fig. 349.

Brass finishers frequently form the heads of their taps as in Fig. 349, using a wrench with a slot in it that is longer than the flat of the tap head.

The thickness of the flat head at a is made equal for all the taps intended to be used with the same wrench. By this means one wrench may be used for many different diameters of taps.

Fig. 350

Fig. 350.

For gas, steam pipe, and other connections made by means of screw threads, and which require to be without leak when under pressure, the tap shown in Fig. 350 is employed. It is made taper and full threaded from end to end, so that the fittings may be entered easily into their places and screwed home sufficiently to form a tight joint.

The standard degree of taper for steam-pipe taps is 34 inch per foot of length, the taper being the same in the dies as on the taps. The threading tools for the pipes or casings for petroleum oil wells are given a taper of 38 inch per foot, because it was not found practicable to tap such large fittings with a quick taper, because of the excessive strain upon the threading tools. Ordinary pipe couplings are, however, tapped straight and stretch to[I-107] fit when screwed home on the pipe. Oil-well pipe couplings are tapped taper from both ends, and there is just enough difference in the taper on the pipe and that in the socket to show a bearing mark at the end only when the pipe and socket are tested with red marking.

PITCHES OF TAP THREADS IN USE IN THE UNITED STATES.